2. 狮子吼品义注巴利 2. Sīhanādavaggo
404 段
《小狮子吼经》的注释巴利
1. Cūḷasīhanādasuttavaṇṇanā
139 “如是我闻”这一句,就是《小狮子吼经》。因为这部经是依事缘而安立的,所以先说明它的缘起,然后再逐句解释。那么,它是在什么因缘下安立的呢?是在外道因为利养和恭敬而悲叹的时候安立的。据说,世尊当时按照《法嗣经》里所说的方式,得到了极大的利养和恭敬。这个世间有四种衡量标准,因此就有四种人:以容貌为标准的,就看重容貌、对容貌生起净信;以声音为标准的,就看重声音、对声音生起净信;以粗陋为标准的,就看重粗陋、对粗陋生起净信;以法为标准的,就看重法、对法生起净信。巴利
139.Evaṃme sutanti cūḷasīhanādasuttaṃ. Yasmā panassa atthuppattiko nikkhepo, tasmā taṃ dassetvā cassa anupubbapadavaṇṇanaṃ karissāma. Katarāya panidaṃ atthuppattiyā nikkhittanti? Lābhasakkārapaccayā titthiyaparidevite. Bhagavato kira dhammadāyādasutte vuttanayena mahālābhasakkāro uppajji. Catuppamāṇiko hi ayaṃ lokasannivāso, rūpappamāṇo rūpappasanno, ghosappamāṇo ghosappasanno, lūkhappamāṇo lūkhappasanno, dhammappamāṇo dhammappasannoti imesaṃ puggalānaṃ vasena catudhā ṭhito.
他们之间的差别是这样的:什么样的人是“以色为衡量标准、对色生起净信”呢?这里有一种人,看到对方的身高,或者看到对方的体宽,或者看到对方的体态,或者看到对方形体的圆满,就以这些作为衡量的标准,从而生起净信。这样的人,就称为“以色为衡量标准、对色生起净信的人”。巴利
Tesaṃ idaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ – katamo ca puggalo rūpappamāṇo rūpappasanno? Idhekacco puggalo ārohaṃ vā passitvā pariṇāhaṃ vā passitvā saṇṭhānaṃ vā passitvā pāripūriṃ vā passitvā tattha pamāṇaṃ gahetvā pasādaṃ janeti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo rūpappamāṇo rūpappasanno.
什么样的人是“以声音为标准、因声音而生净信的人”?这里有一种人,听到别人称赞、赞美、称扬,或者听到辗转传来的他人赞誉,就把这个声音当作标准,由此生起净信。这样的人就称为“以声音为标准、因声音而生净信的人”。巴利
Katamo ca puggalo ghosappamāṇo ghosappasanno? Idhekacco puggalo paravaṇṇanāya parathomanāya parapasaṃsanāya paravaṇṇahārikāya, tattha pamāṇaṃ gahetvā pasādaṃ janeti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo ghosappamāṇo ghosappasanno.
什么样的人是“以粗劣为标准、对粗劣生净信的人”?这里有一类人,看到粗劣的袈裟,或看到粗劣的钵,或看到粗劣的坐卧处,或看到种种苦行,就拿这些当作标准,生起净信。这样的人就称为以粗劣为标准、对粗劣生净信的人。巴利
Katamo ca puggalo lūkhappamāṇo lūkhappasanno? Idhekacco puggalo cīvaralūkhaṃ vā passitvā pattalūkhaṃ vā passitvā, senāsanalūkhaṃ vā passitvā vividhaṃ vā dukkarakārikaṃ passitvā tattha pamāṇaṃ gahetvā pasādaṃ janeti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo lūkhappamāṇo lūkhappasanno.
什么样的人是“以法为准量的人”和“对法有净信的人”呢?在这里,有一类人,看到戒,或者看到定,或者看到慧,就以此作为标准,生起净信。这种人就被称为“以法为准量的人”和“对法有净信的人”。巴利
Katamo ca puggalo dhammappamāṇo dhammappasanno? Idhekacco puggalo sīlaṃ vā passitvā samādhiṃ vā passitvā paññaṃ vā passitvā tattha pamāṇaṃ gahetvā pasādaṃ janeti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo dhammappamāṇo dhammappasannoti.
在这四种人当中,以身体测量为标准的人,看见世尊身高、体宽、身形、肤色圆满润泽,因为具足八十种随形好而庄严,就像一块缀满各种珍宝的金色大布;因为遍满三十二种大人相,就像群星闪耀的虚空;又像高达一百由旬、繁花盛开的昼度树,有十八拉他那高的身光环绕,庄严无比,身体殊妙无可比拟。见到这样的身相之后,他就只对正自觉者生起净信。巴利
Imesu catūsu puggalesu rūpappamāṇopi bhagavato ārohapariṇāhasaṇṭhānapāripūrivaṇṇapokkharataṃ, asītianubyañjanappaṭimaṇḍitattā nānāratanavicittamiva suvaṇṇamahāpaṭaṃ, dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇasamākiṇṇatāya tārāgaṇasamujjalaṃ viya gaganatalaṃ sabbaphāliphullaṃ viya ca yojanasatubbedhaṃ pāricchattakaṃ aṭṭhārasaratanubbedhaṃ byāmappabhāparikkhepaṃ sassirikaṃ anopamasarīraṃ disvā sammāsambuddheyeva pasīdati.
“声准量者”也是这样:他听到人们传颂世尊的种种事迹——在四大不可计数又十万劫的时间里,圆满了十巴拉密、十近巴拉密、十究竟巴拉密,舍弃了肢体,舍弃了儿女和妻子,舍弃了王位,舍弃了自身,舍弃了双眼——听到这样传扬的声音之后,就只对正自觉者生起净信。巴利
Ghosappamāṇopi, bhagavatā kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni dasa pāramiyo dasa upapāramiyo dasa paramatthapāramiyo pūritā aṅgapariccāgo puttadārapariccāgo, rajjapariccāgo attapariccāgo nayanapariccāgo ca katotiādinā nayena pavattaṃ ghosaṃ sutvā sammāsambuddheyeva pasīdati.
这位“粗劣标准者”也是这样:他看到世尊的衣服粗劣,就想:“如果世尊还过在家生活,一定会只穿迦尸国出产的最上等布料做的衣服。可是出家之后,他却满足于这种麻布做的粪扫衣,把这件事看得极为重要。”于是他只对正自觉者生起净信。他看到世尊的钵也粗劣,就想:“如果这位还在家生活,就会用上等的红色金器,享用配得上转轮王的香米饭。可是出家之后,他却拿着石钵,不分高低贵贱,挨家挨户依次乞食,得到一团食物就满足,把这件事看得极为重要。”于是他只对正自觉者生起净信。他看到住处也粗劣,就想:“这位如果还在家生活,就会住在适合三个季节的三座宫殿里,有各种歌舞娱乐围绕,像享受天界福报一样享受王室的荣华。可是现在出家了,却满足于树下住处、木板、石板、凳子、床座之类,把这件事看得极为重要。”于是他只对正自觉者生起净信。他看到世尊修苦行也是如此,就想:“他六年里只靠一点点绿豆粥、扁豆粥、草籽粥之类维持生命,修习无呼吸的禅定,对身体和性命都毫不顾恋地安住。啊,世尊真是能修难行苦行的人!”于是他只对正自觉者生起净信。巴利
Lūkhappamāṇopi bhagavato cīvaralūkhaṃ disvā ‘‘sace bhagavā agāraṃ ajjhāvasissa, kāsikavatthameva adhārayissa. Pabbajitvā panānena sāṇapaṃsukūlacīvarena santussamānena bhāriyaṃ kata’’nti sammāsambuddheyeva pasīdati. Pattalūkhampi disvā – ‘‘iminā agāraṃ ajjhāvasantena rattavarasuvaṇṇabhājanesu cakkavattibhojanārahaṃ sugandhasālibhojanaṃ paribhuttaṃ, pabbajitvā pana pāsāṇamayaṃ pattaṃ ādāya uccanīcakuladvāresu sapadānaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā laddhapiṇḍiyālopena santussamāno bhāriyaṃ karotī’’ti sammāsambuddheyeva pasīdati. Senāsanalūkhaṃ disvāpi – ‘‘ayaṃ agāraṃ ajjhāvasanto tiṇṇaṃ utūnaṃ anucchavikesu tīsu pāsādesu tividhanāṭakaparivāro dibbasampattiṃ viya rajjasiriṃ anubhavitvā idāni pabbajjūpagato rukkhamūlasenāsanādīsu dāruphalakasilāpaṭṭapīṭhamañcakādīhi santussamāno bhāriyaṃ karotī’’ti sammāsambuddheyeva pasīdati. Dukkarakārikamassa disvāpi – ‘‘chabbassāni nāma muggayūsakulatthayūsahareṇuyūsādīnaṃ pasaṭamattena yāpessati, appāṇakaṃ jhānaṃ jhāyissati, sarīre ca jīvite ca anapekkho viharissati, aho dukkarakārako bhagavā’’ti sammāsambuddheyeva pasīdati.
以法为衡量标准的人,见到世尊的戒德、定德、慧德,禅那、解脱、定、等至的成就,神通的圆满,双神变,从天降下,调伏巴提咖之子等许多稀有之事,便只对正自觉者生起净信。他们如此生信后,便向世尊献上广大的供养与恭敬。然而外道们的供养恭敬,却像巴韦鲁本生中的乌鸦那样衰落了。正如所说:巴利
Dhammappamāṇopi bhagavato sīlaguṇaṃ samādhiguṇaṃ paññāguṇaṃ jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattisampadaṃ abhiññāpāripūriṃ yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ devorohaṇaṃ pāthikaputtadamanādīni ca anekāni acchariyāni disvā sammāsambuddheyeva pasīdati, te evaṃ pasannā bhagavato mahantaṃ lābhasakkāraṃ abhiharanti. Titthiyānaṃ pana bāverujātake kākassa viya lābhasakkāro parihāyittha. Yathāha –
“ 因为见不到那只孔雀,那只冠羽绚丽、鸣声悦耳的孔雀;
在那里,人们用肉和果实供养了乌鸦。
当孔雀来到巴韦鲁时,它已经具备了美妙的声音。
那时,乌鸦的利养和恭敬就消失了。
只要法王、光明遍照的佛陀还没出现,
那时,人们不供养其他许多沙门和婆罗门。
当具足妙音的佛陀宣说正法时,
外道们的利养与恭敬便衰落了。”巴利
‘‘Adassanena morassa, sikhino mañjubhāṇino; Kākaṃ tattha apūjesuṃ, maṃsena ca phalena ca. Yadā ca sarasampanno, moro bāverumāgamā; Atha lābho ca sakkāro, vāyasassa ahāyatha. Yāva nuppajjati buddho, dhammarājā pabhaṅkaro; Tāva aññe apūjesuṃ, puthū samaṇabrāhmaṇe. Yadā ca sarasampanno, buddho dhammamadesayi; Atha lābho ca sakkāro, titthiyānaṃ ahāyathā’’ti. (jā. 1.4.153-156);
他们就这样失去了利养和恭敬,即使能在夜里照亮大约一两指宽的地方,到了太阳升起时,也像萤火虫一样光芒全无。巴利
Te evaṃ pahīnalābhasakkārā rattiṃ ekadvaṅgulamattaṃ obhāsetvāpi sūriyuggamane khajjopanakā viya hatappabhā ahesuṃ.
就像萤火虫在暗半月的夜晚,
它们显示光明,因为那正是它们的领域。
当那光芒具足的太阳升起时,
这时,那群萤火虫的光就消失了。
就像萤火虫一样,这世间众多外道也是如此;
在如同黑分月的世间,他们显露自己的功德。
当佛陀以无量光芒出现在世间,
外道们变得毫无光彩,就像太阳底下的萤火虫一样。巴利
Yathā hi khajjopanakā, kāḷapakkhamhi rattiyā; Nidassayanti obhāsaṃ, etesaṃ visayo hi so. Yadā ca rasmisampanno, abbhudeti pabhaṅkaro; Atha khajjupasaṅghānaṃ, pabhā antaradhāyati. Evaṃ khajjupasadisā, titthiyāpi puthū idha; Kāḷapakkhūpame loke, dīpayanti sakaṃ guṇaṃ. Yadā ca buddho lokasmiṃ, udeti amitappabho; Nippabhā titthiyā honti, sūriye khajjupakā yathāti.
他们就这样失去光彩,全身长满了疥疮之类的皮肤病,陷入极度的困顿潦倒,于是去到佛陀所在的地方、法所在的地方、僧团所在的地方,以及大众聚集的地方,站在街道中间、十字路口、四衢道口、集会厅里,到处哀叹:巴利
Te evaṃ nippabhā hutvā kacchupiḷakādīhi kiṇṇasarīrā paramapārijuññapattā yena buddho yena dhammo yena saṅgho yena ca mahājanassa sannipāto, tena tena gantvā antaravīthiyampi siṅghāṭakepi catukkepi sabhāyampi ṭhatvā paridevanti –
贤友们,难道只有乔达摩是沙门,我们就不是沙门吗?只有乔达摩的弟子是沙门,我们的弟子就不是沙门吗?布施给乔达摩的弟子有大果报,非布施给我们,布施给我们的弟子就没有大果报吗?乔达摩是沙门,我们也是沙门;乔达摩的弟子是沙门,我们的弟子也是沙门。布施给乔达摩的弟子有大果报,非布施给我们,布施给我们的弟子就没有大果报吗?你们布施、恭敬乔达摩的弟子,却不布施、不恭敬我们的弟子吗?难道乔达摩是以前的日子才出现的,而我们是从世间刚有众生时就一直存在的吗?巴利
‘‘Kiṃ bho samaṇoyeva gotamo samaṇo, mayaṃ assamaṇā; samaṇasseva gotamassa sāvakā samaṇā, amhākaṃ sāvakā assamaṇā? Samaṇasseva gotamassa sāvakānañcassa dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ, na amhākaṃ, sāvakānañca no dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ? Nanu samaṇopi gotamo samaṇo, mayampi samaṇā. Samaṇassapi gotamassa sāvakā samaṇā, amhākampi sāvakā samaṇā. Samaṇassapi gotamassa sāvakānañcassa dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ, amhākampi sāvakānañca no dinnaṃ mahapphalañceva? Samaṇassapi gotamassa sāvakānañcassa detha karotha, amhākampi sāvakānañca no detha sakkarotha? Nanu samaṇo gotamo purimāni divasāni uppanno, mayaṃ pana loke uppajjamāneyeva uppannā’’ti.
他们这样用各种方式吵嚷着。那时,比丘、比丘尼、近事男、近事女这四众弟子听到那些声音后,就禀告世尊:“尊者,外道们在说这样那样的话。”世尊听后说:“诸比丘,你们不要因为外道的话,就以为别处也有沙门。”世尊这样否定了其他外道有沙门性,同时在此教法中加以认可,就着这个因缘说了这部经:“诸比丘,只有在这里才有沙门。”巴利
Evaṃ nānappakāraṃ viravanti. Atha bhikkhū bhikkhuniyo upāsakā upāsikāyoti catasso parisā tesaṃ saddaṃ sutvā bhagavato ārocesuṃ ‘‘titthiyā bhante idañcidañca kathentī’’ti . Taṃ sutvā bhagavā – ‘‘mā tumhe, bhikkhave, titthiyānaṃ vacanena ‘aññatra samaṇo atthī’ti saññino ahuvatthā’’ti vatvā aññatitthiyesu samaṇabhāvaṃ paṭisedhento idheva ca anujānanto imissā atthuppattiyā idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇoti idaṃ suttaṃ abhāsi.
这里,“就在此处”指的是:就在这个教法当中。这个限定也应该理解为同样适用于后面几个词。因为第二等沙门也只在教法当中,不在别处。“沙门”指入流者。所以世尊说:“诸比丘,什么是第一沙门?诸比丘,在这里,比丘断尽三结,成为入流者,不会堕入恶趣,必定趣向正觉。诸比丘,这就是第一沙门。”巴利
Tattha idhevāti imasmiṃyeva sāsane. Ayaṃ pana niyamo sesapadesupi veditabbo. Dutiyādayopi hi samaṇā idheva, na aññattha. Samaṇoti sotāpanno. Tenevāha – ‘‘katamo ca, bhikkhave, paṭhamo samaṇo? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā sotāpanno hoti avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo, ayaṃ, bhikkhave, paṭhamo samaṇo’’ti (a. ni. 4.241).
“第二”指的是一来者。所以世尊这样说:“那么,什么是第二沙门?比丘们,在这里,有位比丘因为断尽了三结,因为贪、嗔、痴变得微薄,成为一来者,只再回到这个世间一次,就彻底终结了苦。比丘们,这就是第二沙门。”巴利
Dutiyoti sakadāgāmī. Tenevāha – ‘‘katamo ca? Bhikkhave, dutiyo samaṇo. Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṃ tanuttā sakadāgāmī hoti, sakideva imaṃ lokaṃ āgantvā dukkhassantaṃ karoti. Ayaṃ, bhikkhave, dutiyo samaṇo’’ti.
第三是指不来者。所以世尊这样说:比丘们,什么是第三沙门?比丘们,在这里,一位比丘因为断尽了五种下分结,成为化生者,在那里般涅槃,不再从那个世间返回。比丘们,这就是第三沙门。巴利
Tatiyoti anāgāmī. Tenevāha – ‘‘katamo ca, bhikkhave, tatiyo samaṇo? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu pañcannaṃ orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā opapātiko hoti tattha parinibbāyī anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā. Ayaṃ, bhikkhave, tatiyo samaṇo’’ti.
“第四”指的就是阿拉汉。所以世尊说:“比丘们,什么是第四种沙门?比丘们,在这里,一位比丘由于诸漏灭尽,于现法自己以证智作证无漏心解脱、慧解脱而住。比丘们,这就是第四种沙门。”(《增支部》4.241)因此,在这个地方,所指的就是这四种住果沙门。巴利
Catutthoti arahā. Tenevāha – ‘‘katamo ca, bhikkhave, catuttho samaṇo? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu āsavānaṃ khayā anāsavaṃ cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttiṃ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Ayaṃ, bhikkhave, catuttho samaṇo’’ti (a. ni. 4.241). Iti imasmiṃ ṭhāne cattāro phalaṭṭhakasamaṇāva adhippetā.
“空”就是空无、虚无。“外道之说”指的是:四种常住论、四种半常住论、四种有边无边论、四种不死矫乱论、两种无因生论、十六种有想论、八种无想论、八种非想非非想论、七种断灭论、五种现法涅槃论——所有这些就是《梵网经》里讲到的六十二种邪见。在这套教法之外的其他宗派的说法,就叫“外道之说”。这一切,相对于那四种住于果位的沙门来说都是空的,因为那些沙门在这里根本不存在。而且不只是相对于这四种沙门是空的,相对于四种住于道位的沙门,以及为了证得四道而精进修观的修行者——也就是总共十二种沙门——同样都是空的。世尊正是针对这个道理,在《大般涅槃经》中说道:巴利
Suññāti rittā tucchā. Parappavādāti cattāro sassatavādā, cattāro ekaccasassatikā, cattāro antānantikā, cattāro amarāvikkhepikā, dve adhiccasamuppannikā, soḷasa saññīvādā, aṭṭha asaññīvādā, aṭṭha nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā, satta ucchedavādā, pañca diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādāti ime sabbepi brahmajāle āgatā dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo. Ito bāhirānaṃ paresaṃ vādā parappavādā nāma. Te sabbepi imehi catūhi phalaṭṭhakasamaṇehi suññā, na hi te ettha santi. Na kevalañca eteheva suññā, catūhi pana maggaṭṭhakasamaṇehipi catunnaṃ maggānaṃ atthāya āraddhavipassakehipīti dvādasahipi samaṇehi suññā eva. Imameva atthaṃ sandhāya bhagavatā mahāparinibbāne vuttaṃ –
苏跋达,我二十九岁出家,
寻求何者为善。
已经超过五十年了,
苏跋达,从我出家那天起;
只证得正法之道的一部分。
除了这里,外面连一个沙门都没有。巴利
‘‘Ekūnatiṃso vayasā subhadda, Yaṃ pabbajiṃ kiṃ kusalānuesī; Vassāni paññāsa samādhikāni, Yato ahaṃ pabbajito subhadda; Ñāyassa dhammassa padesavattī, Ito bahiddhā samaṇopi natthi.
第二沙门也不存在,第三沙门也不存在,第四沙门也不存在。其他教派的教义缺少其他沙门,是空虚的。巴利
‘‘Dutiyopi samaṇo natthi, tatiyopi samaṇo natthi, catutthopi samaṇo natthi. Suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.214).
这里,“只在一定范围内生起”指的是已经开始修观的人。所以,把入流道中已经开始修观的人、已住于道的人、已住于果的人这三类合在一起,说“连一个沙门也没有”。把一来道中已经开始修观的人、已住于道的人、已住于果的人这三类也合在一起,说“第二个沙门也没有”。其余二道也是同样的方式。巴利
Ettha hi padesavattīti āraddhavipassako adhippeto. Tasmā sotāpattimaggassa āraddhavipassakaṃ maggaṭṭhaṃ phalaṭṭhanti tayopi ekato katvā samaṇopi natthīti āha. Sakadāgāmimaggassa āraddhavipassakaṃ maggaṭṭhaṃ phalaṭṭhanti tayopi ekato katvā dutiyopi samaṇo natthīti āha. Itaresupi dvīsu eseva nayo.
为什么这些沙门在其他地方不存在呢?因为那里不是田地。就像芥子立不住针尖,火在水面上烧不起来,种子在石头上发不了芽,同样,在外道的那些修行处所,这些沙门不会出现,只有在这套教法里才会出现。为什么呢?因为这里是田地。他们那里不是田地、这里是田地,应当理解为:圣道在他们那里不存在,在这里存在。所以世尊说:巴利
Kasmā panete aññattha natthīti? Akhettatāya. Yathā hi na āragge sāsapo tiṭṭhati, na udakapiṭṭhe aggi jalati, na piṭṭhipāsāṇe bījāni ruhanti, evameva bāhiresu titthāyatanesu na ime samaṇā uppajjanti, imasmiṃyeva pana sāsane uppajjanti. Kasmā? Khettatāya. Tesaṃ akhettatā ca khettatā ca ariyamaggassa abhāvato ca bhāvato ca veditabbā. Tenāha bhagavā –
苏跋达,在任何一种法与律的教导里,如果找不到圣八支道,那里就找不到真正的沙门,找不到第二位沙门,找不到第三位沙门,找不到第四位沙门。苏跋达,而在任何一种法与律的教导里,如果能找到圣八支道,那里就能找到真正的沙门,也能找到第二位沙门……乃至……也能找到第四位沙门。苏跋达,就在这法与律的教导里,能找到圣八支道。苏跋达,只有在这里才有真正的沙门,才有第二位沙门,才有第三位沙门,才有第四位沙门;其他外道的说法都是空的,没有真正的沙门。巴利
‘‘Yasmiṃ kho, subhadda, dhammavinaye ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo na upalabbhati, samaṇopi tattha na upalabbhati, dutiyopi tattha samaṇo na upalabbhati, tatiyopi tattha samaṇo na upalabbhati, catutthopi tattha samaṇo na upalabbhati. Yasmiñca kho, subhadda, dhammavinaye ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo upalabbhati, samaṇopi tattha upalabbhati, dutiyopi tattha…pe…. Catutthopi tattha samaṇo upalabbhati. Imasmiṃ kho, subhadda, dhammavinaye ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo upalabbhati, idheva, subhadda, samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo, idha tatiyo samaṇo, idha catuttho samaṇo, suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.214).
正因为外道的立足处不是福田,而佛陀的教法才是福田,所以,就像一头四足赤红、鬃毛威武的狮子——百兽之王,不会住在坟场或垃圾堆里,而是会深入纵横三千由旬的雪山,只住在宝石洞里;又像名叫六牙的龙王,不会投生在牧象族等九种龙族中,只会投生在六牙龙族里;又像云马王,不会投生在驴族或矮马族中,只会投生在信度河岸的信度马族里;又像能满一切所愿、令人心悦的摩尼宝珠,不会出现在垃圾堆或土丘之类的地方,只会出现在毗富罗山内部;又像名叫暗红眼鱼王,不会生在小池塘里,只会生在深达八万四千由旬的大海中;又像身长一百五十由旬的金翅鸟王,不会住在村口的蓖麻林之类的地方,而是会深入大海,只住在辛婆梨池林中;又像持国天天鹅王,不会住在村口的水坑之类的地方,而是由九万只天鹅围绕,只住在杂色峰山上;又像统御四洲的转轮王,不会投生在低贱的家族中,只会投生在血统纯净、不相混杂的刹帝利家族里。同样,在這些沙门当中,哪怕一位沙门也不会出现在外道的立足处,只会出现在以圣道为界限的佛陀教法中。因此世尊说:“诸比丘,只有在这里才有沙门……其他外道的沙门众都是空的。”巴利
Evaṃ yasmā titthāyatanaṃ akhettaṃ, sāsanaṃ khettaṃ, tasmā yathā surattahatthapādo sūrakesarako sīho migarājā na susāne vā saṅkārakūṭe vā paṭivasati, tiyojanasahassavitthataṃ pana himavantaṃ ajjhogāhetvā maṇiguhāyaṃyeva paṭivasati. Yathā ca chaddanto nāgarājā na gocariyahatthikulādīsu navasu nāgakulesu uppajjati, chaddantakuleyeva uppajjati. Yathā ca valāhako assarājā na gadrabhakule vā ghoṭakakule vā uppajjati, sindhuyā tīre pana sindhavakuleyeva uppajjati. Yathā ca sabbakāmadadaṃ manoharaṃ maṇiratanaṃ na saṅkārakūṭe vā paṃsupabbatādīsu vā uppajjati, vepullapabbatabbhantareyeva uppajjati. Yathā ca timirapiṅgalo maccharājā na khuddakapokkharaṇīsu uppajjati, caturāsītiyojanasahassagambhīre mahāsamuddeyeva uppajjati. Yathā ca diyaḍḍhayojanasatiko supaṇṇarājā na gāmadvāre eraṇḍavanādīsu paṭivasati, mahāsamuddaṃ pana ajjhogāhetvā simbalidahavaneyeva paṭivasati. Yathā ca dhataraṭṭho suvaṇṇahaṃso na gāmadvāre āvāṭakādīsu paṭivasati, navutihaṃsasahassaparivāro hutvā cittakūṭapabbateyeva paṭivasati. Yathā ca catuddīpissaro cakkavattirājā na nīcakule uppajjati, asambhinnajātikhattiyakuleyeva pana uppajjati. Evameva imesu samaṇesu ekasamaṇopi na aññatitthāyatane uppajjati, ariyamaggaparikkhitte pana buddhasāsaneyeva uppajjati. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo…pe… suññā parappavādā samaṇehi samaṇebhi aññehī’’ti.
“正确地发出狮子吼”这句话里,“正确地”是指有理由、合乎道理、有根据。“狮子吼”是指最殊胜的吼声、无所畏惧的吼声、无人能回应的吼声。因为这四种沙门只存在于这里,所以这种宣称就叫最殊胜的吼声,也就是至高无上的音声。当有人说“这些沙门只存在于这里”时,他对别处没有任何恐惧或疑虑,所以这叫无所畏惧的吼声。又因为在布拉纳等外道那里,没有一个人能站出来说“我们的教法里也有这些沙门”,他们没有这个能力,所以这种宣称就叫无人能回应的吼声。因此说:“所谓狮子吼,就是最殊胜的吼声、无所畏惧的吼声、无人能回应的吼声。”巴利
Sammā sīhanādaṃ nadathāti ettha sammāti hetunā nayena kāraṇena. Sīhanādanti seṭṭhanādaṃ abhītanādaṃ appaṭinādaṃ. Imesañhi catunnaṃ samaṇānaṃ idheva atthitāya ayaṃ nādo seṭṭhanādo nāma hoti uttamanādo. ‘‘Ime samaṇā idheva atthī’’ti vadantassa aññato bhayaṃ vā āsaṅkā vā natthīti abhītanādo nāma hoti. ‘‘Amhākampi sāsane ime samaṇā atthī’’ti pūraṇādīsu ekassāpi uṭṭhahitvā vattuṃ asamatthatāya ayaṃ nādo appaṭinādo nāma hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sīhanādanti seṭṭhanādaṃ abhītanādaṃ appaṭināda’’nti.
140 “这种情形确实存在”,意思是这个原因确实存在。“那些外道”,是指由于某种原因而成为外道的人。在这里,应当了解“渡处”,应当了解“造渡处者”,应当了解“外道”,应当了解“外道弟子”。所谓“渡处”,就是六十二种邪见。因为众生在这些见解中渡越、浮沉、浮上来又沉下去,所以称为“渡处”。这些见解的制造者,称为“造渡处者”。接受他的见解而出家的人,称为“外道”。供给他们生活所需的人,应当知道就是“外道弟子”。“游行者”,是指舍弃了在家束缚而进入出家生活的人。“依靠”,是指依止、立足处、支撑。“力量”,是指体力。“由彼”,意思是:你们正是依靠那种依靠或那种力量,才这样说的。巴利
140.Ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ vijjatīti idaṃ kho pana kāraṇaṃ vijjati. Yaṃ aññatitthiyāti yena kāraṇena aññatitthiyā. Ettha ca titthaṃ jānitabbaṃ, titthakaro jānitabbo titthiyā jānitabbā, titthiyasāvakā jānitabbā. Titthaṃnāma dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo. Ettha hi sattā taranti uppalavanti ummujjanimujjaṃ karonti, tasmā titthanti vuccanti. Tāsaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ uppādetā titthakaro nāma. Tassa laddhiṃ gahetvā pabbajitā titthiyā nāma. Tesaṃ paccayadāyakā titthiyasāvakāti veditabbā. Paribbājakāti gihibandhanaṃ pahāya pabbajjūpagatā. Assāsoti avassayo patiṭṭhā upatthambho. Balanti thāmo. Yena tumheti yena assāsena vā balena vā evaṃ vadetha.
贤友,我们确实是依靠那位世尊——那位了知者、看见者、阿拉汉、正自觉者——才这样说。这里面的简要含义是:
那位世尊,圆满了三十种巴拉密,摧毁了一切烦恼,证得了无上的正自觉。他以了知各类众生的习性和潜在倾向,就像看放在手掌中的庵摩罗果一样,看见一切应当了知的法。而且,他以宿命通等了知,以天眼见。他以三明或六神通了知,以在一切处都无障碍的遍眼见。他以能了知一切法的智慧了知,以极其清净的肉眼看见一切众生肉眼所看不到的、被墙壁等遮挡的色法。他以成就自身利益的、以定为基础的通达智慧了知,以成就他人利益的、以悲为基础的说法智慧看见。
因为摧毁了烦恼之敌,又因为值得接受资具等供养,所以是阿拉汉;因为自己正确地、完全地觉悟了诸谛,所以是正自觉者。或者也可以说:他了知障碍之法,看见出离之法;因为摧毁了烦恼之敌,所以是阿拉汉;因为自己正确地、完全地觉悟了一切法,所以是正自觉者。
就这样,以四种无畏、以四种方式赞叹的那位世尊,宣说了这四种法。我们是因为在自己身上看到了这些法,才这样说,并不是依靠国王、大臣等的支持或体力。巴利
Atthikho no, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhenāti ettha ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – yo so bhagavā samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā sabbakilese bhañjitvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, tena bhagavatā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ āsayānusayaṃ jānatā, hatthatale ṭhapitaṃ āmalakaṃ viya sabbaṃ ñeyyadhammaṃ passatā. Apica pubbenivāsādīhi jānatā, dibbena cakkhunā passatā. Tīhi vijjāhi chahi vā pana abhiññāhi jānatā, sabbattha appaṭihatena samantacakkhunā passatā. Sabbadhammajānanasamatthāya paññāya jānatā, sabbasattānaṃ cakkhuvisayātītāni tirokuṭṭādigatāni vāpi rūpāni ativisuddhena maṃsacakkhunā passatā. Attahitasādhikāya samādhipadaṭṭhānāya paṭivedhapaññāya jānatā, parahitasādhikāya karuṇāpadaṭṭhānāya desanāpaññāya passatā. Arīnaṃ hatattā paccayādīnaṃ arahattā ca arahatā, sammā sāmañca saccānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddhena. Antarāyikadhamme vā jānatā, niyyānikadhamme passatā. Kilesārīnaṃ hatattā arahatā, sammā sāmaṃ sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddhenāti, evaṃ catuvesārajjavasena catūhi ākārehi thomitena cattāro dhammā akkhātā, ye mayaṃ attani sampassamānā evaṃ vadema, na rājarājamahāmattādīnaṃ upatthambhaṃ kāyabalanti.
对导师的净信,是指以“彼世尊确实是……”这种方式随念佛的功德时生起的净信。对法的净信,是指以“法由世尊善说……”这种方式随念法的功德时生起的净信。于戒的圆满行,是指在圣者所喜爱的戒上圆满实践。所谓圣者所喜爱的戒,就是五戒。因为圣弟子即使转生到别的世界,即使不知道自己已是圣弟子,也绝不会违犯这些戒。就算有人对他说:“你接受整个转轮王的王位,然后去杀死一只小苍蝇吧。”他绝不可能照做。如此,圣者的戒是圣者们所喜爱、所珍视、所悦意的。正是针对这些,才说“于戒的圆满行”。巴利
Sattharipasādoti ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā nayena buddhaguṇe anussarantānaṃ uppannappasādo. Dhamme pasādoti ‘‘svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo’’tiādinā nayena dhammaguṇe anussarantānaṃ uppannappasādo. Sīlesu paripūrakāritāti ariyakantesu sīlesu paripūrakāritā. Ariyakantasīlāni nāma pañcasīlāni. Tāni hi bhavantaragatopi ariyasāvako attano ariyasāvakabhāvaṃ ajānantopi na vītikkamati. Sacepi hi naṃ koci vadeyya – ‘‘imaṃ sakalaṃ cakkavattirajjaṃ sampaṭicchitvā khuddakamakkhikaṃ jīvitā voropehī’’ti, aṭṭhānametaṃ, yaṃ so tassa vacanaṃ kareyya. Evaṃ ariyānaṃ sīlāni kantāni piyāni manāpāni. Tāni sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘sīlesu paripūrakāritā’’ti.
所谓“同法者”,就是比丘、比丘尼、在学尼、沙弥、沙弥尼、近事男、近事女这七类人,他们是共同依法而行的人。其中,比丘和比丘们一起依法而行,因为他们受持同样的学处。同样,比丘尼和比丘尼们……近事女和近事女们,入流者和入流者们,一来者和……不来者们一起依法而行。所以,所有这些人都叫作“同法者”。不过在这里,特指圣弟子。因为他们即使转生到别的世界,对所见之道也没有分歧,所以他们是彻底地同法而行,是真正的同法者。以上是通过“世尊的声闻僧团是善行道者……”等方式随念僧团时生起净信的说明。到这里,已经讲完了入流者的四个要素。巴利
Sahadhammikā kho panāti bhikkhu bhikkhunī sikkhamānā sāmaṇero sāmaṇerī upāsako upāsikāti ete satta sahadhammacārino. Etesu hi bhikkhu bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ sahadhammaṃ carati samānasikkhatāya. Tathā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi…pe… upāsikā upāsikāhi, sotāpanno sotāpannehi, sakadāgāmī…pe… anāgāmīhi sahadhammaṃ carati. Tasmā sabbepete sahadhammikāti vuccanti. Apicettha ariyasāvakāyeva adhippetā. Tesañhi bhavantarepi maggadassanamhi vivādo natthi, tasmā te accantaṃ ekadhammacāritāya sahadhammikā. Iminā, ‘‘suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’’tiādinā nayena saṅghaṃ anussarantānaṃ uppannappasādo kathito. Ettāvatā cattāri sotāpannassa aṅgāni kathitāni honti.
贤友,这四种法确实是那位世尊为我们开示的,是我们的依怙和力量;我们正是亲眼在自身中看到这些法,才这样说。巴利
Ime kho no, āvusoti, āvuso, ime cattāro dhammā tena bhagavatā amhākaṃ assāso ceva balañcāti akkhātā, ye mayaṃ attani sampassamānā evaṃ vadema.
141 “我们的导师”——用这句话,指的是布拉纳·咖萨巴等六位外道导师。就像现在在佛教教法里,人们对亲教师、戒师等生起“我的亲教师、我的戒师”这种带着世俗执著的情感。他们所说的“对导师的净信”,指的就是这类情感。但那位长老说:“导师不是属于某一个人或两个人的,而是包括天人在内的整个世间唯一的导师。所以外道仅凭‘我们的导师’这一个词,就把导师分割成私有的,光凭这一句就已经自相矛盾、站不住脚了。”
“对法的净信”——这就像现在在教法里,人们执著“我的长部、我的中部”,他们所说的,就是对自己各自所学的教法生起的世俗执著情感。
“对戒”——指的是羊戒、牛戒、公羊戒、狗戒等。
“贤友,在这里”——这里的“在这里”,是针对净信说的。
“有什么用意”——就是有什么特别的用意。
“也就是”——指你们和我们之间的差别。那到底是什么呢?你们在四个地方有净信,我们也有。在这净信上,你们和我们,难道不就像切开的两块金子一样,本来就是一回事吗?于是他们言辞变得温和一致,就这样安立了。巴利
141.Yo amhākaṃ satthāti iminā pūraṇakassapādike cha satthāro apadissanti. Yathā pana idāni sāsane ācariyupajjhāyādīsu ‘‘amhākaṃ ācariyo, amhākaṃ upajjhāyo’’ti gehasitapemaṃ hoti. Evarūpaṃ pemaṃ sandhāya ‘‘satthari pasādo’’ti vadanti. Thero panāha – ‘‘yasmā satthā nāma na ekassa, na dvinnaṃ hoti, sadevakassa lokassa ekova satthā, tasmā titthiyā ‘amhākaṃ satthā’ ti ekapadeneva satthāraṃ visuṃ katvā imināva padena viruddhā parājitā’’ti. Dhamme pasādoti idaṃ pana yathā idāni sāsane ‘‘amhākaṃ dīghanikāyo amhākaṃ majjhimanikāyo’’ti mamāyanti, evaṃ attano attano pariyattidhamme gehasitapemaṃ sandhāya vadanti. Sīlesūti ajasīlagosīlameṇḍakasīlakukkurasīlādīsu. Idha no āvusoti ettha idhāti pasādaṃ sandhāya vadanti. Ko adhippayāsoti ko adhikappayogo. Yadidanti yamidaṃ tumhākañceva amhākañca nānākaraṇaṃ vadeyyātha. Taṃ kiṃ nāma? Tumhākampi hi catūsu ṭhānesu pasādo, amhākampi. Nanu etasmiṃ pasāde tumhe ca amhe ca dvedhā bhinnasuvaṇṇaṃ viya ekasadisāti vācāya samadhurā hutvā aṭṭhaṃsu.
这时,为了破除他们之间那种和合,世尊说了“如此说者……”等话。其中,“一种究竟”是指:那种净信最终达到的究竟。世尊是在问:它到底是一种,还是多种?因为在各个时期,没有人不施设某种究竟。婆罗门以梵天界为究竟,大苦行者以光音天为究竟,游行者以遍净天为究竟,邪命外道则以他们构想出来的“无边意”无想有为究竟。而在这个教法中,究竟就是阿拉汉果。这些人都说只有阿拉汉果才是究竟。但他们只是依据各自的见解,把梵天界等施设为究竟。所以,每个人都按照自己宗派所得的理论,只施设一种究竟。为了说明这一点,世尊才说出“正确解答者……”等话。巴利
Atha nesaṃ taṃ samadhurataṃ bhindanto bhagavā evaṃ vādinotiādimāha. Tattha ekā niṭṭhāti yā tassa pasādassa pariyosānabhūtā niṭṭhā, kiṃ sā ekā, udāhu puthūti evaṃ pucchathāti vadati. Yasmā pana tasmiṃ tasmiṃ samaye niṭṭhaṃ apaññapento nāma natthi, brāhmaṇānañhi brahmaloko niṭṭhā, mahātāpasānaṃ ābhassarā, paribbājakānaṃ subhakiṇhā, ājīvakānaṃ ‘‘anantamānaso’’ti evaṃ parikappito asaññībhavo . Imasmiṃ sāsane pana arahattaṃ niṭṭhā. Sabbeva cete arahattameva niṭṭhāti vadanti. Diṭṭhivasena pana brahmalokādīni paññapenti. Tasmā attano attano laddhivasena ekameva niṭṭhaṃ paññapenti, taṃ dassetuṃ bhagavā sammā byākaramānātiādimāha.
现在,比丘们有一种究竟,外道们也有一种究竟,双方就像两个打官司的人一样各执一端、僵持不下。于是世尊为了开示审察辨别的做法,说了“那么,贤友,这种究竟是属于有贪者的,还是属于离贪者的?”等话。在这里,被贪欲等染污的人根本谈不上有什么究竟;倘若他们有究竟,那么狗、豺狼之类的动物也该有究竟了。外道们看出了这个过失,就以“贤友,那究竟是离贪者的”这种方式来作答。巴利
Idāni bhikkhūnampi ekā niṭṭhā, titthiyānampi ekā niṭṭhāti dvīsu aṭṭakārakesu viya ṭhitesu bhagavā anuyogavattaṃ dassento sā panāvuso, niṭṭhā sarāgassa, udāhu vītarāgassātiādimāha. Tattha yasmā rāgarattādīnaṃ niṭṭhā nāma natthi. Yadi siyā, soṇasiṅgālādīnampi siyāti imaṃ dosaṃ passantānaṃ titthiyānaṃ ‘‘vītarāgassa āvuso sā niṭṭhā’’tiādinā nayena byākaraṇaṃ dassitaṃ.
在这里,“贤者”指的是智者。“随顺与违背者”,是指因贪而随顺、因嗔而违背的人。“乐戏论者、喜戏论者”:这里,“乐”是指在其中感到愉悦;以戏论为乐,所以叫“乐戏论者”;对戏论感到欣喜,所以叫“喜戏论者”。而“戏论”,是指那些以陶醉、放逸的状态生起的渴爱、邪见、慢等的总称。不过在这里,特指渴爱和邪见。在“有贪者”等五处,出现的虽然是同一种烦恼,但应当知道,它因表现形态不同而有这些不同的名称。因为在说“有贪者”的地方,是就五种欲乐方面的贪染而说的;在“有渴爱者”处,是就存在方面的渴爱而说的;在“有取者”处,是就执取的意义而说的;在“随顺与违背者”处,是就成对的方式而说的;在“乐戏论者”处,是就显示戏论生起的方式而说的。或者也可以说:这里的“有贪者”是就不善根而说的;“有渴爱者”,在这里是从渴爱为缘来显示执取的意义;其余部分与前面相同。上座则说:“为什么要这样分别呢?因为贪其实只有一个,从染著的角度称为‘贪’;从造成渴爱的角度称为‘渴爱’;从执取的意义称为‘取’;从成对的角度称为‘随顺与违背’;从显示戏论生起的角度称为‘戏论’。”巴利
Tattha viddasunoti paṇḍitassa. Anuruddhapaṭiviruddhassāti rāgena anuruddhassa kodhena paṭiviruddhassa. Papañcārāmassa papañcaratinoti ettha āramanti etthāti ārāmo. Papañco ārāmo assāti papañcārāmo. Papañce rati assāti papañcarati. Papañcoti ca mattapamattākārabhāvena pavattānaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhimānānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Idha pana taṇhādiṭṭhiyova adhippetā. Sarāgassātiādīsu pañcasu ṭhānesu ekova kileso āgato. Tassa ākārato nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sarāgassāti hi vuttaṭṭhāne pañcakāmaguṇikarāgavasena gahito. Sataṇhassāti bhavataṇhāvasena. Saupādānassāti gahaṇavasena. Anuruddhapaṭiviruddhassāti yugaḷavasena. Papañcārāmassāti papañcuppattidassanavasena. Sarāgassāti vā ettha akusalamūlavasena gahito. Sataṇhassāti ettha taṇhāpaccayā upādānadassanavasena. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva. Thero panāha ‘‘kasmā evaṃ viddhaṃsetha? Ekoyeva hi ayaṃ lobho rajjanavasena rāgoti vutto. Taṇhākaraṇavasena taṇhā. Gahaṇaṭṭhena upādānaṃ. Yugaḷavasena anurodhapaṭivirodho. Papañcuppattidassanaṭṭhena papañco’’ti.
142 现在,为了说明这些烦恼的根本——邪见之论,世尊说了“诸比丘,有两种见……”等等。巴利
142. Idāni imesaṃ kilesānaṃ mūlabhūtaṃ diṭṭhivādaṃ dassento dvemā, bhikkhave, diṭṭhiyotiādimāha.
在那里,存在见即是常见,无有见即是断灭见。被存在见粘住,就是借着渴爱和邪见的力量粘在常见上;亲近,也是借着渴爱和邪见的力量去亲近;固守,也是借着渴爱和邪见的力量深入其中。他们与无有见相违,就是他们全都和主张断灭的人对立,他们对那些主张断灭的人说:你们这些愚痴无智的人根本不知道,这个世界是常的,这个世界不会断灭。他们总是陷在争吵和争论里。第二次也是同样的方法。巴利
Tattha bhavadiṭṭhīti sassatadiṭṭhi. Vibhavadiṭṭhīti ucchedadiṭṭhi. Bhavadiṭṭhiṃ allīnāti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena sassatadiṭṭhiṃ allīnā. Upagatāti taṇhādiṭṭhivaseneva upagatā. Ajjhositāti taṇhādiṭṭhivaseneva anupaviṭṭhā. Vibhavadiṭṭhiyā te paṭiviruddhāti te sabbe ucchedavādīhi saddhiṃ – ‘‘tumhe andhabālā na jānātha, sassato ayaṃ loko, nāyaṃ loko ucchijjatī’’ti paṭiviruddhā niccaṃ kalahabhaṇḍanapasutā viharanti. Dutiyavārepi eseva nayo.
在“集”等语句中,见的集有两种:刹那集和缘集。刹那集就是见的生起。缘集则有八个立足处,即:蕴是见的立足处,无明也是,触也是,想也是,寻也是,不如理作意也是,恶友也是,从他人口中听闻也是见的立足处。正如《无碍解道》所说:“蕴是因,蕴是缘,诸见依蕴而生起,因此蕴是见的立足处。无明……触……想……寻……不如理作意……恶友……从他人口中听闻是因,从他人口中听闻是缘,诸见依从他人口中听闻而生起,因此从他人口中听闻也是见的立足处。”
“灭”也有两种:刹那灭和缘灭。刹那灭就是尽、衰、坏、崩、无常、消失。缘灭就是入流道,因为入流道被称为断除见的立足处。巴利
Samudayañcātiādīsu dve diṭṭhīnaṃ samudayā khaṇikasamudayo paccayasamudayo ca. Khaṇikasamudayo diṭṭhīnaṃ nibbatti. Paccayasamudayo aṭṭha ṭhānāni. Seyyathidaṃ, khandhāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ, avijjāpi, phassopi, saññāpi, vitakkopi, ayonisomanasikāropi, pāpamittopi, paratoghosopi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Khandhā hetu khandhā paccayo diṭṭhīnaṃ upādāya samuṭṭhānaṭṭhena. Evaṃ khandhāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Avijjā… phasso… saññā… vitakko… ayonisomanasikāro… pāpamitto… paratoghoso hetu, paratoghoso paccayo diṭṭhīnaṃ upādāya samuṭṭhānaṭṭhena. Evaṃ paratoghosopi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ’’ (paṭi. ma. 1.124). Atthaṅgamāpi dveyeva khaṇikatthaṅgamo paccayatthaṅgamo ca. Khaṇikatthaṅgamo nāma khayo vayo bhedo paribhedo aniccatā antaradhānaṃ. Paccayatthaṅgamo nāma sotāpattimaggo. Sotāpattimaggo hi diṭṭhiṭṭhānasamugghātoti vutto.
“味著”是指以见为根本的利益。对此有这样的说法:“导师持有什么见,弟子们就持有什么见;持那种见的弟子们恭敬、尊重、敬仰、供养导师,由此因缘获得衣服、饮食、住处、生病所需的药物和生活用品。比丘们,这就是见在现世带来的利益。”
“过患”是指以执取见为根本的灾祸。应当通过蝙蝠苦行、金鸡独立式的精进、睡荆棘床、忍受五处炽热、从高处跳下、拔除头发胡须、无息禅那等来理解。
“出离”是指诸见的出离,也就是涅槃。“不如实知”是指不能如实了知这一切。“不能从苦中解脱”是指不能从整个轮回之苦中解脱。以此显示他们确实没有终结。“能从苦中解脱”是指能从整个轮回之苦中解脱。以此显示他们确实有终结,就像斩断两个诉讼者的争执一样,确立在教法之中确有终结。巴利
Assādanti diṭṭhimūlakaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘yaṃdiṭṭhiko satthā hoti, taṃdiṭṭhikā sāvakā honti. Yaṃdiṭṭhikā satthāraṃ sāvakā sakkaronti, garuṃ karonti, mānenti, pūjenti, labhanti tatonidānaṃ cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhāraṃ. Ayaṃ, bhikkhave, diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhadhammiko ānisaṃso’’ti. Ādīnavanti diṭṭhiggahaṇamūlakaṃ upaddavaṃ. So vaggulivataṃ ukkuṭikappadhānaṃ kaṇṭakāpassayatā pañcātapatappanaṃ sānupapātapatanaṃ kesamassuluñcanaṃ appoṇakaṃ jhānantiādīnaṃ vasenaṃ veditabbo. Nissaraṇanti diṭṭhīnaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nāma nibbānaṃ. Yathābhūtaṃnappajānantīti ye etaṃ sabbaṃ yathāsabhāvaṃ na jānanti. Na parimuccanti dukkhasmāti sakalavaṭṭadukkhato na parimuccanti. Iminā etesaṃ niṭṭhā nāma natthīti dasseti. Parimuccanti dukkhasmāti sakalavaṭṭadukkhato parimuccanti. Iminā etesaṃ niṭṭhā nāma atthīti dvinnaṃ aṭṭakārakānaṃ aṭṭaṃ chindanto viya sāsanasmiṃyeva niṭṭhāya atthitaṃ patiṭṭhapeti.
143 现在为了说明怎样断除邪见,世尊说了“比丘们,有这四种取”等等。关于这些的详细解说,在《清净之道》里已经讲过了。巴利
143. Idāni diṭṭhicchedanaṃ dassento cattārimāni, bhikkhave, upādānānītiādimāha. Tesaṃ vitthārakathā visuddhimagge vuttāyeva.
自称“遍知一切取”的人是这样声称的:我们说的是对一切取的遍知和超越。他们就是这样自称的。然而,他们并不能正确地主张遍知一切取,也就是说,不能正确地安立对一切取的超越。有些人只安立对欲取的遍知,有些人只安立对见取的遍知,有些人还加上戒禁取的遍知。但是,安立对我语取的遍知的人,根本不存在。为了说明他们之间的差别,论中说了“安立欲取的遍知”等话。在这里,其实所有人都在安立欲取的遍知,因为连九十六种外道也说“出家人不应享用诸欲”,他们不会认可“受用感官对象这件事是可以的”,而是认定它是不允许的。谁要是去受用,就是以偷盗的方式在受用。因此说“安立欲取的遍知”。巴利
Sabbupādānapariññāvādā paṭijānamānāti mayaṃ sabbesaṃ upādānānaṃ pariññaṃ samatikkamaṃ vadāmāti evaṃ paṭijānamānā. Na sammā sabbupādānapariññanti sabbesaṃ upādānānaṃ samatikkamaṃ sammā na paññapenti. Keci kāmupādānamattassa pariññaṃ paññapenti. Keci diṭṭhupādānamattassa paññapenti, keci sīlabbatupādānassāpi. Attavādupādānassa pana pariññaṃ paññapento nāma natthi. Tesaṃ pana bhedaṃ dassento kāmupādānassa pariññaṃ paññapentītiādimāha. Tattha sabbepi kāmupādānassa pariññaṃ paññapentiyeva, channavuti pāsaṇḍāpi hi ‘‘kāmā kho pabbajitena na sevitabbā’’ti vatthupaṭisevanaṃ kāmaṃ kappatīti na paññapenti, akappiyameva katvā paññapenti. Ye pana sevanti, te theyyena sevanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kāmupādānassa pariññaṃ paññapentī’’ti.
因为他们拿着“没有布施”这类说法去行持,执取“靠戒得清净、靠苦行誓愿得清净、靠修习得清净”,不肯放下自我取执,所以就不施设对见取的遍知,不施设对戒禁取的遍知,也不施设对我语取的遍知。这是什么原因呢?他们为什么不施设?意思是说,那些尊者不能如实了知这三种原因。然而,如果有人能如实了知应当断除的见和戒禁,并因此施设了这两种遍知,那么后面就针对他们说了两段。其中,执取“有布施”等说法的人,施设了对见取的遍知;执取“不是靠戒得清净,不是靠誓愿得清净,不是靠修习得清净”的人,施设了对戒禁取的遍知。可是,没有一个人能施设对我语取的遍知。因为即使是证得八等至的人,即使是能用双手抚摸日月而行走的外道,也只是施设了三种遍知,却无法舍弃我语。所以他们一次又一次地坠落在轮回里,就像那只厌弃大地的兔子一样。巴利
Yasmā ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādīni gahetvā caranti. ‘‘Sīlena suddhi vatena suddhi, bhāvanāya suddhī’’ti gaṇhanti, attupaladdhiṃ na pajahanti, tasmā na diṭṭhupādānassa, na sīlabbatupādānassa , na attavādupādānassa pariññaṃ paññapenti. Taṃ kissa hetūti taṃ apaññāpanaṃ etesaṃ kissa hetu, kiṃ kāraṇā? Imāni hi te bhontoti yasmā te bhonto imāni tīṇi kāraṇāni yathāsabhāvato na jānantīti attho. Ye panettha dvinnaṃ pariññānaṃ paññāpanakāraṇaṃ diṭṭhiñceva sīlabbatañca ‘‘etaṃ pahātabba’’nti yathāsabhāvato jānanti. Te sandhāya parato dve vārā vuttā. Tattha ye ‘‘atthi dinna’’ntiādīni gaṇhanti, te diṭṭhupādānassa pariññaṃ paññapenti. Ye pana ‘‘na sīlena suddhi, na vatena suddhi, na bhāvanāya suddhī’’ti gaṇhanti, te sīlabbatupādānassa pariññaṃ paññapenti. Attavādupādānassa pariññaṃ pana ekopi paññapetuṃ na sakkoti. Aṭṭhasamāpattilābhinopi hi candimasūriye pāṇinā parimajjitvā caramānāpi ca titthiyā tisso pariññā paññapenti. Attavādaṃ muñcituṃ na sakkonti. Tasmā punappunaṃ vaṭṭasmiṃyeva patanti. Pathavijigucchanasasako viya hi ete.
这里有一个说明这个道理的比喻。据说,大地对兔子说:“喂,兔子!”兔子问:“你是谁?”大地说:“你总是在我上面行住坐卧,拉屎撒尿,怎么不认识我?”兔子说:“你确实看见我了。我踩过的地方,不过是指尖碰到的那一点点;撒的尿只有一丁点;拉的粪也只有迦塔卡果那么大。可大象、马这些大家伙踩过的地方却很大,它们的尿有整罐那么多,粪有一筐那么多。我受够你了!”说完,兔子就跳起来,落到别的地方去了。大地又对它说:“喂,就算你跑得再远,还不是落在我上面吗!”兔子又厌恶地跳起来,落到别处。就这样,哪怕它跳上一千年,一边跳一边落,也还是离不开大地。同样,外道虽然讲说“对一切取的遍知”,实际上只是讲说对欲取等三种取的超越。至于我语取,他们却舍弃不了。因为舍弃不了,就一次又一次地掉回轮回里。巴利
Tatthāyaṃ atthasallāpikā upamā – pathavī kira sasakaṃ āha – ‘‘bho sasakā’’ti. Sasako āha – ‘‘ko eso’’ti. ‘‘Kasmā mameva upari sabbairiyāpathe kappento uccārapassāvaṃ karonto maṃ na jānāsī’’ti. ‘‘Suṭṭhu tayā ahaṃ diṭṭho, mayā akkantaṭṭhānampi aṅgulaggehi phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ viya hoti, vissaṭṭhaudakaṃ appamattakaṃ, karīsaṃ katakaphalamattaṃ. Hatthiassādīhi pana akkantaṭṭhānampi mahantaṃ, passāvopi nesaṃ ghaṭamatto hoti, uccāropi pacchimatto hoti, alaṃ mayhaṃ tayā’’ti uppatitvā aññasmiṃ ṭhāne patito. Tato naṃ pathavī āha – ‘‘are dūraṃ gatopi nanu mayhaṃ upariyeva patitosī’’ti. So puna taṃ jigucchanto uppatitvā aññattha patito, evaṃ vassasahassampi uppatitvā patamāno sasako pathaviṃ muñcituṃ na sakkoti. Evamevaṃ titthiyā sabbūpādānapariññaṃ paññapentopi kāmupādānādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃyeva samatikkamaṃ paññapenti. Attavādaṃ pana muñcituṃ na sakkonti, asakkontā punappunaṃ vaṭṭasmiṃyeva patantīti.
外道们无法超越这一点,针对这个道理,先说了“破邪见之论”,现在要展示“破信心之论”,于是说出“比丘们,在如此的法与律中……”等话。这里说的“法与律”,就是法和律两者,显示这是一种不能导向出离的教法。在不能导向出离的教法中,对导师的信心是不正确的。因为导师死后,可能转生为狮子,也可能转生为老虎、豹、熊、鬣狗。而他的弟子们则转生为鹿、猪等畜生。他不会想“这些人过去是我的侍奉者、供养者”,因此对他们不生忍耐、慈爱或悲悯,反而扑到他们身上喝血,吃大块的肉。或者导师转生为猫,弟子们转生为鸡或老鼠,那也是按同样的方式,不加怜悯地把他们吃掉。或者导师转生为地狱狱卒,弟子们转生为地狱众生。他不会想“这些人过去是我的侍奉者、供养者”而生起悲悯,反而对他们施加种种刑罚:把他们套上燃烧的车,赶上炭火山,丢进铜锅,用种种苦刑折磨他们。或者弟子们死后转生为狮子等,导师转生为鹿之类的某一种。他们也不会想“我们过去用四种资具侍奉过这位导师,他是我们的导师”,对他不生忍耐、慈爱或悲悯,而是如前所说,让他遭受灾祸与毁灭。这样一来,在不能导向出离的教法中,对导师的信心是不正确的,即使维持一段时间,最终也还是会坏灭。巴利
Evaṃ yaṃ titthiyā samatikkamituṃ na sakkonti, tassa vasena diṭṭhicchedavādaṃ vatvā idāni pasādapacchedavādaṃ dassento evarūpe kho, bhikkhave, dhammavinayetiādimāha. Tattha dhammavinayeti dhamme ceva vinaye ca, ubhayenapi aniyyānikasāsanaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Yo satthari pasādo so na sammaggato’’ti aniyyānikasāsanamhi hi satthā kālaṃ katvā sīhopi hoti, byagghopi hoti, dīpipi acchopi taracchopi. Sāvakā panassa migāpi sūkarāpi pasadāpi honti, so ‘‘ime mayhaṃ pubbe upaṭṭhākā paccayadāyakā’’ti khantiṃ vā mettaṃ vā anuddayaṃ vā akatvā tesaṃ upari patitvā lohitaṃ pivati, thūlathūlamaṃsānipi khādati. Satthā vā pana biḷāro hoti, sāvakā kukkuṭā vā mūsikā vā. Atha ne vuttanayeneva anukampaṃ akatvā khādati. Atha vā satthā nirayapālo hoti, sāvakā nerayikasattā. So ‘‘ime mayhaṃ pubbe upaṭṭhākā paccayadāyakā’’ti anukampaṃ akatvā vividhā kammakāraṇā karoti, ādittepi rathe yojeti, aṅgārapabbatampi āropeti, lohakumbhiyampi khipati , anekehipi dukkhadhammehi sampayojeti. Sāvakā vā pana kālaṃ katvā sīhādayo honti, satthā migādīsu aññataro. Te ‘‘imaṃ mayaṃ pubbe catūhi paccayehi upaṭṭhahimhā, satthā no aya’’nti tasmiṃ khantiṃ vā mettaṃ vā anuddayaṃ vā akatvā vuttanayeneva anayabyasanaṃ pāpenti. Evaṃ aniyyānikasāsane yo satthari pasādo, so na sammaggato hoti, kañci kālaṃ gantvāpi pacchā vinassatiyeva.
对法生起的信心:在不能导向解脱的教法里,所谓对法的信心,其实只是对学过的、背诵过的、心里记住的那些经教文句的信心,其中并没有从轮回中解脱的可能。所以,在这里生起的信心,只会让轮回一次又一次地变得越来越深。因此在这样的教法中,它被说成是走错了路、不真实的。巴利
Yo dhamme pasādoti aniyyānikasāsanasmiñhi dhamme pasādo nāma, uggahitapariyāpuṭa – dhāritavācittamattake tantidhamme pasādo hoti, vaṭṭamokkho panettha natthi. Tasmā yo ettha pasādo, so punappunaṃ vaṭṭameva gambhīraṃ karotīti sāsanasmiṃ asammaggato asabhāvato akkhāyati.
在戒上的圆满行持,是指在不能导向解脱的教法中,按照山羊戒等做法而修成的戒行圆满。这种圆满也不能让人达到出离轮回、脱离生死,当它成就时,反而带来畜生道;当它成熟结果时,则带来地狱。因此,这种戒行圆满不被说是正确的行持。对同法者,是指在不能导向解脱的教法中,那些同法者当中,有些人死后变成狮子等,有些人变成鹿等。在那里,那些变成狮子等的,心想“这些曾经是我们的同法者”,对变成鹿等的同法者不修忍辱等善法,就像前面所说的那样,给他们带来极大的痛苦。因此,在这里,对同法者的亲爱悦意也不被说是正确的行持。巴利
Yā sīlesu paripūrakāritāti yāpi ca aniyyānikasāsane ajasīlādīnaṃ vasena paripūrakāritā, sāpi yasmā vaṭṭamokkhaṃ bhavanissaraṇaṃ na sampāpeti, sampajjamānā pana tiracchānayoniṃ āvahati, vipaccamānā nirayaṃ, tasmā sā na sammaggatā akkhāyati. Yā sahadhammikesūti aniyyānikasāsanasmiñhi ye sahadhammikā, tesu yasmā ekacce kālaṃ katvā sīhādayopi honti, ekacce migādayo, tattha sīhādibhūtā ‘‘ime amhākaṃ sahadhammikā ahesu’’nti migādibhūtesu khantiādīni akatvā pubbe vuttanayeneva nesaṃ mahādukkhaṃ uppādenti. Tasmā ettha sahadhammikesu piyamanāpatāpi asammaggatā akkhāyati.
世尊把这些不同层面的原因合在一起,开示说:这是什么原因呢?比丘们,事情确实如此……他这样说了。这里的简要含义是:比丘们,事情确实如此,也就是我所说的“对导师的信心,不能被称为正行……”等等,那些情况正是这样。为什么呢?因为那些信心等等,是建立在被错误宣说的法与律之上……不是由正自觉者所宣说的。此处的“hi”是表原因的不变化词。这里,“被错误宣说”就是被不善地宣说,因为被不善地宣说,所以是被错误宣说的。而这个教法,因为它不导向道与果,所以是“不导向解脱”;因为它不能让贪等烦恼止息,所以是“不趋向止息”;因为它不是正自觉者、一切知者所宣说的,所以是“非正自觉者所宣说”。在那不导向解脱、不趋向止息、非正自觉者所宣说的教法里。到这里,世尊是在说明:对外道生起的信心,就像对喝了酒的豺狼生起的信心一样,毫无意义。巴利
Idaṃ pana sabbampi kāraṇabhedaṃ ekato katvā dassento bhagavā taṃ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṃ, bhikkhave, hotītiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ saṃkhepattho – evañhetaṃ, bhikkhave, hoti, yaṃ mayā vuttaṃ ‘‘yo satthari pasādo so na sammaggato akkhāyatī’’tiādi, taṃ evameva hoti. Kasmā? Yasmā te pasādādayo durakkhāte dhammavinaye …pe… asammāsambuddhappavediteti, ettha hi yathā tanti kāraṇatthe nipāto. Tattha durakkhāteti dukkathite, dukkhathitattāyeva duppavedite. So panesa yasmā maggaphalatthāya na niyyāti, tasmā aniyyāniko. Rāgādīnaṃ upasamāya asaṃvattanato anupasamasaṃvattaniko. Na sammāsambuddhena sabbaññunā paveditoti asammāsambuddhappavedito. Tasmiṃ aniyyānike anupasamasaṃvattanike asammāsambuddhappavedite. Ettāvatā bhagavā titthiyesu pasādo surāpītasiṅgāle pasādo viya niratthakoti dasseti.
据说,有一只黑豺狼夜里溜进城里,吃了酒糟,然后躺在红厚壳树林里睡着了。太阳出来时它醒了,心里盘算:“这个时候走不了,我们的仇敌太多,得骗一个人带我出去才行。”它看见一个婆罗门正走过来,就想骗他,喊道:“尊敬的婆罗门!”婆罗门问:“谁在叫婆罗门?”它说:“是我,主人,请过来一下。”婆罗门问:“什么事?”它说:“带我出村子,我给你两百迦沙婆那。”婆罗门也想带它走,就伸手去抓它的脚。黑豺狼说:“喂,蠢婆罗门,你以为我是扔在地上的迦沙婆那吗?迦沙婆那可不好得,好好抓着我!”婆罗门问:“那我该怎么抓呢?”它说:“用你的上衣打个结,搭在肩上,这样抓着走。”婆罗门就照它说的抓起来,走到南门附近,问:“在这里放你下来吗?”它问:“这是什么地方?”婆罗门说:“这是大门。”它骂道:“喂,蠢婆罗门,你亲戚会把迦沙婆那放在内门吗?再把我带远点!”婆罗门就这样走一小段就问一次“在这里放吗?在这里放吗?”,每次都被它骂。最后走到一个安全的地方,它说“就在这里放吧”,婆罗门就把它放下来,抓住了上衣。黑豺狼说:“我说过给你两百迦沙婆那。不过我的迦沙婆那多得很,不止两百。等我去拿迦沙婆那的时候,你就盯着太阳站着。”说完走了一小段,又折回来对婆罗门说:“尊敬的婆罗门,别往这边看,就盯着太阳站着。”说完就钻进露兜树林,随心所欲地跑了。那个婆罗门一直盯着太阳,额头上和腋下都冒出了汗。这时,树神对他说——巴利
Eko kira kāḷasiṅgālo rattiṃ nagaraṃ paviṭṭho surājallikaṃ khāditvā punnāgavane nipajjitvā niddāyanto sūriyuggamane pabujjhitvā cintesi ‘‘imasmiṃ kāle na sakkā gantuṃ, bahū amhākaṃ verino, ekaṃ vañcetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. So ekaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ gacchantaṃ disvā imaṃ vañcessāmīti ‘‘ayya brāhmaṇā’’ti āha. Ko eso brāhmaṇaṃ pakkosatīti. ‘‘Ahaṃ, sāmī, ito tāva ehīti. Kiṃ bhoti? Maṃ bahigāmaṃ nehi, ahaṃ te dve kahāpaṇasatāni dassāmīti. Sopi nayissāmīti taṃ pādesu gaṇhi. Are bāla brāhmaṇa, na mayhaṃ kahāpaṇā chaḍḍitakā atthi, dullabhā kahāpaṇā, sādhukaṃ maṃ gaṇhāhīti. Kathaṃ bho gaṇhāmīti? Uttarāsaṅgena gaṇṭhikaṃ katvā aṃse laggetvā gaṇhāhīti. Brāhmaṇo taṃ tathā gahetvā dakkhiṇadvārasamīpaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā ettha otāremīti pucchi. Kataraṭṭhānaṃ nāma etanti? Mahādvāraṃ etanti. Are bāla, brāhmaṇa, kiṃ tava ñātakā antaradvāre kahāpaṇaṃ ṭhapenti, parato maṃ harā’’ti. So punappunaṃ thokaṃ thokaṃ gantvā ‘‘ettha otāremi ettha otāremī’’ti pucchitvā tena tajjito khemaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā tattha otārehīti vutto otāretvā sāṭakaṃ gaṇhi. Kāḷasiṅgālo āha ‘‘ahaṃ te dve kahāpaṇasatāni dassāmīti avocaṃ. Mayhaṃ pana kahāpaṇā bahū, na dve kahāpaṇasatāneva, yāva ahaṃ kahāpaṇe āharāmi, tāva tvaṃ sūriyaṃ olokento tiṭṭhā’’ti vatvā thokaṃ gantvā nivattetvā puna brāhmaṇaṃ āha ‘‘ayya brāhmaṇa mā ito olokehi, sūriyameva olokento tiṭṭhā’’ti. Evañca pana vatvā ketakavanaṃ pavisitvā yathāruciṃ pakkanto. Brāhmaṇassapi sūriyaṃ olokentasseva nalāṭato ceva kacchehi ca sedā mucciṃsu. Atha naṃ rukkhadevatā āha –
“ 婆罗门,你竟然相信那只喝了酒的豺?
连一百个贝壳都没有,哪来的两百个铜钱?”巴利
‘‘Saddahāsi siṅgālassa, surāpītassa brāhmaṇa; Sippikānaṃ sataṃ natthi, kuto kaṃsasatā duve’’ti. (jā. 1.1.113);
就像对黑豺的净信毫无用处一样,对外道们的净信也是如此。巴利
Evaṃ yathā kāḷasiṅgāle pasādo niratthako, evaṃ titthiyesupīti.
144 144. 先指出:在不导向解脱的教法里,净信没有实义;为了说明在能导向解脱的教法里,净信有实义,如来才说了“诸比丘,如来确实……”等话。其中,“他宣说了对欲取的遍知”,意思是:他依阿拉汉道宣说对欲取的断除遍知,也就是超越;对另外三种取,则依入流道宣说遍知。“诸比丘,在这样的法与律中”,就是诸比丘,在这样的法和这样的律中。这两方面都表明这是能导向解脱的教法。“对导师的净信”:在这样的教法中,对导师生起的净信,就被称为走上正道,它能导向从轮回之苦中出离。巴利
144. Aniyyānikasāsane pasādassa niratthakabhāvaṃ dassetvā niyyānikasāsane tassa sātthakataṃ dassetuṃ tathāgato ca kho, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha kāmupādānassa pariññaṃ paññapetīti arahattamaggena kāmupādānassa pahānapariññaṃ samatikkamaṃ paññapeti, itaresaṃ tiṇṇaṃ upādānānaṃ sotāpattimaggena pariññaṃ paññapeti. Evarūpe kho, bhikkhave, dhammavinayeti, bhikkhave, evarūpe dhamme ca vinaye ca. Ubhayenapi niyyānikasāsanaṃ dasseti. Satthari pasādoti evarūpe sāsane yo satthari pasādo, so sammaggato akkhāyati, bhavadukkhanissaraṇāya saṃvattati.
在这件事里,有这些典故:据说世尊住在吠地耶山的因陀娑罗窟时,有一只枭鸟。每当世尊进村托钵,它就跟着飞半程;世尊出村时,它也迎上前飞半程。有一天傍晚,它见正自觉者被比丘僧团围绕而坐,就从山上下来,顶礼后,展开双翅,合爪高举,低下头,向十力者礼敬而立。世尊看见后,露出了微笑。阿难尊者问道:“尊者!是什么因、什么缘,让您显现微笑呢?”世尊说:“阿难,你看这只枭鸟,它对我以及比丘僧团生起了净信心,将会在十万劫中轮转于天界和人界,之后成为一位名为‘喜悦’的独觉佛。”巴利
Tatrimāni vatthūni – bhagavā kira vediyakapabbate indasālaguhāyaṃ paṭivasati. Atheko ulūkasakuṇo bhagavati gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisante upaḍḍhamaggaṃ anugacchati, nikkhamante upaḍḍhamaggaṃ paccuggamanaṃ karoti. So ekadivasaṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ sāyanhasamaye bhikkhusaṅghaparivutaṃ nisinnaṃ pabbatā oruyha vanditvā pakkhe paṇāmetvā añjaliṃ paggayha sīsaṃ heṭṭhā katvā dasabalaṃ namassamāno aṭṭhāsi. Bhagavā taṃ oloketvā sitaṃ pātvākāsi. Ānandatthero ‘‘ko nu kho, bhante, hetu ko paccayo sitassa pātukammāyā’’ti pucchi. ‘‘Passānanda, imaṃ ulūkasakuṇaṃ, ayaṃ mayi ca bhikkhusaṅghe ca cittaṃ pasādetvā satasahassakappe devesu ca manussesu ca saṃsaritvā somanasso nāma paccekabuddho bhavissatī’’ti āha –
圆眼猫头鹰,久居毗提耶山;
尊者果斯亚,福哉得见应时出世殊胜佛。
对我和无与伦比的比丘僧团生起清净信心之后,
哪怕经过十万劫,他也不会堕入恶趣。
从天界命终之后,被善根所推动,
他将拥有无边的智慧,以“喜悦”之名而闻名。巴利
Ulūkamaṇḍalakkhika, vediyake ciradīghavāsika; Sukhitosi tvaṃ ayya kosiya, kāluṭṭhitaṃ passasi buddhavaraṃ. Mayi cittaṃ pasādetvā, bhikkhusaṅghe anuttare; Kappānaṃ satasahassāni, duggateso na gacchati. Devalokā cavitvāna, kusalamūlena codito; Bhavissati anantañāṇo, somanassoti vissutoti.
在这里,还应当详细讲述王舍城里那些类似的故事,比如善花鬘师的故事、大鼓师的故事、孔雀女的故事、琴师的故事、吹螺师的故事等等。这样,在能引导人解脱的教法里,对导师生起的净信,就是走在正道上。巴利
Aññānipi cettha rājagahanagare sumanamālākāravatthu mahābherivādakavatthu morajikavatthu vīṇāvādakavatthu saṅkhadhamakavatthūti evamādīni vatthūni vitthāretabbāni. Evaṃ niyyānikasāsane satthari pasādo sammaggato hoti.
对法有净信:在导向解脱的教法里,对法生起净信,就是走上了正道。仅仅凭着声音取相来听闻,连畜生道的众生都能因此得到成就,更何况在胜义层面呢?这个道理,应当通过青蛙天子等事例来理解。巴利
Dhamme pasādoti niyyānikasāsanamhi dhamme pasādo sammaggato hoti. Saramatte nimittaṃ gahetvā suṇantānaṃ tiracchānagatānampi sampattidāyako hoti, paramatthe kiṃ pana vattabbaṃ. Ayamattho maṇḍūkadevaputtādīnaṃ vatthuvasena veditabbo.
在能引导人解脱的教法里,把戒律修到圆满,这也算是走在正道上,能带来生天和解脱的成就。在这里,应该用伞盖少年、沙弥等事例来说明。巴利
Sīlesu paripūrakāritāti niyyānikasāsanamhi sīlesu paripūrakāritāpi sammaggatā hoti, saggamokkhasampattiṃ āvahati. Tattha chattamāṇavakavatthusāmaṇeravatthuādīni dīpetabbāni.
对同法者:在能导向解脱的教法中,对同法者怀有亲爱悦意,也就是行于正道,能带来广大的成就。这个道理应当通过《天宫事》和《饿鬼事》来说明。正如所说的——巴利
Sahadhammikesūti niyyānikasāsane sahadhammikesu piyamanāpatāpi sammaggatā hoti, mahāsampattiṃ āvahati. Ayamattho vimānapetavatthūhi dīpetabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ –
我曾把牛乳粥布施给一位正在托钵乞食的比丘……(中略)巴利
‘‘Khīrodanamahamadāsiṃ, bhikkhuno piṇḍāya carantassa…pe…
糖浆……(中略)……甘蔗段……廷婆楼果……黄瓜……巴利
Phāṇitaṃ…pe… ucchukhaṇḍikaṃ… timbarusakaṃ… kakkārikaṃ…
甜瓜……胡桃……杏……手旗……巴利
Eḷālukaṃ… vallipakkaṃ… phārusakaṃ… hatthapatākaṃ…
一把嫩菜……一把花……萝卜……一把苦楝叶……巴利
Sākamuṭṭhiṃ … pupphakamuṭṭhiṃ… mūlakaṃ… nimbamuṭṭhiṃ…
Ambika草制成的……浴桶浸泡用的……腰带……巴利
Ambikañjikaṃ… doṇinimmajjaniṃ… kāyabandhanaṃ…
肩带……系带……扇子……棕榈叶扇……巴利
Aṃsabaddhakaṃ… āyogapaṭṭaṃ… vidhūpanaṃ… tālavaṇṭaṃ…
孔雀尾扇……伞……鞋……饼……甜糕……巴利
Morahatthaṃ… chattaṃ… upāhanaṃ… pūvaṃ modakaṃ…
我给一位正在托钵乞食的比丘布施了糖块……巴利
Sakkhalikaṃ ahamadāsiṃ, bhikkhuno piṇḍāya carantassa…pe…
你看我的天宫,我是有着欲乐美貌的天女。巴利
Tassā me passa vimānaṃ, accharā kāmavaṇṇinīhamasmī’’ti (vi. va. 406).
“这是什么原因”等句,应当完全按照前面所说的方式连接起来理解。巴利
Taṃ kissa hetūtiādi vuttanayānusāreneva yojetvā veditabbaṃ.
145 现在,为了说明那些外道不能正确遍知的诸取之缘、而如来能正确遍知,世尊说了“诸比丘,这些……”等话。其中,“以何为因”等词里的“因”等,全都是原因的同义词。因为原因能引导出果,就好像在说“来,抓住它”一样,所以称为“因”。因为果从它出生、生起、发生,所以称为“集”“生”“发生”。这里每个词的具体含义是:这些东西的因是什么,所以叫“以何为因”;这些东西的集是什么,所以叫“以何为集”;这些东西的生是什么,所以叫“以何为生”;这些东西的发生是什么,所以叫“以何为发生”。而对于这些取来说,按照前面所说的含义,渴爱既是它们的因,也是它们的集、生、发生,所以接着说了“以渴爱为因”等。一切地方都应该这样理解。再者,世尊不仅知道取的缘,也知道作为取之缘的渴爱,还知道作为渴爱等之缘的受等,所以世尊说了“诸比丘,这渴爱……”等。巴利
145. Idāni yesaṃ upādānānaṃ titthiyā na sammā pariññaṃ paññapenti, tathāgato paññapeti, tesaṃ paccayaṃ dassetuṃ ime ca, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha kiṃnidānātiādīsu nidānādīni sabbāneva kāraṇavevacanāni. Kāraṇañhi yasmā phalaṃ nideti handa, naṃ gaṇhathāti appeti viya, tasmā nidānanti vuccati. Yasmā taṃ tato jāyati samudeti pabhavati, tasmā samudayo, jāti, pabhavoti vuccati. Ayaṃ panettha padattho – kiṃ nidānaṃ etesanti kiṃnidānā. Ko samudayo etesanti kiṃsamudayā. Kā jāti etesanti kiṃjātikā. Ko pabhavo etesanti kiṃpabhavā. Yasmā pana tesaṃ taṇhā yathāvuttena atthena nidānañceva samudayo ca jāti ca pabhavo ca, tasmā ‘‘taṇhānidānā’’tiādimāha. Evaṃ sabbapadesu attho veditabbo. Yasmā pana bhagavā na kevalaṃ upādānasseva paccayaṃ jānāti, upādānassa paccayabhūtāya taṇhāyapi, taṇhādipaccayānaṃ vedanādīnampi paccayaṃ jānātiyeva, tasmā taṇhā cāyaṃ, bhikkhavetiādimāha.
“若在何时”是指在某个时候。“无明已被断除”是指作为轮回根源的无明,以不再生起的方式被彻底断除。“明已生起”是指阿拉汉道的明已经生起。也就是说,由于无明的离染而有了明的生起。那位比丘因为无明已被断除、明已生起,所以“不执取欲取”——他不抓取欲取,不趋近它,也不执取其余诸取。“不执取而无所战栗”:这样不执取任何取,就不会因渴爱而战栗。“不战栗”是指不再战栗,使渴爱不再生起。“自己般涅槃”是指他通过烦恼的般涅槃而自行般涅槃。这样显示了他的漏尽之后,接着为了显示漏尽比丘的自我审察,而说了“生已尽”等语。那些话的意思,和前面所解说的相同。巴利
Yatoca khoti yasmiṃ kāle. Avijjā pahīnā hotīti vaṭṭamūlikā avijjā anuppādanirodhena pahīnā hoti. Vijjā uppannāti arahattamaggavijjā uppannā. So avijjāvirāgā vijjuppādāti. So bhikkhu avijjāya ca pahīnattā vijjāya ca uppannattā. Neva kāmupādānaṃ upādiyatīti neva kāmupādānaṃ gaṇhāti na upeti, na sesāni upādānāni. Anupādiyaṃ na paritassatīti evaṃ kiñci upādānaṃ aggaṇhanto taṇhāparitassanāya na paritassati. Aparitassanti aparitassanto taṇhaṃ anuppādento. Paccattaṃyeva parinibbāyatīti sayameva kilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyati. Evamassa āsavakkhayaṃ dassetvā idāni khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno paccavekkhaṇaṃ dassento khīṇā jātītiādimāha. Taṃ vuttatthamevāti.
2. 《大狮子吼经》的注释巴利
2. Mahāsīhanādasuttavaṇṇanā
毗舍离城的注释巴利
Vesālinagaravaṇṇanā
146 “如是我闻”等语,是《大狮子吼经》。其中“在毗舍离”是指在名叫毗舍离的城市。据说,那座城市因为一次又一次地扩展,变得非常宽广,所以被称为“毗舍离”。关于这件事,有一个依次流传下来的故事:据说,波罗奈国王的正宫王后怀了孕。她知道自己怀孕后,就禀告了国王。国王为她安排了安胎的照顾。她得到妥善照顾,怀胎期满时,进入了产房。有福报的人通常在破晓时分生产,她也是其中之一,所以在破晓时分,生下了一片肉团,颜色像涂了虫漆的木板,又像红合欢花。于是她想:“别的王妃都生下像金像一样的儿子,我身为正宫王后,却生下一片肉团,这样一定会在国王面前失宠。”因为害怕失宠,她就把那片肉团放进一个容器里,盖上盖子,用国王的印章封好,然后叫人把它投入恒河水流中。人们刚把它丢下去,天神们就安排了守护。天神们还在金板上用天然朱砂写上“波罗奈国王正宫王后之子”,并把金板系在容器上。随后,那个容器没有遇到波浪等任何危险,顺着恒河水流漂走了。巴利
146.Evaṃme sutanti mahāsīhanādasuttaṃ. Tattha vesāliyanti evaṃnāmake nagare. Taṃ kira aparāparaṃ visālībhūtatāya ‘‘vesālī’’ti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ. Tatrāyaṃ anupubbakathā – bārāṇasirañño kira aggamahesiyā kucchimhi gabbho saṇṭhāsi. Sā ñatvā rañño nivedesi. Rājā gabbhaparihāraṃ adāsi. Sā sammā pariharīyamānā gabbhaparipākakāle vijāyanagharaṃ pāvisi. Puññavantīnaṃ paccūsasamaye gabbhavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, sā ca tāsaṃ aññatarā, tena paccūsasamaye alattakapaṭalabandhujīvakapupphasadisaṃ maṃsapesiṃ vijāyi. Tato ‘‘aññā deviyo suvaṇṇabimbasadise putte vijāyanti, aggamahesī maṃsapesinti rañño purato mama avaṇṇo uppajjeyyā’’ti cintetvā tena avaṇṇabhayena taṃ maṃsapesiṃ ekasmiṃ bhājane pakkhipitvā paṭikujjitvā rājamuddikāya lañchetvā gaṅgāya sote pakkhipāpesi. Manussehi chaḍḍitamatte devatā ārakkhaṃ saṃvidahiṃsu. Suvaṇṇapaṭṭakañcettha jātihiṅgulakena ‘‘bārāṇasirañño aggamahesiyā pajā’’ti likhitvā bandhiṃsu. Tato taṃ bhājanaṃ ūmibhayādīhi anupaddutaṃ gaṅgāsotena pāyāsi.
那时,有一位苦行者依止一户牧牛人家,住在恒河岸边。清晨,他下到恒河里,看见那个容器漂过来,以为是别人丢弃的粪扫衣,就把它捡了起来。这时,他看见上面那块刻着字、盖着王印封记的金板,解开之后,看到里面那片肉团。看到后他心想:这应该是个胎儿,因为它并没有恶臭腐烂的样子。于是把它带回草庐,放在干净的地方。过了半个月,那片肉团变成了两片。苦行者看到后,更加小心地安置它们。又过了半个月,每一片肉团上各自长出了五个小疱,分别对应将来长出手、脚、头的位置。再过了半个月,一片肉团变成一个像金像一样的男孩,另一片变成一个女孩。巴利
Tena ca samayena aññataro tāpaso gopālakakulaṃ nissāya gaṅgātīre viharati. So pātova gaṅgaṃ otiṇṇo taṃ bhājanaṃ āgacchantaṃ disvā paṃsukūlasaññāya aggahesi. Athettha taṃ akkharapaṭṭikaṃ rājamuddikālañchanaṃ ca disvā muñcitvā taṃ maṃsapesiṃ addasa, disvānassa etadahosi ‘‘siyā gabbho, tathā hissa duggandhapūtikabhāvo natthī’’ti. Assamaṃ netvā suddhe okāse ṭhapesi. Atha aḍḍhamāsaccayena dve maṃsapesiyo ahesuṃ. Tāpaso disvā sādhutaraṃ ṭhapesi. Tato puna aḍḍhamāsaccayena ekamekissā maṃsapesiyā hatthapādasīsānamatthāya pañca pañca piḷakā uṭṭhahiṃsu. Atha tato aḍḍhamāsaccayena ekā maṃsapesi suvaṇṇabimbasadiso dārako, ekā dārikā ahosi.
在这些孩子当中,苦行者对他们生起了像对自己儿子一样的爱。他的拇指还流出了乳汁。从那时起,他得到了乳粥,吃完饭后,就把乳汁倒进孩子们的嘴里。无论什么进入他们的肚子,都像放在宝珠容器里一样看得清清楚楚,他们就这样变得没有皮肤。另有人说:“他们的皮肤互相粘连,像是被缝在一起后放着一样。”他们因为这样无皮,或因为皮肤粘连,所以被称为离车族。巴利
Tesu tāpasassa puttasineho uppajji, aṅguṭṭhakato cassa khīraṃ nibbatti. Tato pabhuti ca khīrabhattaṃ alabhittha, so bhattaṃ bhuñjitvā khīraṃ dārakānaṃ mukhe āsiñcati. Tesaṃ udaraṃ yaṃ yaṃ pavisati, taṃ taṃ sabbaṃ maṇibhājanagataṃ viya dissati, evaṃ nicchavī ahesuṃ. Apare āhu ‘‘sibbetvā ṭhapitā viya nesaṃ aññamaññaṃ līnā chavi ahosī’’ti. Evaṃ te nicchavitāya vā līnacchavitāya vā licchavīti paññāyiṃsu.
苦行者抚养这两个孩子时,每天太阳升得很高后进村乞食,过了正午才回来。牧牛人们知道了他这样辛苦,就说:“尊者,养育孩子对出家人来说是拖累。把孩子交给我们吧,我们来养,您去做自己的事。”苦行者答应了:“好。”第二天,牧牛人们把路修平,撒上花,竖起旗幡,一路奏着乐器来到苦行者的草庐。苦行者嘱咐说:“这两个孩子有大福报,你们要用心抚养,别懈怠。养大以后,让他们彼此结婚。再用五种牛乳制品讨国王欢心,求到一块地,在那里建一座城,然后给王子灌顶立为王。”说完就把孩子交给了他们。他们答应“好”,把孩子带回去抚养。巴利
Tāpaso dārake posento ussūre gāmaṃ sikkhāya pavisati, atidivā paṭikkamati. Tassa taṃ byāpāraṃ ñatvā gopālakā āhaṃsu – ‘‘bhante, pabbajitānaṃ dārakaposanaṃ palibodho, amhākaṃ dārake detha, mayaṃ posessāma, tumhe attano kammaṃ karothā’’ti. Tāpaso sādhūti paṭissuṇi. Gopālakā dutiyadivase maggaṃ samaṃ katvā pupphehi okiritvā dhajapaṭākā ussāpetvā tūriyehi vajjamānehi assamaṃ āgatā. Tāpaso – ‘‘mahāpuññā dārakā appamādena vaḍḍhetha, vaḍḍhetvā ca aññamaññaṃ āvāhavivāhaṃ karotha, pañcagorasena rājānaṃ tosetvā bhūmibhāgaṃ gahetvā nagaraṃ māpetha, tattha kumāraṃ abhisiñcathā’’ti vatvā dārake adāsi. Te sādhūti paṭissuṇitvā dārake netvā posesuṃ.
孩子们渐渐长大,玩耍时一发生争执,就对牧牛人的其他孩子拳打脚踢。那些孩子哭着回家,父母问他们为什么哭,他们说:这两个没爹没娘、被苦行者养大的孩子,打我们打得特别狠。于是那些父母就说:这些孩子会伤害、折磨别的孩子,不该再收留他们,应该避开他们。据说从那时起,那一带方圆一百由旬的地方就被叫做“跋耆”。后来,牧牛人讨好了国王,得到了那块地方。他们在那里建了城,给一个大约十六岁的王子灌顶,立他为王。又让王子和那个女孩结婚,并定下规矩:不许娶外地的女孩,本地的女孩也不许嫁给外人。他们第一次同房,就生下一男一女,这样一共生了十六次,每次都是一男一女。后来,他们的子孙一代代繁衍,园林、苑囿、住所、随从等种种受用越来越难以容纳,于是把城先后三次向外扩展,每次扩展一牛鸣的距离。因为这座城一再变得宽广,就得名叫毗舍离。因此经文说“在名叫毗舍离的城中”。巴利
Dārakā vuddhimanvāya kīḷantā vivādaṭṭhānesu aññe gopālakadārake hatthenapi pādenapi paharanti. Te rodanti. ‘‘Kissa rodathā’’ti ca mātāpitūhi vuttā ‘‘ime nimmātāpitikā tāpasapositā amhe atipaharantī’’ti vadanti. Tato tesaṃ mātāpitaro ‘‘ime dārakā aññe dārake vināsenti dukkhāpenti, na ime saṅgahetabbā, vajjetabbā ime’’ti āhaṃsu. Tato pabhuti kira so padeso vajjīti vuccati yojanasatiko parimāṇena. Atha taṃ padesaṃ gopālakā rājānaṃ tosetvā aggahesuṃ. Tattha ca nagaraṃ māpetvā soḷasavassuddesikaṃ kumāraṃ abhisiñcitvā rājānaṃ akaṃsu. Tāya cassa dārikāya saddhiṃ vivāhaṃ katvā katikaṃ akaṃsu ‘‘bāhirakadārikā na ānetabbā, ito dārikā na kassaci dātabbā’’ti. Tesaṃ paṭhamasaṃvāsena dve dārakā jātā dhītā ca putto ca. Evaṃ soḷasakkhattuṃ dve dve jātā. Tato tesaṃ dārakānaṃ yathākkamaṃ vaḍḍhantānaṃ ārāmuyyānanivāsaṭṭhānaparivārasampattiṃ gahetuṃ appahontā nagaraṃ tikkhattuṃ gāvutantarena gāvutantarena parikkhipiṃsu . Tassa punappunaṃ visālīkatattā vesālītveva nāmaṃ jātaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vesāliyanti evaṃ nāmake nagare’’ti.
01 在城外:指在城市的郊外,不像安巴巴利芒果园那样在城内。而这片林苑,就像吉瓦咖芒果园一样,是城外的树林,所以经文说“在城外”。在城西:指在城的西边,也就是西方。林苑:据说那片林苑位于城西大约一牛鸣(四分之一由旬)远的地方。在那里,人们为世尊建了香室,围绕香室又为比丘们建了夜住处、日住处、经行道、石窟、小屋、殿堂等,世尊就住在那里。所以经文说“在城西的林苑”。刚离去不久:他还俗转为在家人,是最近才离去的人。在大众中:在集会的人群之间。上人法:这里,“人法”是指十善业道。他无法否认这些。为什么?因为害怕被责备。在毗舍离,有许多人对三宝有信心,他们热爱佛、热爱法、热爱僧。如果有人说“沙门乔达摩连十善业道都没有”,他们就会说:“你在哪里看见世尊杀生?在哪里看见他偷盗?”诸如此类,说你不自量力。他们会说:“你以为我有牙齿吗,就吃石头碎片?你试图抓住蛇尾,想在锯齿上玩花环吗?我们要把你的牙齿从嘴里打落!”他因为害怕被他们责备,所以无法这样说。苏那卡达:这是他的名字。因为他是离车族人的儿子,所以称为离车族之子。巴利
01Bahinagareti nagarassa bahi, na ambapālivanaṃ viya antonagarasmiṃ. Ayaṃ pana jīvakambavanaṃ viya nagarassa bahiddhā vanasaṇḍo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bahinagare’’ti. Aparapureti purassa apare, pacchimadisāyanti attho. Vanasaṇḍeti so kira vanasaṇḍo nagarassa pacchimadisāyaṃ gāvutamatte ṭhāne. Tattha manussā bhagavato gandhakuṭiṃ katvā taṃ parivāretvā bhikkhūnaṃ rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānacaṅkamaleṇakuṭimaṇḍapādīni patiṭṭhapesuṃ, bhagavā tattha viharati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘aparapure vanasaṇḍe’’ti. Sunakkhattoti tassa nāmaṃ. Licchavīnaṃ pana puttattā licchaviputtoti vutto. Acirapakkantoti vibbhamitvā gihibhāvūpagamanena adhunāpakkanto. Parisatīti parisamajjhe. Uttarimanussadhammāti ettha manussadhammā nāma dasakusalakammapathā. Te paṭisedhetuṃ na sakkoti. Kasmā? Upārambhabhayā. Vesāliyañhi bahū manussā ratanattaye pasannā buddhamāmakā dhammamāmakā saṅghamāmakā. Te dasakusalakammapathamattampi natthi samaṇassa gotamassāti vutte tvaṃ kattha bhagavantaṃ pāṇaṃ hanantaṃ addasa, kattha adinnaṃ ādiyantantiādīni vatvā attano pamāṇaṃ na jānāsi? Kiṃ dantā me atthīti pāsāṇasakkharā khādasi, ahinaṅguṭṭhe gaṇhituṃ vāyamasi, kakacadantesu pupphāvaḷikaṃ kīḷituṃ icchasi? Mukhato te dante pātessāmāti vadeyyuṃ. So tesaṃ upārambhabhayā evaṃ vattuṃ na sakkoti.
关于上人法等的注释巴利
Uttarimanussadhammādivaṇṇanā
接着,为了否定比这更高的殊胜证得,他说:上人法、足以成为圣者的殊胜智见。巴利
Tato uttariṃ pana visesādhigamaṃ paṭisedhento uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesoti āha.
在这里,“足以成为圣者”就是指有能力成就圣者的状态,这是这句话要表达的意思。“智见”本身就是“殊胜的智见”。它既是“足以成为圣者的”,又是殊胜的智见,两者合起来,便称为“足以成为圣者的殊胜智见”。
所谓“智见”,可以指天眼通,也可以指观智、道智、果智、省察智,乃至一切知智。比如《中部》里说“不放逸者成就智见”,这里的“智见”指天眼通。《长部》里说“他将心导向、引向智见”,这里指观智。《增支部》里说“他们不可能为无上正觉而获得智见”,这里指道智。《中部》里说“这位比丘证得了其他超越人法的、足以成为圣者的殊胜智见,是安乐的住处”,这里指果智。《大品》里说“而我生起了智与见,我的心解脱不动摇,这是最后一生,从此不再有后有”,这里指省察智。《中部》里说“又我生起了智与见,阿喇拉·迦罗摩已命终七日”,这里指一切知智。但在这段话里,指的是出世间道智——因为他所否定的,正是世尊所说的这一智见。巴利
Tattha alamariyaṃ ñātunti alamariyo, ariyabhāvāya samatthoti vuttaṃ hoti. Ñāṇadassanameva ñāṇadassanaviseso. Alamariyo ca so ñāṇadassanaviseso cāti alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso. Ñāṇadassananti dibbacakkhupi vipassanāpi maggopi phalampi paccavekkhaṇañāṇampi sabbaññutaññāṇampi vuccati. ‘‘Appamatto samāno ñāṇadassanaṃ ārādhetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.311) hi ettha dibbacakkhu ñāṇadassanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Ñāṇadassanāya cittaṃ abhinīharati abhininnāmetī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.235) ettha vipassanāñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Abhabbā te ñāṇadassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāyā’’ti (a. ni. 4.196) ettha maggo. ‘‘Ayamañño uttari manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsu vihāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.328) ettha phalaṃ. ‘‘Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṃ udapādi, akuppā me cetovimutti, ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavo’’ti (mahāva. 16) ettha paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. ‘‘Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṃ udapādi sattāhakālaṅkato āḷāro kāḷāmo’’ti (ma. ni. 2.340) ettha sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Idha pana lokuttaramaggo adhippeto. Tañhi so bhagavato paṭisedheti.
“以推论所得”这句话,他是用来否定大师的。据说他心里这样想:沙门乔达摩亲近老师之后,根本没有掌握什么微细的法要,只是靠推论,用“大概会是这样,大概会那样”的方式推测,然后宣说那由推论得来的法罢了。
“以思察所随行”这句话,他是用来承认世尊有世间智慧的。意思是:沙门乔达摩是有智慧的,他运用那称为智慧、如同因陀罗金刚杵一样的思察,反复揣度“这件事大概会这样运转,那件事大概会那样运转”,让它从这边到那边到处观察,然后宣说那由思察所随行的法。
“自生辩才”这句话,他是用来否定世尊对诸法的现证。他的想法是这样:沙门乔达摩那里并没有什么微细的法要,既没有观,也没有道,也没有果,也没有省察智。只是他得到了广大的徒众,四种姓的人就像围绕转轮王一样围绕着他。而且他恰好有密合的嘴唇、柔软的舌头、甜美的音声、流利无碍的言词。他不过是把自己脑海里浮现出来的随便什么,拿过来就用自生的辩才宣讲一番,让大众欢喜罢了。巴利
Takkapariyāhatanti iminā ācariyaṃ paṭibāhati. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – samaṇena gotamena ācariye upasaṅkamitvā sukhumaṃ dhammantaraṃ gahitaṃ nāma natthi, takkapariyāhataṃ pana takketvā evaṃ bhavissati evaṃ bhavissatīti takkapariyāhataṃ dhammaṃ desetīti. Vīmaṃsānucaritanti iminā cassa lokiyapaññaṃ anujānāti. Samaṇo gotamo paññavā, so taṃ paññāsaṅkhātaṃ indavajirūpamaṃ vīmaṃsaṃ evaṃ vaṭṭissati, evaṃ vaṭṭissatīti ito cito ca anucarāpetvā vīmaṃsāya anucaritaṃ dhammaṃ deseti. Sayaṃpaṭibhānanti imināssa dhammesu paccakkhabhāvaṃ paṭibāhati. Evaṃ hissa ahosi – samaṇassa gotamassa sukhumaṃ dhammantaraṃ vipassanā vā maggo vā phalaṃ vā paccavekkhaṇā vā natthi, ayaṃ pana laddhapariso, rājānaṃ cakkavattiṃ viya naṃ cattāro vaṇṇā parivārenti, suphusitaṃ panassa dantāvaraṇaṃ, mudukā jivhā, madhuro saro, anelagaḷā vācā, so yaṃ yadevassa upaṭṭhāti, taṃ taṃ gahetvā sayaṃpaṭibhānaṃ kathento mahājanaṃ rañjetīti.
“为了什么目的而宣说法”这句话的意思是:确实是为了那个人的利益,法才被宣说。具体来说:为了对治贪欲,有不净业处;为了对治嗔恚,有慈心修习;为了对治愚痴,有五种法;为了断除寻思,有入出息念。巴利
Yassa ca khvāssa atthāya dhammo desitoti yassa ca kho atthāya assa dhammo desito. Seyyathidaṃ, rāgapaṭighātatthāya asubhakammaṭṭhānaṃ, dosappaṭighātatthāya mettābhāvanā, mohapaṭighātatthāya pañca dhammā, vitakkūpacchedāya ānāpānassati.
它引导人走向出离,对于照这样去做的人来说,是正确地导向苦的彻底灭尽。意思是:那个法,对于依照所教导的方式去实践的人——也就是那个“照这样去做的人”——通过正确的因、正确的方式、正确的缘由,导向轮回之苦的彻底灭尽,达成这个目的。苏那卡达是这样表明的。不过,他这话并不是出于自己的真实想法。因为诸佛的法不能导向出离,他本想这样宣说,却说不出口。为什么?因为害怕被责备。原来在毗舍离城里,有许多证得入流果、一来果、不来果的在家居士。他们若是听到,就会这样说:“苏那卡达,你说世尊所教导的法不能导向出离。如果这个法真的不能导向出离,那在这座城里,为什么会有这么多人证得入流果、这么多人证得一来果、这么多人证得不来果呢?”他们会照前面说过的方式责备他。他正是因为害怕这种责备,才说不出“不能导向出离”,而是像射出一支歪箭那样说:这个法是不空的、能导向出离的,只是里面空无一物。巴利
So niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyāti so dhammo yo taṃ yathādesitaṃ karoti, tassa takkarassa sammā hetunā nayena kāraṇena vaṭṭadukkhakkhayāya niyyāti gacchati tamatthaṃ sādhetīti dīpeti . Idaṃ panesa na attano ajjhāsayena vadati. Buddhānañhi dhammo aniyyānikoti evamevaṃ pavedeyya, na pana sakkoti vattuṃ. Kasmā? Upārambhabhayā. Vesāliyañhi bahū sotāpanna-sakadāgāmi-anāgāmiupāsakā. Te evaṃ vadeyyuṃ ‘‘sunakkhatta tvaṃ bhagavatā desitadhammo aniyyānikoti vadasi, yadi ayaṃ dhammo aniyyāniko, imasmiṃ nagare ime kasmā ettakā sotāpannā jātā, ettakā sakadāgāmī, ettakā anāgāmīti pubbe vuttanayena upārambhaṃ kareyyu’’nti. So iminā upārambhabhayena aniyyānikoti vattuṃ asakkonto ajjunena vissaṭṭhakaṇḍaṃ viya assa dhammo amogho niyyāti, abbhantare panassa kiñci natthīti vadati.
“他确实听到了”是说:当他在毗舍离城的婆罗门家族、商主家族等各处,在大众集会中这样讲的时候,世尊听到了那些话,却没有去阻止他。为什么?因为悲悯。据说世尊当时这样想:“这个人因为愤怒而烦躁不安,就像燃烧的竹林,又像撒了盐的炽热炉灶,因嗔恨而噼啪作响。我如果去阻止他,他就会把怨恨也绑到我身上;这样一来,他对如来和我两个人都会生起嗔恨,那嗔恨就太重了。”因为悲悯,所以没有阻止。另外,世尊还这样想:“对诸佛的毁谤之言,就像硬说圆满的月亮有污点一样,谁会信他的话呢?他自己就会像痰盂破了、唾液干了、嘴巴干了那样停下来。”因为这个原因,没有阻止。“从乞食返回后”是说:从寻找食物的村落回来之后。巴利
Assosi khoti vesāliyaṃ brāhmaṇakulaseṭṭhikulādīsu tattha tattha parisamajjhe evaṃ bhāsamānassa taṃ vacanaṃ suṇi, na pana paṭisedhesi. Kasmā? Kāruññatāya. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi ayaṃ kuddho jhāyamānaṃ veḷuvanaṃ viya pakkhittaloṇaṃ uddhanaṃ viya ca kodhavasena paṭapaṭāyati, mayā paṭibāhito pana mayipi āghātaṃ bandhissati, evamassa tathāgate ca mayi cāti dvīsu janesu āghāto atibhāriyo bhavissatīti kāruññatāya na paṭisedhesi. Api cassa evaṃ ahosi, buddhānaṃ avaṇṇakathanaṃ nāma puṇṇacande dosāropanasadisaṃ, ko imassa kathaṃ gaṇhissati? Sayameva kheḷe pacchinne mukhe sukkhe oramissatīti iminā kāraṇena na paṭisedhesi. Piṇḍapātapaṭikkantoti piṇḍapātapariyesanato apagato.
147 “易怒者”是指暴躁、粗野的人。“愚人”是指空虚无用的人。如果某人在那一期生命中,没有证得道果的资粮因缘,佛陀们就称他为“愚人”。即使有资粮因缘,但当时还没有证得道或果,也仍然称他为“愚人”。然而对这个人来说,他在那一期生命中,证得道果的资粮因缘已经被彻底断除了,所以世尊称他为“愚人”。而“他这番话是出于嗔恨才说的”意思是:他这些话是带着嗔恨说出来的。巴利
147.Kodhanoti caṇḍo pharuso. Moghapurisoti tucchapuriso. Yassa hi tasmiṃ attabhāve maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo natthi, taṃ buddhā ‘‘moghapuriso’’ti vadanti. Upanissaye satipi tasmiṃ khaṇe magge vā phale vā asati ‘‘moghapuriso’’ti vadantiyeva. Imassa pana tasmiṃ attabhāve maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo samucchinnoyeva, tena taṃ ‘‘moghapuriso’’ti āha. Kodhā ca panassa esā vācā bhāsitāti esā ca panassa vācā kodhena bhāsitā.
那么,这个人为什么对世尊发怒呢?原来他之前曾去亲近世尊,请教修习天眼的准备工作。世尊就为他讲了。他修成天眼之后,扩大光明,向天界看去,看见那些在天上的欢喜园、珊瑚藤园、粗涩园、杂林园里享受天界福报的天子和天女们,心里就想:像他们这样拥有如此殊胜的身体,声音该有多甜美啊!他很想听到那种声音,于是又去亲近具足十力的世尊,请教修习天耳界的准备工作。可是世尊知道他没有修成天耳界的根机因缘,就没有给他讲准备工作。因为诸佛不会给没有根机因缘的人讲准备工作。于是他就对世尊怀恨在心,心想:我先向沙门乔达摩请教天眼的准备工作,他讲了,那意思好像是“成不成随你”。我靠自己的努力修成了天眼,再去请教天耳界的准备工作,他却不给我讲。他一定是这样想的:“这个王族出家的人,要是修成了天眼智,再修成天耳界智,再修成他心智,再修成漏尽智,那就要跟我平起平坐了。”他是出于嫉妒和吝啬,才不教我的。他越想越恨,后来甚至扔掉袈裟还俗了,可还是不肯安静待着。他到处用不实之词诽谤具足十力的世尊。所以世尊说:“而且他的这番话是因忿怒而说出的。”巴利
Kasmā panesa bhagavato kuddhoti? Ayañhi pubbe bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā dibbacakkhuparikammaṃ pucchi. Athassa bhagavā kathesi. So dibbacakkhuṃ nibbattetvā ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā devaloke olokento nandanavanacittalatāvanaphārusakavanamissakavanesu dibbasampattiṃ anubhavamāne devaputte ca devadhītaro ca disvā etesaṃ evarūpāya attabhāvasampattiyā ṭhitānaṃ kīvamadhuro nu kho saddo bhavissatīti saddaṃ sotukāmo hutvā dasabalaṃ upasaṅkamitvā dibbasotadhātuparikammaṃ pucchi. Bhagavā panassa dibbasotadhātuyā upanissayo natthīti ñatvā parikammaṃ na kathesi. Na hi buddhā upanissayavirahita tassa parikammaṃ kathenti. So bhagavati āghātaṃ bandhitvā cintesi ‘‘ahaṃ samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ paṭhamaṃ dibbacakkhuparikammaṃ pucchiṃ, so ‘mayhaṃ taṃ sampajjatu vā mā vā sampajjatū’ti kathesi. Ahaṃ pana paccattapurisakārena taṃ nibbattetvā dibbasotadhātuparikammaṃ pucchiṃ, taṃ me na kathesi. Addhāssa evaṃ hoti ‘ayaṃ rājapabbajito dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ nibbattetvā dibbasotadhātuñāṇaṃ nibbattetvā cetopariyañāṇaṃ nibbattetvā āsavānaṃ khayañāṇaṃ nibbattetvā mayā samasamo bhavissatī’ti issāmacchariyavasena mayhaṃ na kathetī’’ti. Bhiyyoso āghātaṃ bandhitvā kāsāyāni chaḍḍetvā gihibhāvaṃ patvāpi na tuṇhībhūto vicarati. Dasabalaṃ pana asatā tucchena abbhācikkhanto vicarati. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘kodhā ca panassa esā vācā bhāsitā’’ti.
舍利弗,这是一种称赞。舍利弗,如来在十万大劫再加四不可数劫中圆满诸巴拉密时,就是为了这个目的才精勤努力:“我所宣说的法将会导向出离。”因此,凡是这样说的人,他就是在称赞如来。这是在说明:舍利弗,这是称赞,这是如来的功德,是如来的优点,而不是过失。巴利
Vaṇṇo heso, sāriputtāti, sāriputta, tathāgatena satasahassakappādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni pāramiyo pūrentena etadatthameva vāyāmo kato ‘‘desanādhammo me niyyāniko bhavissatī’’ti. Tasmā yo evaṃ vadeyya, so vaṇṇaṃyeva tathāgatassa bhāsati. Vaṇṇo heso, sāriputta, tathāgatassa guṇo eso tathāgatassa, na aguṇoti dasseti.
世尊用“舍利弗,即使这样的事……”这一段话,是要说明什么呢?是要说明:被苏那卡达所否定的超人法,在如来自己身上确实是存在的。据说,世尊的意思是:“舍利弗,这个愚人苏那卡达说‘如来没有超人法’。可是我有一切知智,有神变智,有天耳界智,有他心智,有十力智,有四无畏智,有在八种集会中不动摇的智,有能辨别四种投生方式的智,有能辨别五种趣向的智——所有这些正是超人法。面对这样一些超人法,这个愚人连其中一种能了知的智慧、哪怕只是随顺法理的一点点,都不会有。”为了说明这个道理,世尊就以“舍利弗,即使这样的事……”这种方式开始了这次开示。其中,“anveti”就是“anvayo”,意思是了知、觉悟。法的随顺就是“dhammanvayo”,这是指能了知那一切知智等法的智慧。“彼世尊是……”等语句,就是在说明:像这样名为一切知智的超人法,在我这里确实存在——连这样随顺法理的了知,那个愚人也不会有。在神变智等各项中,也应当同样理解其搭配。巴利
Ayampihi nāma sāriputtātiādinā kiṃ dasseti? Sunakkhattena paṭisiddhassa uttarimanussadhammassa attani atthitaṃ dasseti. Bhagavā kira ayaṃ, sāriputta, sunakkhatto moghapuriso natthi tathāgatassa uttarimanussadhammoti vadati. Mayhañca sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ nāma atthi, iddhividhañāṇaṃ nāma atthi, dibbasotadhātuñāṇaṃ nāma atthi, cetopariyañāṇaṃ nāma atthi, dasabalañāṇaṃ nāma atthi, catuvesārajjañāṇaṃ nāma atthi, aṭṭhasu parisāsu akampanañāṇaṃ nāma atthi, catuyoniparicchedakañāṇaṃ nāma atthi, pañcagatiparicchedakañāṇaṃ nāma atthi, sabbepi cete uttarimanussadhammāyeva. Evarūpesu uttarimanussadhammesu ekassāpi vijānanasamatthaṃ dhammanvayamattampi nāma etassa moghapurisassa na bhavissatīti etamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ayampi hi nāma sāriputtātiādinā nayena imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha anvetīti anvayo, jānāti , anubujjhatīti attho. Dhammassa anvayo dhammanvayo, taṃ taṃ sabbaññutaññāṇādidhammaṃ jānanapaññāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. ‘‘Itipi so bhagavā’’tiādīhi evarūpampi nāma mayhaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇasaṅkhātaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ vijjamānameva atthīti jānituṃ tassa moghapurisassa dhammanvayopi na bhavissatīti dasseti. Iddhividhañāṇādīsupi evaṃ yojanā veditabbā.
十力智等的注释巴利
Dasabalañāṇādivaṇṇanā
148 在这里,虽然紧接着他心智之后本来应该讲三种明,但因为讲了那些之后,上面的十力智就不完整,所以先不讲三明。为了显示如来十力已经圆满,就说了“然而,舍利弗,有这十种……”等等。其中,“如来十力”是指与其他弟子不共的、只有如来才有的力。或者也可以理解为:就像过去诸佛的力是由福德积累圆满而来的那样,这样而来的力就是如来十力。在这里,如来力有两种:身力和智力。其中,身力可以依照象族来了解。古人也这样说过:巴利
148. Ettha ca kiñcāpi cetopariyañāṇānantaraṃ tisso vijjā vattabbā siyuṃ, yasmā pana tāsu vuttāsu upari dasabalañāṇaṃ na paripūrati, tasmā tā avatvā tathāgatassa dasabalañāṇaṃ paripūraṃ katvā dassento dasa kho panimāni sāriputtātiādimāha. Tattha tathāgatabalānīti aññehi asādhāraṇāni tathāgatasseva balāni. Yathā vā pubbabuddhānaṃ balāni puññussayasampattiyā āgatāni, tathā āgatabalānītipi attho. Tattha duvidhaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ kāyabalañca ñāṇabalañca. Tesu kāyabalaṃ hatthikulānusārena veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ porāṇehi –
“ 迦罗婆迦与恒河象,白象、铜色、黄褐象;
香象、吉祥、金象、伍波萨他象,并六牙象,斯为十种。”巴利
‘‘Kālāvakañca gaṅgeyyaṃ, paṇḍaraṃ tambapiṅgalaṃ; Gandhamaṅgalahemañca, uposathachaddantime dasā’’ti.
这十种就是象的族类。其中,迦罗婆迦象要理解为普通的象族。十个人的体力,等于一头迦罗婆迦象的力气;十头迦罗婆迦象的力气,等于一头恒河象的力气;十头恒河象的力气,等于一头白象的力气;十头白象的力气,等于一头铜色象的力气;十头铜色象的力气,等于一头黄象的力气;十头黄象的力气,等于一头香象的力气;十头香象的力气,等于一头吉祥象的力气;十头吉祥象的力气,等于一头金象的力气;十头金象的力气,等于一头伍波萨他象的力气;十头伍波萨他象的力气,等于一头六牙象的力气;十头六牙象的力气,等于一位如来的力气。这也叫做那罗延坚固力。这个力量,按普通象来算,是百亿头象的力气;按人来算,是千亿个人的力气。这就是如来的身力。巴利
Imāni hi dasa hatthikulāni. Tattha kālāvakanti pakatihatthikulaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ purisānaṃ kāyabalaṃ, taṃ ekassa kālāvakahatthino. Yaṃ dasannaṃ kālāvakānaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa gaṅgeyyassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gaṅgeyyānaṃ, taṃ ekassa paṇḍarassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ paṇḍarānaṃ, taṃ ekassa tambassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ tambānaṃ, taṃ ekassa piṅgalassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ piṅgalānaṃ, taṃ ekassa gandhahatthino. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gandhahatthīnaṃ, taṃ ekassa maṅgalassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ maṅgalānaṃ, taṃ ekassa hemavatassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ hemavatānaṃ, taṃ ekassa uposathassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ uposathānaṃ, taṃ ekassa chaddantassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ chaddantānaṃ taṃ ekassa tathāgatassa. Nārāyanasaṅghātabalantipi idameva vuccati . Tadetaṃ pakatihatthigaṇanāya hatthīnaṃ koṭisahassānaṃ purisagaṇanāya dasannaṃ purisakoṭisahassānaṃ balaṃ hoti. Idaṃ tāva tathāgatassa kāyabalaṃ.
关于智力,在巴利经文中其实已经提到了。十力智、四无畏智、在八种大众中不动摇的智、辨别四生的智、辨别五趣的智。在《相应部》中提到的七十三种智、七十七种智等,还有其他无数上千种智,这些就叫作智力。这里所指的也是智力。因为智以不可动摇、以能支撑为含义,所以被称为力。巴利
Ñāṇabalaṃ pana pāḷiyaṃ tāva āgatameva. Dasabalañāṇaṃ, catuvesārajjañāṇaṃ, aṭṭhasu parisāsu akampanañāṇaṃ, catuyoniparicchedakañāṇaṃ, pañcagatiparicchedakañāṇaṃ. Saṃyuttake (saṃ. ni. 2.34) āgatāni tesattati ñāṇāni sattasattati ñāṇānīti evaṃ aññānipi anekāni ñāṇasahassāni, etaṃ ñāṇabalaṃ nāma. Idhāpi ñāṇabalameva adhippetaṃ. Ñāṇañhi akampiyaṭṭhena upatthambhanaṭṭhena ca balanti vuttaṃ.
具足这些力:就是具备、完全具备这十种智之力。牛王位:指最殊胜的地位、最高的地位。或者说,过去诸佛就是牛王,这是指他们的地位。再者,统领百头牛的首领叫usabha(牛王),统领千头牛的首领叫vasabha(牛王)。或者说,统领百群牛的首领叫usabha,统领千群牛的首领叫vasabha。一切牛中最殊胜的、能承受一切危难的、白色的、令人欢喜的、能背负沉重负担的、即使百雷齐鸣也不动摇的nisabha(牛王),这里指的就是它。这也是它的同义词。属于牛王的,就是牛王位。位:指用四足压住大地、安稳不动的站姿。这就像牛王一样,所以叫牛王位。正如那头名为牛王的牛,具足牛王之力,用四足压住大地,以不可动摇的姿态站立;同样,如来也具足十种如来之力,以四无畏为足,压住八众的大地,在有天、魔、梵的世间中,不被任何对手和敌人动摇,以不可动摇的姿态站立。就这样站立着,他宣称、承认自己达到那个牛王位,不否认,而是在自己身上承担起来。因此说“宣称达到牛王位”。巴利
Yehi balehi samannāgatoti yehi dasahi ñāṇabalehi upeto samupeto. Āsabhaṃ ṭhānanti seṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ uttamaṭṭhānaṃ. Āsabhā vā pubbabuddhā, tesaṃ ṭhānanti attho. Apica gavasatajeṭṭhako usabho, gavasahassajeṭṭhako vasabho. Vajasatajeṭṭhako vā usabho, vajasahassajeṭṭhako vasabho. Sabbagavaseṭṭho sabbaparissayasaho seto pāsādiko mahābhāravaho asanisatasaddehipi akampaniyo nisabho, so idha usabhoti adhippeto. Idampi hi tassa pariyāyavacanaṃ. Usabhassa idanti āsabhaṃ. Ṭhānanti catūhi pādehi pathaviṃ uppīḷetvā acalaṭṭhānaṃ. Idaṃ pana āsabhaṃ viyāti āsabhaṃ. Yatheva hi nisabhasaṅkhāto usabho usabhabalena samannāgato catūhi pādehi pathaviṃ uppīḷetvā acalaṭṭhānena tiṭṭhati, evaṃ tathāgatopi dasahi tathāgatabalehi samannāgato catūhi vesārajjapādehi aṭṭhaparisapathaviṃ uppīḷetvā sadevake loke kenaci paccatthikena paccāmittena akampiyo acalaṭṭhānena tiṭṭhati. Evaṃ tiṭṭhamānova taṃ āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti, upagacchati na paccakkhāti attani āropeti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānātī’’ti.
在八种大众当中。发出狮子吼:就是发出最殊胜的吼声、无所畏惧的吼声,或者发出像狮子吼一样的声音。这个含义应当依据《狮子吼经》来说明。又如同狮子因为能忍受、能摧破而被称为狮子,同样,如来因为能忍受世间法、能摧破外道的说法而被称为狮子。这样所说的狮子的吼声,就是狮子吼。其中,如同狮子具足狮子之力,在任何地方都无所畏惧、毫无恐惧地发出狮子吼;同样,如来狮子也具足如来的诸力,在八种大众中无所畏惧、毫无恐惧,以“如此是色”等这样的方式,发出具足种种教法庄严的狮子吼。因此说“在众中发出狮子吼”。转梵轮:这里“梵”是指最殊胜、最上、最卓越的。而“轮”这个词——巴利
Parisāsūti aṭṭhasu parisāsu. Sīhanādaṃ nadatīti seṭṭhanādaṃ abhītanādaṃ nadati, sīhanādasadisaṃ vā nādaṃ nadati. Ayamattho sīhanādasuttena dīpetabbo. Yathā vā sīho sahanato hananato ca sīhoti vuccati, evaṃ tathāgato lokadhammānaṃ sahanato parappavādānañca hananato sīhoti vuccati. Evaṃ vuttassa sīhassa nādaṃ sīhanādaṃ. Tattha yathā sīho sīhabalena samannāgato sabbattha visārado vigatalomahaṃso sīhanādaṃ nadati, evaṃ tathāgatasīhopi tathāgatabalehi samannāgato aṭṭhasu parisāsu visārado vigatalomahaṃso iti rūpantiādinā nayena nānāvidhadesanāvilāsasampannaṃ sīhanādaṃ nadati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadatī’’ti. Brahmacakkaṃ pavattetīti ettha brahmanti seṭṭhaṃ uttamaṃ visiṭṭhaṃ. Cakka-saddo panāyaṃ –
在成就、特相、车轮、威仪中;
在布施、宝、法、胸中,以及在轮等事物中,它都能见到;
在这里,于法轮中,这个“被认为”应当被辨明为两种。巴利
Sampattiyaṃ lakkhaṇe ca, rathaṅge iriyāpathe; Dāne ratanadhammūra-cakkādīsu ca dissati; Dhammacakke idha mato, tañca dvedhā vibhāvaye.
比丘们,在这句“比丘们,有这四种轮,具足这些轮的天与人……”(《增支部》4.31)等文中,这个“轮”指的是成就。在“足底生有轮相”(《长部》2.35)中,指的是相。在“如运货车的轮印”(《法句》1)中,指的是车轮。在“四轮九门”(《相应部》1.29)中,指的是威仪。在“施与而食,莫放逸,为一切众生转动轮”(《本生》1.7.149)中,指的是布施。在“天宝轮出现了”(《长部》2.243)中,指的是宝轮。在“我所转动的轮”(《经集》562)中,指的是法轮。在“被欲望击中的男子,轮在头顶旋转”(《本生》1.1.104;1.5.103)中,指的是胸轮。在“即使以利刃之轮”(《长部》1.166)中,指的是打击轮。在“霹雳轮”(《长部》3.61;《相应部》2.162)中,指的是霹雳圈。但在这里,这个“轮”指的是法轮。巴利
‘‘Cattārimāni, bhikkhave, cakkāni, yehi samannāgatānaṃ devamanussāna’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 4.31) hi ayaṃ sampattiyaṃ dissati. ‘‘Pādatalesu cakkāni jātānī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.35) ettha lakkhaṇe. ‘‘Cakkaṃva vahato pada’’nti (dha. pa. 1) ettha rathaṅge. ‘‘Catucakkaṃ navadvāra’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.29) ettha iriyāpathe. ‘‘Dadaṃ bhuñja mā ca pamādo, cakkaṃ pavattaya sabbapāṇina’’nti (jā. 1.7.149) ettha dāne. ‘‘Dibbaṃ cakkaratanaṃ pāturahosī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.243) ettha ratanacakke. ‘‘Mayā pavattitaṃ cakka’’nti (su. ni. 562) ettha dhammacakke. ‘‘Icchāhatassa posassa, cakkaṃ bhamati matthake’’ti (jā. 1.1.104; 1.5.103) ettha uracakke. ‘‘Khurapariyantena cepi cakkenā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.166) ettha paharaṇacakke. ‘‘Asanivicakka’’nti (dī. ni. 3.61; saṃ. ni. 2.162) ettha asanimaṇḍale. Idha panāyaṃ dhammacakke adhippeto.
这个法轮有两种:证悟智和说法智。其中,由智慧修成的、能给自己带来圣者之力的,是证悟智;由悲心修成的、能给弟子们带来圣者之力的,是说法智。其中,证悟智又分两种:正在生起和已经生起。从出家开始,一直到阿拉汉道,这期间属于正在生起;在证果的那一刹那,称为已经生起。或者,从兜率天开始,一直到菩提座下证得阿拉汉道,这期间属于正在生起;在证果的那一刹那,称为已经生起。或者,从燃灯佛(十力尊)那时开始,一直到阿拉汉道,这期间属于正在生起;在证果的那一刹那,称为已经生起。说法智也分两种:正在转动和已经转动。从初转法轮开始,一直到孔丹尼亚证得入流道,这期间属于正在转动;在证果的那一刹那,称为已经转动。在这两者当中,证悟智是出世间智,说法智是世间智。不过这两种智都不是其他人能共有的,唯有诸佛才拥有的亲生之子智。巴利
Taṃ pana dhammacakkaṃ duvidhaṃ hoti paṭivedhañāṇañceva desanāñāṇañca. Tattha paññāpabhāvitaṃ attano ariyabalāvahaṃ paṭivedhañāṇaṃ. Karuṇāpabhāvitaṃ sāvakānaṃ ariyabalāvahaṃ desanāñāṇaṃ. Tattha paṭivedhañāṇaṃ uppajjamānaṃ uppannanti duvidhaṃ. Tañhi abhinikkhamanato yāva arahattamaggā uppajjamānaṃ, phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāma. Tusitabhavanato vā yāva mahābodhipallaṅke arahattamaggā uppajjamānaṃ, phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāma. Dīpaṅkaradasabalato paṭṭhāya vā yāva arahattamaggā uppajjamānaṃ, phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāma. Desanāñāṇampi pavattamānaṃ pavattanti duvidhaṃ. Tañhi yāva aññātakoṇḍaññassa sotāpattimaggā pavattamānaṃ, phalakkhaṇe pavattaṃ nāma. Tesu paṭivedhañāṇaṃ lokuttaraṃ, desanāñāṇaṃ lokiyaṃ. Ubhayampi panetaṃ aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ, buddhānaṃyeva orasañāṇaṃ.
现在要详细说明的是:如来具足了哪些力,才自称具备牛王般的地位——也就是开头就提出的“舍利弗,如来有这十种如来力”。那么,是哪十种呢?世尊说:“舍利弗,在这里,如来如实了知处是处、非处是非处……”等等。其中,“处是处、非处是非处”,意思就是因是因、非因是非因。因为果依止于因,是依止那个因而生起和运作的,所以因被称为“处”。世尊了知:“凡是那些法以那些法为因、为缘而生起,那就是处;凡是那些法不以那些法为因、为缘而生起,那就是非处”,因此如实了知处是处、非处是非处。不过,这一点在阿毗达摩中已经详细解说了,即通过《分别论》的“其中,什么是如来的处是处、非处是非处如实智?”等方式。“而且”是指以那种智慧。“舍利弗,这也是如来的……”意思是:这处非处智就是如来的如来力。后面所有文句的关联都应这样理解。巴利
Idāni yehi balehi samannāgato tathāgato āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti, yāni āditova ‘‘dasa kho panimāni, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalānī’’ti nikkhittāni, tāni vitthārato dassetuṃ katamāni dasa? Idha, sāriputta, tathāgato ṭhānañca ṭhānatotiādimāha. Tattha ṭhānañca ṭhānatoti kāraṇañca kāraṇato. Kāraṇañhi yasmā tattha phalaṃ tiṭṭhati tadāyattavuttiyāya uppajjati ceva pavattati ca, tasmā ṭhānanti vuccati. Taṃ bhagavā ‘‘ye ye dhammā yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ hetū paccayā uppādāya, taṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ. Ye ye dhammā yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ na hetū na paccayā uppādāya, taṃ taṃ aṭṭhāna’’nti pajānanto ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Abhidhamme panetaṃ, ‘‘tattha katamaṃ tathāgatassa ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṃ ñāṇa’’ntiādinā (vibha. 809) nayena vitthāritameva. Yampīti yena ñāṇena. Idampi, sāriputta, tathāgatassāti idampi ṭhānāṭṭhānañāṇaṃ tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṃ nāma hotīti attho. Evaṃ sabbapadesu yojanā veditabbā.
业受持:指受持之后所造的善业和不善业,或者业本身就是业受持。从处、从因:就是从缘和从因来说。其中,趣、依止、时、加行是异熟之处;业是因。关于这个智的详细解说,在阿毗达摩中已经按照“有些不善业受持被趣的成就所阻碍,因此不感果……”这样的方式出现了。巴利
Kammasamādānānanti samādiyitvā katānaṃ kusalākusalakammānaṃ, kammameva vā kammasamādānaṃ. Ṭhānaso hetusoti paccayato ceva hetuto ca. Tattha gatiupadhikālapayogā vipākassa ṭhānaṃ. Kammaṃ hetu. Imassa pana ñāṇassa vitthārakathā ‘‘atthekaccāni pāpakāni kammasamādānāni gatisampattipaṭibāḷhāni na vipaccantī’’tiādinā (vibha. 810) nayena abhidhamme āgatāyeva.
“趣向一切处之道”:指通向一切趣的道,也指不通向任何趣的道。“道”:就是道路。“如实了知”:比如许多人一起杀害同一个生命时,他能知道这个人的思将来会导向地狱,那个人的思会导向畜生道。按这种方式,即使在同一个事相上,他也能如实不颠倒地了知那些被称为善思与不善思的种种道行各自的本质。而关于这种智的详细说明,在阿毗达摩中已经按照“其中,什么是如来对趣向一切处之道的如实智?在这里,如来了知:这是道,这是行道,导向地狱……”这样的方式给出了。巴利
Sabbatthagāmininti sabbagatigāminiṃ agatigāminiñca. Paṭipadanti maggaṃ. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti bahūsupi manussesu ekameva pāṇaṃ ghātentesu imassa cetanā nirayagāminī bhavissati, imassa cetanā tiracchānayonigāminīti iminā nayena ekavatthusmimpi kusalākusalacetanāsaṅkhātānaṃ paṭipattīnaṃ aviparītato sabhāvaṃ jānāti. Imassa ca ñāṇassa vitthārakathā ‘‘tattha katamaṃ tathāgatassa sabbatthagāminiṃ paṭipadaṃ yathābhūtaṃ ñāṇaṃ? Idha tathāgato ayaṃ maggo ayaṃ paṭipadā nirayagāmīti pajānātī’’tiādinā (vibha. 811) nayena abhidhamme āgatāyeva.
“种种界”是指由眼界等界,或由欲界等界而形成的多种界。“种种不同界”是指由于那些界各自不同的特征,而成为种种不同种类的界。“世间”是指蕴世间、处世间、界世间。“如实了知”是指对每一种界,都毫无颠倒地通达它们的真实本性。这个智在阿毗达摩中已经按照“其中,什么是如来对种种界、种种不同界世间的如实智?在这里,如来了知种种蕴……”这样的方式详细解释了。巴利
Anekadhātunti cakkhudhātuādīhi kāmadhātuādīhi vā dhātūhi bahudhātuṃ. Nānādhātunti tāsaṃyeva dhātūnaṃ vilakkhaṇatāya nānappakāradhātuṃ. Lokanti khandhāyatanadhātulokaṃ. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti tāsaṃ tāsaṃ dhātūnaṃ aviparītato sabhāvaṃ paṭivijjhati. Idampi ñāṇaṃ ‘‘tattha katamaṃ tathāgatassa anekadhātunānādhātulokaṃ yathābhūtaṃ ñāṇaṃ, idha tathāgato khandhanānattaṃ pajānātī’’tiādinā nayena abhidhamme vitthāritameva.
种种胜解:是指因为下劣等各种胜解而成为种种胜解的状态。这也是智,在《阿毗达摩》中已经按照“其中,什么是如来对众生种种胜解状态的如实智?在这里,如来了知:有众生是下劣胜解……”这样的方式详细展开了。巴利
Nānādhimuttikatanti hīnādīhi adhimuttīhi nānādhimuttikabhāvaṃ. Idampi ñāṇaṃ, ‘‘tattha katamaṃ tathāgatassa sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikataṃ yathābhūtaṃ ñāṇaṃ, idha tathāgato pajānāti santi sattā hīnādhimuttikā’’ti ādinā nayena abhidhamme vitthāritameva.
“其他众生”是指主要的有情。“其他个人”是指除了他们之外更低劣的有情。或者这两个词其实是同一个意思,只是根据所教化的对象不同而分成两种说法。“根上下”是指信等诸根的优胜与低劣,也就是增长与衰退,这就是它的含义。关于这种智的详细解说,在《阿毗达摩》中已经按照“其中,什么是如来对其他众生、其他个人的根上下的如实智?在这里,如来了知众生的意乐,了知随眠……”等方式出现了。巴利
Parasattānanti padhānasattānaṃ. Parapuggalānanti tato paresaṃ hīnasattānaṃ. Ekatthameva vā etaṃ padadvayaṃ. Veneyyavasena pana dvedhā vuttaṃ. Indriyaparopariyattanti saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ parabhāvaṃ aparabhāvañca, vuddhiñca hāniñcāti attho. Imassapi ñāṇassa vitthārakathā – ‘‘tattha katamaṃ tathāgatassa parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ indriyaparopariyattaṃ yathābhūtaṃ ñāṇaṃ, idha tathāgato sattānaṃ āsayaṃ pajānāti anusayaṃ pajānātī’’tiādinā (vibha. 814) nayena abhidhamme āgatāyeva.
“禅那、解脱、定、等至”是指:初禅等四种禅那,“有色者见诸色”等八种解脱,有寻有伺等三种定,以及初禅等至等九种次第等至。“杂染”是指退分法。“清净”是指胜进分法。“出起”则如《分别论》所说:“清净也是出起,从每一种定出起也是出起。”这里,“清净也是出起”指的是熟练的禅那;而“从每一种定出起也是出起”指的是有分和果等至。因为下下层的熟练禅那是上上层禅那的立足处,所以说“清净也是出起”。而从一切禅那出起是靠有分,以果等至从灭尽等至出起。针对这个意思,才说“从每一种定出起也是出起”。这种智在《阿毗达摩》中已经按照“其中,什么是如来对禅那、解脱、定、等至的杂染、清净、出起的如实智?有四种入禅者,某些入禅者在成就时却认为是衰败……”等理路详细展开。这七种智的详细解说与抉择,在《迷惑消除·分别论注》中已经讲过。宿住随念智和天眼智的解说,在《清净道论》中详细阐述。漏尽智的解说,则在《怖畏经》中。巴利
Jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnanti paṭhamādīnaṃ catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ rūpī rūpāni passatītiādīnaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānaṃ savitakkasavicārādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ samādhīnaṃ paṭhamajjhānasamāpattiādīnañca navannaṃ anupubbasamāpattīnaṃ. Saṃkilesanti hānabhāgiyadhammaṃ. Vodānanti visesabhāgiyadhammaṃ. Vuṭṭhānanti ‘‘vodānampi vuṭṭhānaṃ. Tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti (vibha. 828) evaṃ vuttapaguṇajjhānañceva bhavaṅgaphalasamāpattiyo ca. Heṭṭhimaṃ heṭṭhimañhi paguṇajjhānaṃ uparimassa uparimassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Tasmā ‘‘vodānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Bhavaṅgena pana sabbajjhānehi vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Phalasamāpattiyā nirodhasamāpattito vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Idampi ñāṇaṃ ‘‘tattha katamaṃ tathāgatassa jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnaṃ saṃkilesaṃ vodānaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ ñāṇaṃ, jhāyīti cattāro jhāyī, atthekacco jhāyī sampattiṃyeva samānaṃ vipattīti paccetī’’tiādinā (vibha. 828) nayena abhidhamme vitthāritaṃ. Sattannaṃ ñāṇānaṃ vitthārakathāvinicchayo sammohavinodaniyaṃ vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vutto. Pubbenivāsānussatidibbacakkhuñāṇakathā visuddhimagge vitthāritā. Āsavakkhayakathā bhayabherave.
149 “舍利弗,就是这些。”——这是对先前所说“舍利弗,如来确实有这十种如来力”的确认:就是这些。在这里,外道有这样的说法:所谓十力智并不是各自独立的,它只是一切知智的一个分支而已。不应这样看待它。因为十力智是一回事,一切知智是另一回事。十力智只了知各自特定的作用范围,而一切知智则连这些以及此外其余的一切都能了知。具体来说,在十力智中,第一力只了知因与非因;第二力只了知业与异熟各自的差别;第三力只了知业的区分;第四力只了知种种界的因;第五力只了知有情的意乐与胜解;第六力只了知诸根的锐利与迟钝;第七力只了知与禅那等相关的杂染等;第八力只了知过去世所住的蕴相续;第九力只了知有情的死与结生;第十力只了知对谛的确定。而一切知智则了知由这些力所应了知的,以及超出这些之外的。但它并不执行这些力的全部作用。因为它并不能入定而成禅那,并不能变现而成神通,并不能断尽烦恼而成道。再者,应当这样质问外道:“所谓十力智,是有寻有伺的,是无寻唯伺的,还是无寻无伺的?是欲界的、色界的、无色界的,是世间的还是出世间的?”懂的人会依次回答:前七种智是有寻有伺的;接下来的两种是无寻无伺的;漏尽智则可能是有寻有伺的,可能是无寻唯伺的,可能是无寻无伺的。同样,他会依次说前七种是欲界的,接下来的两种是色界的,最后一种是出世间的;而一切知智则是既有寻也有伺、属于欲界、属于世间的。巴利
149.Imāni kho sāriputtāti yāni pubbe ‘‘dasa kho panimāni, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalānī’’ti avocaṃ, imāni tānīti appanaṃ karoti. Tattha paravādīkathā hoti – dasabalañāṇaṃ nāma pāṭiyekkaṃ natthi, sabbaññutaññāṇassevāyaṃ pabhedoti. Taṃ na tathā daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññameva hi dasabalañāṇaṃ, aññaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Dasabalañāṇañhi sakasakakiccameva jānāti. Sabbaññutañāṇaṃ tampi tato avasesampi pajānāti. Dasabalañāṇesu hi paṭhamaṃ kāraṇākāraṇameva jānāti. Dutiyaṃ kammantaravipākantarameva. Tatiyaṃ kammaparicchedameva. Catutthaṃ dhātunānattakāraṇameva. Pañcamaṃ sattānaṃ ajjhāsayādhimuttimeva. Chaṭṭhaṃ indriyānaṃ tikkhamudubhāvameva. Sattamaṃ jhānādīhi saddhiṃ tesaṃ saṃkilesādimeva. Aṭṭhamaṃ pubbenivutthakhandhasantatimeva. Navamaṃ sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhimeva. Dasamaṃ saccaparicchedameva. Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana etehi jānitabbañca tato uttariñca pajānāti. Etesaṃ pana kiccaṃ na sabbaṃ karoti. Tañhi jhānaṃ hutvā appetuṃ na sakkoti, iddhi hutvā vikubbituṃ na sakkoti, maggo hutvā kilese khepetuṃ na sakkoti. Apica paravādī evaṃ pucchitabbo – ‘‘dasabalañāṇaṃ nāma etaṃ savitakkasavicāraṃ avitakkavicāramattaṃ avitakkaavicāraṃ kāmāvacaraṃ rūpāvacaraṃ arūpāvacaraṃ lokiyaṃ lokuttara’’nti? Jānanto paṭipāṭiyā satta ñāṇāni savitakkasavicārānīti vakkhati. Tato parāni dve avitakkaavicārānīti vakkhati. Āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ siyā savitakkasavicāraṃ, siyā avitakkavicāramattaṃ, siyā avitakkaavicāranti vakkhati. Tathā paṭipāṭiyā satta kāmāvacarāni, tato parāni dve rūpāvacarāni, avasāne ekaṃ lokuttaranti vakkhati, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana savitakkasavicārameva kāmāvacarameva lokiyamevāti vakkhati.
在这里做完逐字解释之后,现在要说明:如来首先以“处非处智”,看到应受教化的众生能否证得漏尽——也就是看到他们没有烦恼障,因为他能看到世间正见成立之处,也能看到决定性邪见不成立之处。接着,他以“业报智”看到他们没有异熟障,因为他能看到他们具有三因的结生。再以“一切至处道智”看到他们没有业障,因为他能看到他们没有造无间业。对于这样没有障碍的众生,他以“种种界智”看到他们所行的差别,为了给他们宣说随顺的法,因为他能看到界的差异。然后,他以“种种胜解智”看到他们的胜解,即使不特别加功用行,也能随他们的胜解而说法。接着,为了随他们的能力与力量为这些已见胜解的众生说法,他以“根上下智”看到他们根器的上下差别,因为他能看到信等诸根的锐利或迟钝。这样遍了知根器上下之后,如果那些众生在远处,如来因为已对初禅等得自在,就以神通的殊胜迅速前往。到达之后,他以“宿住随念智”看到他们过去世的修行,又以依天眼智之力所能获得的“他心智”看到他们当前心的差别,最后以漏尽智的威德,由于对通向漏尽的道路已无迷惑,便为他们宣说令得漏尽的法。因此应当知道,就是依照这个次第,才说了这十种力。巴利
Evamettha anupadavaṇṇanaṃ katvā idāni yasmā tathāgato paṭhamaṃyeva ṭhānāṭṭhānañāṇena veneyyasattānaṃ āsavakkhayādhigamassa ceva anadhigamassa ca ṭhānāṭṭhānabhūtaṃ kilesāvaraṇābhāvaṃ passati, lokiyasammādiṭṭhiṭṭhānadassanato niyatamicchādiṭṭhiṭṭhānābhāvadassanato ca. Atha nesaṃ kammavipākañāṇena vipākāvaraṇābhāvaṃ passati, tihetukapaṭisandhidassanato. Sabbatthagāminīpaṭipadāñāṇena kammāvaraṇābhāvaṃ passati, anantariyakammābhāvadassanato. Evaṃ anāvaraṇānaṃ anekadhātunānādhātuñāṇena anukūladhammadesanatthaṃ cariyavisesaṃ passati, dhātuvemattadassanato. Atha nesaṃ nānādhimuttikatāñāṇena adhimuttiṃ passati, payogaṃ anādiyitvāpi adhimuttivasena dhammadesanatthaṃ. Athevaṃ diṭṭhādhimuttīnaṃ yathāsatti yathābalaṃ dhammaṃ desetuṃ indriyaparopariyattañāṇena indriyaparopariyattaṃ passati, saddhādīnaṃ tikkhamudubhāvadassanato. Evaṃ pariññātindriyaparopariyattā pana te sace dūre honti, paṭhamajjhānādīsu vasībhūtattā iddhivisesena te khippaṃ upagacchati. Upagantvā ca nesaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇena pubbajātibhāvanaṃ, dibbacakkhuñāṇānubhāvato pattabbena cetopariyañāṇena sampati cittavisesaṃ passanto āsavakkhayañāṇānubhāvena āsavakkhayagāminiyā paṭipadāya vigatasammohattā āsavakkhayāya dhammaṃ deseti. Tasmā iminā anukkamena imāni dasabalāni vuttānīti veditabbāni.
舍利弗,在“不舍弃那种言语”等句子中,当他说“我不会再说这样的话”时,这就叫舍弃了那种言语。当他心里想“我不会再生起这样的心”时,这就叫舍弃了那样的心。当他想着“我不会再执取这样的见解”而放下时,这就叫舍遣了那样的见。如果不这样做,他就既没有舍弃,也没有舍遣。所谓“就像被直接扔进地狱一样”,应当理解为:就像被地狱的狱卒抓走、丢进地狱里,他就这样一直待在地狱里。巴利
Taṃ, sāriputta, vācaṃ appahāyātiādīsu puna evarūpiṃ vācaṃ na vakkhāmīti vadanto taṃ vācaṃ pajahati nāma. Puna evarūpaṃ cittaṃ na uppādessāmīti cintento cittaṃ pajahati nāma. Puna evarūpaṃ diṭṭhiṃ na gaṇhissāmīti pajahanto diṭṭhiṃ paṭinissajjati nāma, tathā akaronto neva pajahati, na paṭinissajjati. So yathābhataṃ nikkhitto evaṃ nirayeti yathā nirayapālehi āharitvā niraye ṭhapito, evaṃ niraye ṭhapitoyevāti veditabbo.
现在,为了说明能证明这个道理的譬喻,就说了“譬如”等话。其中,“具戒”等词,应当理解为世间的和出世间的戒、定、慧;也可以只按出世间的方式来理解。这位比丘通过正语、正业、正命而具足戒,通过正精进、正念、正定而具足定,通过正见、正思惟而具足慧。这样具足戒、定、慧的比丘,就在今生、就在这个身体中,证得了更高的果位,达到了阿拉汉果。舍利弗,我说这样的成就就是这个样子,这个道理也同样如此。这里展示的道理是:正如紧接道之后毫无间隔地生起果一样,这个人死后也毫无间隔地结生在地狱中。在整个佛陀的教法中,再没有哪一个譬喻比这个说得更深刻、更有力了。巴利
Idānissa atthasādhakaṃ upamaṃ dassento seyyathāpītiādimāha. Tattha sīlasampannotiādīsu lokiyalokuttarā sīlasamādhipaññā veditabbā. Lokuttaravaseneva vinivattetumpi vaṭṭati. Ayañhi sammāvācākammantājīvehi sīlasampanno, sammāvāyāmasatisamādhīhi samādhisampanno, sammādiṭṭhisaṅkappehi paññāsampanno, so evaṃ sīlādisampanno bhikkhu yathā diṭṭheva dhamme imasmiṃyeva attabhāve aññaṃ ārādheti arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, evaṃsampadamidaṃ, sāriputta, vadāmi imampi kāraṇaṃ evarūpameva . Yathā hi maggānantaraṃ avirajjhitvāva phalaṃ nibbattati, evameva imassāpi puggalassa cutianantaraṃ avirajjhitvāva niraye paṭisandhi hotīti dasseti. Sakalasmiñhi buddhavacane imāya upamāya gāḷhataraṃ katvā vuttaupamā nāma natthi.
150 “无畏”在这里是“怯懦”的反面。当人审察在四种情况中没有怯懦时,所生起的与喜悦相应的智,就叫这个名字。“你自称是正自觉者”,意思是:你这样自称——“我是正自觉者,一切法都已由我正觉”。“未正觉”,是指这些法没有被你正觉。“于此中”,是指在那些如此被指出的“未正觉”之法中。“以有因由之说”,是指有根据、有理由的言说,不像苏那卡达那样胡言乱语,这是不可估量的。“以此为相”,这里“相”既指人也指法。意思是:我见不到那样的人,他会来质难我;我也见不到那样的法,他举出它来说“这个法是你所未正觉的”,而来质难我。这就是这里的含义。“得安稳”:已达到安稳,其余二字是它的同义词。这一切都是就无畏智而说的。因为十力者审察:若见不到质难的人,或见不到作为质难理由的未正觉之法,或者自己本来是如实觉者而说“我是觉者”,这时便生起极强的喜悦。与那喜悦相应的智,就叫无畏。针对它而说“得安稳”等。如是于一切处应知此义。巴利
150.Vesārajjānīti ettha sārajjapaṭipakkho vesārajjaṃ, catūsu ṭhānesu sārajjābhāvaṃ paccavekkhantassa uppannasomanassamayañāṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sammāsambuddhassa te paṭijānatoti ahaṃ sammāsambuddho, sabbe dhammā mayā abhisambuddhāti evaṃ paṭijānato tava. Anabhisambuddhāti ime nāma dhammā tayā anabhisambuddhā. Tatra vatāti tesu vata anabhisambuddhāti evaṃ dassitadhammesu. Sahadhammenāti sahetunā sakāraṇena vacanena sunakkhatto viya vippalapanto appamāṇaṃ. Nimittametanti ettha puggalopi dhammopi nimittanti adhippeto. Taṃ puggalaṃ na passāmi, yo maṃ paṭicodessati, taṃ dhammaṃ na passāmi, yaṃ dassetvā ayaṃ nāma dhammo tayā anabhisambuddhoti maṃ paṭicodessatīti ayamettha attho. Khemappattoti khemaṃ patto, sesapadadvayaṃ imasseva vevacanaṃ. Sabbañhetaṃ vesārajjañāṇameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Dasabalassa hi ayaṃ nāma dhammo tayā anabhisambuddhoti codakaṃ puggalaṃ vā codanākāraṇaṃ anabhisambuddhadhammaṃ vā apassato sabhāvabuddhoyeva vā samāno ahaṃ buddhosmīti vadāmīti paccavekkhantassa balavataraṃ somanassaṃ uppajjati. Tena sampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ vesārajjaṃ nāma. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘khemappatto’’tiādimāha. Evaṃ sabbattha attho veditabbo.
“障碍法”在这里是指:能造成障碍的,就是障碍法。从含义上说,它们就是故意违犯的七类罪聚。因为即使是故意违犯的、哪怕最小的恶作或恶语,也会障碍道与果。不过在这里,特指淫欲法。因为无论谁行淫,必定会障碍道与果。“为了某人那些目的”是指为了贪的灭尽等目的。“所说的法”是指不净观等法。“对此”是指在那种不能导出的法上对我……其余部分应按照前面所说的方式来理解。巴利
Antarāyikā dhammāti ettha pana antarāyaṃ karontīti antarāyikā, te atthato sañcicca vītikkantā satta āpattikkhandhā. Sañcicca vītikkantañhi antamaso dukkaṭa-dubbhāsitampi maggaphalānaṃ antarāyaṃ karoti. Idha pana methunadhammo adhippeto. Methunaṃ sevato hi yassa kassaci nissaṃsayameva maggaphalānaṃ antarāyo hoti. Yassa kho pana tesu atthāyāti rāgakkhayādīsu yassa atthāya. Dhammo desitoti asubhabhāvanādidhammo kathito . Tatra vata manti tasmiṃ aniyyānikadhamme maṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
八众的注释巴利
Aṭṭhaparisavaṇṇanā
151 “舍利弗,确实有这八众”这句话,是为了什么而开始的呢?是为了显示无畏智的力量。就像一位善巧的说法者,走进有见识的大众中,能以让智者心生欢喜的说法,展现出自己精通说法;同样地,到了这八种大众之中,就能知道无畏智确实具有无畏的特质。因此,为了显示无畏智的力量,才说了“舍利弗,确实有这八众”等话。巴利
151. ‘‘Aṭṭha kho imā sāriputtā’’ti idaṃ kasmā āraddhaṃ? Vesārajjañāṇassa baladassanatthaṃ. Yathā hi byattaṃ parisaṃ ajjhogāhetvā viññūnaṃ cittaṃ ārādhanasamatthāya kathāya dhammakathikassa chekabhāvo paññāyati, evaṃ imā aṭṭha parisā patvā vesārajjañāṇassa vesārajjabhāvo sakkā ñātunti vesārajjañāṇassa balaṃ dassento, aṭṭha kho imā sāriputtātiādimāha.
这里,“刹帝利众”是指刹帝利们聚集而坐的地方,其他众也照这样理解。而“魔众”应当理解为魔界众生聚集而坐的地方,不是指诸魔本身。所有这些众,都是从威势可畏、令人震慑的角度来说的。因为人们连“国王坐在这里”这样平常的话都说不出口,腋下直冒汗,刹帝利众就是这样的威严可畏。婆罗门精通三部吠陀,居士们擅长各种称谓和文字推究,沙门们则对自宗和他宗的教义都很通达。在他们中间说法,实在是非常沉重的负担。非人也同样威势逼人。只要一提到“非人”,人的全身就会发抖;看到他们的形貌或听到他们的声音,众生就会吓得失去意识。非人众就是这样的威严可畏,在他们中间说法也实在是非常沉重的负担。因此应当知道,这些众都是从威势可畏、令人震慑的角度来说的。巴利
Tattha khattiyaparisāti khattiyānaṃ sannipatitvā nisinnaṭṭhānaṃ, esa nayo sabbattha. Mārakāyikānaṃ pana sannipatitvā nisinnaṭṭhānaṃ māraparisā veditabbā, na mārānaṃ. Sabbāpi cetā parisā uggaṭṭhānadassanavasena gahitā. Manussā hi ‘‘ettha rājā nisinno’’ti pakativacanampi vattuṃ na sakkonti, kacchehi sedā muccanti. Evaṃ uggā khattiyaparisā. Brāhmaṇā tīsu vedesu kusalā honti, gahapatayo nānāvohāresu ceva akkharacintāya ca. Samaṇā sakavādaparavādesu kusalā honti. Tesaṃ majjhe dhammakathākathanaṃ nāma ativiya bhāro. Amanussāpi uggā honti. Amanussoti hi vuttamattepi manussānaṃ sakalasarīraṃ saṅkampati, tesaṃ rūpaṃ vā disvā saddaṃ vā sutvā sattā visaññino honti. Evaṃ amanussaparisā uggā. Tāsupi dhammakathākathanaṃ nāma ativiya bhāro. Iti uggaṭṭhānadassanavasena tā gahitāti veditabbā.
“进入”就是走进去。“数百位刹帝利众”,就像频婆娑罗王的集会、亲属的集会、离车族的集会那样。在其他轮围世界里也同样有。那么,世尊也会去其他轮围世界吗?是的,会去。以什么样的形貌去呢?他们是什么样,他就是什么样。所以他说:“阿难,我确实记得曾亲近过数百位刹帝利众。在那里,他们是什么肤色,我就是什么肤色;他们是什么声音,我就是什么声音。我以符合法义的谈话让他们明白、接受、振奋、欢喜。我正在说话时,他们不知道‘现在说话的这位是谁?是天人还是人?’我以符合法义的谈话让他们明白、接受、振奋、欢喜之后,就消失了。我消失之后,他们也不知道‘刚才消失的这位是谁?是天人还是人?’”巴利
Ajjhogāhatīti anupavisati. Anekasataṃ khattiyaparisanti bimbisārasamāgama ñātisamāgama licchavīsamāgamasadisaṃ. Aññesupi cakkavāḷesu labbhatiyeva. Kiṃ pana bhagavā aññāni cakkavāḷānipi gacchatīti? Āma gacchati. Kīdiso hutvā? Yādisā te, tādisoyeva. Tenevāha ‘‘abhijānāmi kho panāhaṃ, ānanda, anekasataṃ khattiyaparisaṃ upasaṅkamitā, tattha yādisako tesaṃ vaṇṇo hoti, tādisako mayhaṃ vaṇṇo hoti. Yādisako tesaṃ saro hoti, tādisako mayhaṃ saro hoti. Dhammiyā kathāya sandassemi samādapemi samuttejemi sampahaṃsemi. Bhāsamānañca maṃ na jānanti ‘ko nu kho ayaṃ bhāsati devo vā manusso vā’ti. Dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṃsetvā antaradhāyāmi . Antarahitañca maṃ na jānanti ‘ko nu kho ayaṃ antarahito devo vā manusso vā’’’ti (dī. ni. 2.172).
刹帝利们佩戴着臂环、手镯、花环、香等饰物,穿着各种颜色的衣服,戴着摩尼珠耳环,头戴宝冠。难道世尊也这样装饰自己吗?他们当中也有白皮肤的、黑皮肤的、黄皮肤的。难道导师也长那样吗?导师其实是以出家人的身份前往的,但为了让他们看见,就化现成那样的形貌出现在他们面前,示现自己坐在国王的宝座上,他们心里就想:“今天我们的国王格外光彩照人。”他们当中也有声音破哑的、声音粗涩的、声音像乌鸦的。导师只用梵音说法。至于“我也有那样的声音”这句话,是就语言音声而言的。而人们听了之后,心里就想:“今天国王用甜美的声音在说话。”世尊说完法离开之后,人们又看到国王出现,心里就生起疑惑:“这到底是谁?”巴利
Khattiyā keyūraṅgadamālāgandhādivibhūsitā nānāvirāgavasanā āmukkamaṇikuṇḍalā moḷidharā honti. Kiṃ bhagavāpi evaṃ attānaṃ maṇḍeti? Te ca odātāpi honti kāḷāpi maṃgulacchavīpi. Kiṃ satthāpi evarūpo hotīti? Satthā attano pabbajitavaseneva gacchati, tesaṃ pana tādiso hutvā upaṭṭhāti, gantvā rājāsane nisinnaṃ attānaṃ dasseti, tesaṃ ‘‘ajja amhākaṃ rājā ativiya virocatī’’ti hoti. Te ca bhinnassarāpi honti gaggassarāpi kākassarāpi. Satthā brahmassareneva dhammaṃ katheti. Tādisako mayhaṃ saro hotīti idaṃ pana bhāsantaraṃ sandhāya kathitaṃ. Manussānaṃ pana taṃ sutvā ‘‘ajja rājā madhurena sarena kathetī’’ti hoti. Kathetvā pakkante ca bhagavati puna rājānaṃ āgataṃ disvā ‘‘ko nu kho aya’’nti vīmaṃsā uppajjati.
这里要表达的是:刚才在这个地方,用摩揭陀语和僧伽罗语,以甜美的声音说法之后就消失的那个人,到底是谁?是天人,还是人?那么,为什么要为这些不知道的人说法呢?是为了留下熏习。因为即使只是这样听闻过的法,在未来也会成为因缘,所以是为未来而说法。巴利
Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ko nu kho ayaṃ imasmiṃ ṭhāne idāneva māgadhabhāsāya sīhaḷabhāsāya madhurena sarena kathento antarahito, kiṃ devo, udāhu manussoti? Kimatthaṃ panevaṃ ajānantānaṃ dhammaṃ desetīti? Vāsanatthāya. Evaṃ sutopi hi dhammo anāgate paccayo hotiyevāti anāgataṃ paṭicca desetīti.
“曾共坐”是指曾经聚在一起坐过。“曾交谈”是指曾经有过对话交谈。“讨论”是指也曾进行过法义讨论。至于“数百婆罗门众”等说法,应当理解为:既可以是通过像索纳丹达那样的集会等方式出现,也可以是通过其他轮围世界的方式出现。巴利
Sannisinnapubbanti saṅgamma nisinnapubbaṃ. Sallapitapubbanti ālāpasallāpo katapubbo. Sākacchāti dhammasākacchāpi samāpajjitapubbā. Anekasataṃ brāhmaṇaparisantiādīnampi soṇadaṇḍasamāgamādivasena ceva aññacakkavāḷavasena ca sambhavo veditabbo.
152 舍利弗,在此处“四种生”这句经文里,“生”这个词既可以指蕴的组成部分,也可以指原因,还可以指尿道。比如在“四种龙生、四种金翅鸟生”中,“生”指的是蕴的组成部分。在“布米迦,这确实是证得果报的原因”中,“生”指的是原因。在“我不称由母胎尿道出生者为婆罗门”中,“生”指的是尿道。但在这里,指的是蕴的组成部分。
其中,在卵中出生的叫卵生。在胎胞中出生的叫胎生。在潮湿处出生的叫湿生。不依靠这些条件,像忽然化现一样产生的叫化生。“破体而出”是指破开而出的方式。说到“在腐烂的尸体等中”,只是举出令人不悦的地方作为例子。其实在令人喜欢的地方,比如熟酥、油、蜜、糖等里面,也有众生出生。在诸天中,从四大王天往上的上界诸天神,都只有化生。而地居天则四种生都有。人类当中,也有一些人像天人一样是化生。不过人类大多数是胎生,其中也有卵生的,比如贡达子和两位跋帝亚长老;也有湿生的,比如在莲花胎中出生的布羯罗萨提婆罗门、莲花天女等。同样,在恶趣中,比如被渴爱折磨的饿鬼、地狱众生等,都是化生,其余的则四种生都有。夜叉也一样,还有一切四足类、鸟类、长身类等,全都是四种生都有。巴利
152.Catassokho imā, sāriputta, yoniyoti ettha yonīti khandhakoṭṭhāsassapi kāraṇassapi passāvamaggassapi nāmaṃ. ‘‘Catasso nāgayoniyo catasso supaṇṇayoniyo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.342, 392) ettha hi khandhakoṭṭhāso yoni nāma. ‘‘Yoni hesā bhūmija phalassa adhigamāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.227) ettha kāraṇaṃ. ‘‘Na cāhaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ brūmi, yonijaṃ mattisambhava’’nti (ma. ni. 2.457; dha. pa. 396) ettha passāvamaggo. Idha pana khandhakoṭṭhāso yonīti adhippeto. Tattha aṇḍe jātā aṇḍajā. Jalābumhi jātā jalābujā. Saṃsede jātā saṃsedajā. Vinā etehi kāraṇehi uppatitvā viya nibbattā abhinibbattāti opapātikā. Abhinibbhijja jāyantīti bhinditvā nikkhamanavasena jāyanti. Pūtikuṇape vātiādīhi aniṭṭhaṭṭhānāneva dassitāni. Iṭṭhesupi sappitelamadhuphāṇitādīsu sattā jāyanti eva. Devātiādīsu cātumahārājikato paṭṭhāya uparidevā opapātikāva honti. Bhūmadevā pana catuyonikā. Ekacce ca manussāti manussesu keci devā viya opapātikā ca honti. Yebhuyyena panete jalābujāva, aṇḍajāpi ettha kontaputtā dvebhātiyattherā viya, saṃsedajāpi padumagabbhe nibbattapokkharasātibrāhmaṇapadumavatidevīādayo viya, evaṃ vinipātikesu nijjhāmataṇhikapetā nerayikā viya opapātikāyeva, avasesā catuyonikāpi honti. Yathā te evaṃ yakkhāpi sabbacatuppadapakkhijātidīghajātiādayopi sabbe catuyonikāyeva.
153 舍利弗,在这里,“有五趣”这句话中,因为众生是依照善业和恶业而前往的,所以叫“趣”。另外,“趣”有多种:去趣、生趣、意乐趣、非有趣、成就趣。其中,“我死后将前往那一趣”以及“天、乾闼婆和人类都不知道他的趣”,这里的“趣”叫去趣。“我不知道这些持戒比丘的趣或不趣”,这里的“趣”叫生趣。“梵天神,我这样了知你的趣,也了知你的光泽”,这里的“趣”叫意乐趣。“诸法的非有是趣,阿拉汉的趣是涅槃”,这里的“趣”叫非有趣。“只有两种趣,没有别的”,这里的“趣”叫成就趣。在这些当中,这里指的是去趣。巴利
153.Pañca kho imā, sāriputta, gatiyoti ettha sukatadukkaṭakammavasena gantabbāti gatiyo. Apica gatigati nibbattigati ajjhāsayagati vibhavagati nipphattigatīti bahuvidhā gati nāma. Tattha ‘‘taṃ gatiṃ pecca gacchāmī’’ti (a. ni. 4.184) ca, ‘‘yassa gatiṃ na jānanti, devā gandhabbamānusā’’ti (dha. pa. 420) ca ayaṃ gatigati nāma. ‘‘Imesaṃ kho ahaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ sīlavantānaṃ neva jānāmi gatiṃ vā agatiṃ vā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.508) ayaṃ nibbattigati nāma. ‘‘Evampi kho te ahaṃ brahme gatiṃ ca pajānāmi jutiñca pajānāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.503) ayaṃ ajjhāsayagati nāma. ‘‘Vibhavo gati dhammānaṃ, nibbānaṃ arahato gatī’’ti (pari. 339) ayaṃ vibhavagati nāma. ‘‘Dveyeva gatiyo bhavanti anaññā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.258; 2.34) ayaṃ nipphattigati nāma. Tāsu idha gatigati adhippetā.
在“地狱”等词中,因为毫无快乐、毫无滋味,所以叫地狱。横着走,所以叫畜生。它们的出生处,就是畜生道。死后投生到的那片领域,就是饿鬼界。因为心意特别发达,所以叫人。他们凭五种欲乐和各自的神通威力而享乐游戏,所以叫天人。在“舍利弗,我了知地狱”等语句里,“地狱”是指连同所处空间在内的蕴相续。在“了知畜生道”等地方,也是同样的理解方式。“道”和“行道”,这两者都只是指能导向上述投生处的业。“以及依照什么道而行”这一句,是把依什么道、以什么行持而行这两层意思合在一起说。在“恶趣”等词中,因为离开了称为增长或安乐的吉祥,所以叫恶趣。是苦的去向和归宿,所以叫恶道。作恶的人在这里堕落,所以叫堕处。“我了知涅槃”这一句,则是为了表明:我不只是了知投生之处,也了知超越投生之处的涅槃。这里说的“道”和“行道”,两者都只是指圣道本身。巴利
Nirayotiādīsu niratiatthena nirassādaṭṭhena nirayo. Tiriyaṃ añchitāti tiracchānā. Tesaṃ yoni tiracchānayoni. Peccabhāvaṃ pattānaṃ visayoti pettivisayo. Manaso ussannattā manussā. Pañcahi kāmaguṇehi attano attano ānubhāvehi ca dibbantīti devā. Nirayañcāhaṃ, sāriputtātiādīsu nirayoti saddhiṃ okāsena khandhā. Tiracchānayoniṃ cātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Maggaṃ paṭipadanti ubhayenāpi vuttagatisaṃvattanika kammameva dasseti. Yathā ca paṭipannoti yena maggena yāya paṭipadāya paṭipannoti ubhayampi ekato katvā niddisati. Apāyantiādīsu vaḍḍhisaṅkhātā sukhasaṅkhātā vā ayā apetattā apāyo. Dukkhassa gati paṭisaraṇanti duggati. Dukkaṭakārino ettha vinipatantīti vinipāto. Nibbānañcāhanti idaṃ pana na kevalaṃ gatigatimeva, gatinissaraṇaṃ nibbānampi jānāmīti dassanatthamāha. Idha maggo paṭipadāti ubhayenāpi ariyamaggova vutto.
智生起方式的注释巴利
Ñāṇappavattākāravaṇṇanā
154 现在,为了说明在前面所说的七处和八处中,自己的智是如何生起的,他接着说:“在这里,舍利弗,我……”等等。巴利
154. Idāni yathāvuttesu sattasu ṭhānesu aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu attano ñāṇappavattākāraṃ dassento idhāhaṃ, sāriputtātiādimāha.
在这里,“一向苦”是指恒常的苦、不间断的苦。“剧烈”是指浓厚。“辛辣”是指粗恶、尖锐。“犹如”等话是为了显示譬喻而说的。其中,“kāsu”既可以指坑洞,也可以指堆。巴利
Tattha ekantadukkhāti niccadukkhā nirantaradukkhā. Tibbāti bahalā. Kaṭukāti kharā. Seyyathāpītiādīni opammadassanatthaṃ vuttāni. Tattha kāsūti āvāṭopi vuccati rāsipi.
“ 御者何急急,掘坑欲何为?
我今问汝,善友当实告:掘此坑欲何用?”巴利
‘‘Kinnu santaramānova, kāsuṃ khaṇasi sārathi; Puṭṭho me samma akkhāhi, kiṃ kāsuyā karissasī’’ti. (jā. 2.22.3) –
在这里,坑就是坑。巴利
Ettha hi āvāṭo kāsu nāma.
“ 另一些人掉进炭火坑,哭喊着,身体被烧得焦烂。”巴利
‘‘Aṅgārakāsuṃ apare phunanti, narā rudantā paridaḍḍhagattā’’ti. (jā. 2.22.462) –
这里说的是“堆”,但此处指的是坑,所以他说“超过人高”。其中,“超过人高”是指它的深度超过一个人的身量,也就是超过五肘。“无焰、无烟”这句话是为了说明热恼的强烈:如果有火焰,或者有烟,就会起风,热恼就不会那么猛烈。“被炎热所逼”是指被暑热所缠。“渴”是指生起了渴求。“求水”是指想喝水。“以唯一的道路”是指只有一条路,两边是密集的荆棘林,不可绕开。“导向”:对炭坑本来没有什么希求,但因为要针对炭坑而安立行仪,所以这样说。巴利
Ettha rāsi. Idha pana āvāṭo adhippeto. Tenevāha ‘‘sādhikaporisā’’ti. Tattha sādhikaṃ porisaṃ pamāṇaṃ assāti sādhikaporisā, atirekapañcaratanāti attho. Vītaccikānaṃ vītadhūmānanti etaṃ pariḷāhassa balavabhāvadīpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, acciyā vā sati dhūme vā sati, vāto samuṭṭhāti, tena pariḷāho na balavā hoti. Ghammaparetoti ghammānugato . Tasitoti jātataṇho. Pipāsitoti udakaṃ pātukāmo. Ekāyanena maggenāti ekapatheneva maggena, anukkamaniyena ubhosu passesu nirantarakaṇṭakarukkhagahanena. Paṇidhāyāti aṅgārakāsuyaṃ patthanā nāma natthi, aṅgārakāsuṃ ārabbha pana iriyāpathassa ṭhapitattā evaṃ vuttaṃ.
这里“同样地”是指这样的譬喻对应:应当把地狱看作火炭坑,把通往地狱的业看作通向火炭坑的道路,把造业的人看作已经走上那条路的人,把世尊看作具有天眼的人。就像那个有眼睛的人看见有人已经走上那条路,就知道“这个人沿着这条路走下去,就会掉进火炭坑”;同样,世尊对于正在造作杀生等任何业的人,也这样知道“这个人造了这种业之后,将会投生到地狱”。又像那个人后来看见有人掉进了火炭坑;同样,世尊后来为了观察“那个人造了那种业之后,投生到哪里去了”,便放大光明,用天眼观察,看见他已经投生在地狱里,正遭受五种束缚等大苦。在这里,虽然他造业的时候是一种色相,投生地狱之后是另一种色相,但当世尊观察“那个众生造了那种业之后,投生到哪里去了”时,即使那个众生处在成千上万的众生中间,也会在他面前显现出来,认出“就是这一个”。他们说,这就是所谓天眼的力量。巴利
Evameva khoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – aṅgārakāsu viya hi nirayo daṭṭhabbo. Aṅgārakāsumaggo viya nirayūpagaṃ kammaṃ. Maggāruḷho viya kammasamaṅgī puggalo. Cakkhumā puriso viya dibbacakkhuko bhagavā. Yathā so puriso maggāruḷhaṃ disvā vijānāti ‘‘ayaṃ iminā maggena gantvā aṅgārakāsuyaṃ patissatī’’ti, evamevaṃ bhagavā pāṇātipātādīsu yaṃkiñci kammaṃ āyūhantaṃ evaṃ jānāti ‘‘ayaṃ imaṃ kammaṃ katvā niraye nibbattissattī’’ti. Yathā so puriso aparabhāge taṃ aṅgārakāsuyā patitaṃ passati, evameva bhagavā aparabhāge ‘‘so puriso taṃ kammaṃ katvā kuhiṃ nibbatto’’ti ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dibbacakkhunā olokento niraye nibbattaṃ passati pañcavidhabandhanādimahādukkhaṃ anubhavantaṃ. Tattha kiñcāpi tassa kammāyūhanakāle añño vaṇṇo, niraye nibbattassa añño. Athāpi ‘‘so satto taṃ kammaṃ katvā kattha nibbatto’’ti olokentassa anekasahassānaṃ sattānaṃ majjhe ṭhitopi ‘‘ayaṃ so’’ti soyeva satto āpāthaṃ āgacchati, ‘‘dibbacakkhubalaṃ nāma eta’’nti vadanti.
在第二个譬喻里,因为粪坑不像炭坑那样有灼烧之苦,所以没有说“纯粹是苦”,而说了“苦”等等。这里也应当按前面的方式理解譬喻的对应关系。因为世尊确实看到这个人无论投生在象胎等哪一处,都在遭受杀害、捆绑、拖拽、拉扯等大苦。巴利
Dutiyaupamāyaṃ yasmā aṅgārakāsuyaṃ viya gūthakūpe pariḷāho natthi, tasmā ‘‘ekantadukkhā’’ti avatvā ‘‘dukkhā’’tiādimāha. Etthāpi purimanayeneva opammasaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ . Imampi hi puggalaṃ bhagavā hatthiyoniādīsu yattha katthaci nibbattaṃ vadhabandhanaākaḍḍhanavikaḍḍhanādīhi mahādukkhaṃ anubhavamānaṃ passatiyeva.
在第三个譬喻里,“叶薄”不是像云层那样薄,而是说它的叶子稀疏。所谓“斑驳之荫”,就是稀疏的树荫。“多苦”:在饿鬼界里,苦确实占绝大多数,乐极少,只是偶尔才能感受到一点,所以才这样说。这里也应当按前面的方式理解譬喻的对应关系。巴利
Tatiyaupamāyaṃ tanupattapalāsoti na abbhapaṭalaṃ viya tanupaṇṇo, viraḷapaṇṇattaṃ panassa sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ. Kabaracchāyoti viraḷacchāyo. Dukkhabahulāti pettivisayasmiñhi dukkhameva bahulaṃ, sukhaṃ parittaṃ kadāci anubhavitabbaṃ hoti, tasmā evamāha. Etthāpi purimanayeneva opammasaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在第四个譬喻里,“叶子厚密”是说树叶长得密密麻麻,完全没有空隙,整棵树都被叶子遮住了。“树荫清凉”是说树荫浓密得像石头做的伞一样。“多乐之受”是说在人间,比如刹帝利家族等地方,会体验到很多快乐的受。这是在显示:我看见他或躺或坐,正在体验那些受。在这里,譬喻和所喻的对应关系,也应该按照前面那样的方式来理解。巴利
Catutthaupamāyaṃ bahalapattapalāsoti nirantarapaṇṇo pattasañchanno. Santacchāyoti pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya ghanacchāyo. Sukhabahulā vedanāti manussaloke khattiyakulādīsu sukhabahulā vedanā vedayitabbā hoti, tā vedayamānaṃ nipannaṃ vā nisinnaṃ vā passāmīti dasseti. Idhāpi opammasaṃsandanaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
在第五个譬喻中,“殿堂”是指长殿堂。“内外粉刷”是指里面粉刷过、外面也粉刷过。“门闩紧闭”是指门户连同门扇一起紧紧关闭。“关闭窗扉”是指门扇与门框紧密闭锁的门。“铺有长毛毯”按含义是指毛长超过四指的黑羊毛毯。“铺有白羊毛毯”按含义是指羊毛做的白色铺毯。“铺有绣花毛毯”按含义是指厚实带花纹的羊毛铺毯。“铺有迦达利鹿皮殊胜垫褥”按含义是指用迦达利鹿皮制成的上等垫褥。据说那垫褥是先把迦达利鹿皮铺在白布上,再缝制而成的。“两头有红色枕”是指头枕与脚枕,即放置在结跏趺座两头的红色枕。“有上盖”的意思是与上方系缚的红色华盖一起,也就是连同系在上方的红色华盖。此处譬喻的对应亦依前理当知。巴利
Pañcamaupamāyaṃ pāsādoti dīghapāsādo. Ullittāvalittanti anto ceva ullittaṃ bahi ca avalittaṃ. Phusitaggaḷanti dvārabāhāhi saddhiṃ supihitakavāṭaṃ. Gonakatthatoti caturaṅgulādhikalomena kāḷakojavena atthato. Paṭikatthatoti uṇṇāmayena setaattharaṇena atthato. Paṭalikatthatoti ghanapupphakena uṇṇāmayaattharaṇena atthato. Kadalimigapavarapaccattharaṇoti kadalimigacammamayena uttamapaccattharaṇena atthato. Taṃ kira paccattharaṇaṃ setavatthassa upari kadalimigacammaṃ attharitvā sibbetvā karonti. Sauttaracchadoti saha uttaracchadena, uttaribaddhena rattavitānena saddhinti attho. Ubhatolohitakūpadhānoti sīsūpadhānañca pādūpadhānañcāti pallaṅkassa ubhato ṭhapitalohitakūpadhāno. Idhāpi upamāsaṃsandanaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
这里则是后分的关联方式:就像那个男人,只要看到有人踏上了道路,就知道“这个人会沿着这条路走过去,登上殿堂,进入高楼,然后坐在坐床上或者躺下”;同样,世尊看到有人正在积累布施等善行功德时,就知道“这个人做了这些之后,会投生到天界”。又像那个男人后来看到那人登上殿堂、进入高楼,坐在或躺在坐床上,感受着纯粹、不间断的快乐;同样,世尊后来放大光明,用天眼观察“他做了那些善业之后,投生到哪里去了”,便看到他投生在天界,在欢喜园等处被天女众围绕,正享受着天界的福报。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha aparabhāgayojanā, yathā so puriso maggāruḷhameva jānāti ‘‘ayaṃ etena maggena gantvā pāsādaṃ āruyha kūṭāgāraṃ pavisitvā pallaṅke nisīdissati vā nipajjissati vā’’ti, evamevaṃ bhagavā dānādīsu puññakiriyavatthūsu yaṃkiñci kusalakammaṃ āyūhantaṃyeva puggalaṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ imaṃ katvā devaloke nibbattissatī’’ti jānāti. Yathā so puriso aparabhāge taṃ pāsādaṃ āruyha kūṭāgāraṃ pavisitvā pallaṅke nisinnaṃ vā nipannaṃ vā ekantasukhaṃ nirantarasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamānaṃ passati, evamevaṃ bhagavā aparabhāge ‘‘so taṃ kalyāṇaṃ katvā kuhiṃ nibbatto’’ti ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dibbacakkhunā olokento devaloke nibbattaṃ passati, nandanavanādīsu accharāsaṅghaparivutaṃ dibbasampattiṃ anubhavamānaṃ.
漏尽品注释巴利
Āsavakkhayavāravaṇṇanā
在“漏尽”这一部分,没有说“以天眼”,而是说“我看见他”。为什么这样说呢?因为并不是只能靠天眼。其实,对这个人,世尊用天眼也能看见他,用他心通也能了知他,用一切知智也一定能了知他。“纯一乐受”这句话,虽然在字面上和天界之乐是同一个说法,但在意义上并不相同。天界之乐因为还有贪欲等热恼存在,所以并不是纯粹唯一的乐。涅槃之乐则因为一切热恼都已止息,所以在一切方面都是纯粹唯一的乐。在比喻中也说“就像在高楼中,有纯一之乐”。但那种乐,因为旅途的热恼还没有平息,又有饥饿、口渴、内心燥热逼迫,所以并不是纯粹唯一的乐。而在森林中,下到池塘里,洗去尘垢,旅途的疲惫得以平息;又因为吃莲藕、喝甘甜的水,饥饿和口渴都消除了;然后换下浴衣,穿上柔软细布衣,把米袋放在头边,把浴衣拧干放在胸口,躺着感受微风轻轻扇拂——这样的乐,才在一切方面都是纯粹唯一的乐。巴利
Āsavakkhayavāre ‘‘dibbena cakkhunā’’ti avatvā ‘‘tamenaṃ passāmī’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṃ kasmāti ce? Niyamābhāvā. Imañhi puggalaṃ dibbacakkhunāpi passissati, cetopariyañāṇenāpi jānissati, sabbaññutaññāṇenapi jānissatiyeva. Ekantasukhā vedanāti idaṃ kiñcāpi devalokasukhena saddhiṃ byañjanato ekaṃ, atthato pana nānā hoti. Devalokasukhañhi rāgapariḷāhādīnaṃ atthitāya na ekanteneva sukhaṃ. Nibbānasukhaṃ pana sabbapariḷāhānaṃ vūpasamāya sabbākārena ekantasukhaṃ. Upamāyampi ‘‘yathā pāsāde ekantasukhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṃ maggapariḷāhassa avūpasantatāya chātajjhattatāya pipāsābhibhūtatāya ca na ekantameva sukhaṃ. Vanasaṇḍe pana pokkharaṇiyaṃ oruyha rajojallassa pavāhitattā maggadarathassa vūpasantatāya bhisamūlakhādanena ceva madhurodakapānena ca khuppipāsānaṃ vinītatāya udakasāṭakaṃ parivattetvā maṭṭhadukūlaṃ nivāsetvā taṇḍulatthavikaṃ ussīsake katvā udakasāṭakaṃ pīḷetvā hadaye ṭhapetvā mandamandena ca vātena bījayamānassa nipannattā sabbākārena ekantasukhaṃ hoti.
同样地,这里“亦复如是”的比喻对应是这样的:应当把圣道看作莲池,把前行道看作通往莲池的路,把具备前行道的人看作已经上路的人,把具天眼的世尊看作那位有眼睛的人,把涅槃看作森林丛。
就像那个人一看到有人上了路就知道:“这个人沿着这条路走过去,在莲池里沐浴之后,会在那片宜人的森林丛中,坐在树下或者躺在树下。”同样,世尊对于正在圆满前行道的人、正在界定名色的人、正在把握缘的人、正在以诸相为所缘而修观的人,当下就知道:“这个人圆满这条前行道之后,将灭尽一切漏,证入并安住在被称为‘无漏的心解脱、慧解脱’的果定中。”
又像那个人后来看到他在莲池里沐浴后,进入森林丛中,或坐或卧,正在体验纯一之乐;同样,世尊后来看到那个人圆满前行道、修习圣道、证悟圣果之后,进入最殊胜的寂灭之床,现起以涅槃为所缘的果定,正在体验纯一之乐。巴利
Evameva khoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – pokkharaṇī viya hi ariyamaggo daṭṭhabbo. Pokkharaṇimaggo viya pubbabhāgapaṭipadā. Maggāruḷho viya paṭipadāsamaṅgīpuggalo. Cakkhumā puriso viya dibbacakkhu bhagavā. Vanasaṇḍo viya nibbānaṃ. Yathā so puriso maggāruḷhaṃ disvāva jānāti ‘‘ayaṃ iminā maggena gantvā pokkharaṇiyaṃ nhatvā ramaṇīye vanasaṇḍe rukkhamūle nisīdissati vā nipajjissati vā’’ti, evamevaṃ bhagavā paṭipadaṃ pūrentameva nāmarūpaṃ paricchindantameva paccayapariggahaṃ karontameva lakkhaṇārammaṇāya vipassanāya kammaṃ karontameva jānāti ‘‘ayaṃ imaṃ paṭipadaṃ pūretvā sabbaāsave khepetvā anāsavaṃ cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttinti evaṃ vuttaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ upasampajja viharissatī’’ti. Yathā so puriso aparabhāge tāyaṃ pokkharaṇiyaṃ nhatvā vanasaṇḍaṃ pavisitvā nisinnaṃ vā nipannaṃ vā ekantasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamānaṃ passati, evameva bhagavā aparabhāge taṃ puggalaṃ paṭipadaṃ pūretvā maggaṃ bhāvetvā phalaṃ sacchikatvā nirodhasayanavaragataṃ nibbānārammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā ekantasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamānaṃ passati.
《难行苦行等清净之解说》巴利
Dukkarakārikādisuddhivaṇṇanā
155 “舍利弗,我确实记得自己曾具备四支。”这段话是为什么而说的呢?是依各别的因缘而说的。据说,这位苏那卡达持有这样的见解:“通过苦行就能得到清净。”于是,世尊便开始了这段开示,为的是说明:“我在某一世中,曾修习具备四支的苦行;在苦行者当中,没有像我这样的人。如果靠苦行就能清净,那只有我才应该是清净的。”另外,这位苏那卡达对苦行很信服。关于他的这种信服,应当按《波梨经》中所说的方式来理解——“婆伽!离车族之子苏那卡达见到裸形外道库罗迦提亚四肢着地,吃散落在地上的食物,用嘴吃,用嘴进食。见到之后,他心想:‘好啊,这位沙门真是庄严!四肢着地,只用嘴吃、只用嘴进食散落在地上的食物。’”等等。巴利
155. ‘‘Abhijānāmi kho panāhaṃ, sāriputta, caturaṅgasamannāgata’’nti idaṃ kasmā āraddhaṃ? Pāṭiyekkaṃ anusandhivasena āraddhaṃ. Ayaṃ kira sunakkhatto dukkarakārikāya suddhi hotīti evaṃ laddhiko. Athassa bhagavā mayā ekasmiṃ attabhāve ṭhatvā caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ dukkaraṃ kataṃ, dukkarakārako nāma mayā sadiso natthi. Dukkarakārena suddhiyā sati ahameva suddho bhaveyyanti dassetuṃ imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Apica ayaṃ sunakkhatto dukkarakārikāya pasanno, so cassa pasannabhāvo, ‘‘addasā kho, bhaggava, sunakkhatto licchaviputto acelaṃ korakkhattiyaṃ catukkuṇḍikaṃ chamānikiṇṇaṃ bhakkhasaṃ mukhena khādantaṃ mukhena bhuñjantaṃ. Disvānassa etadahosi ‘sādhu rūpo vata, bho, ayaṃ samaṇo catukkuṇḍiko chamānikiṇṇaṃ bhakkhasaṃ mukheneva khādati, mukheneva bhuñjatī’’’ti evamādinā pāthikasutte (dī. ni. 3.7) āgatanayena veditabbo.
这时,世尊为了说明:“这个人对苦行很信服,而我安住于此生中,也修过具足四支的苦行。即使是对苦行者生信的他,也应当对我生信,但他对我并没有这份信心。”于是开始了这段开示。巴利
Atha bhagavā ayaṃ dukkarakārikāya pasanno, mayā ca etasmiṃ attabhāve ṭhatvā caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ dukkaraṃ kataṃ, dukkarakāre pasīdantenāpi anena mayi pasīditabbaṃ siyā, sopissa pasādo mayi natthīti dassento imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi.
在这里,“梵行”也指布施、服务、持戒、四梵住、说法、远离淫欲、满足于自己的妻子、伍波萨他、圣道、整个教法、发心以及精进。巴利
Tatra brahmacariyanti dānampi veyyāvaccampi sikkhāpadampi brahmavihārāpi dhammadesanāpi methunaviratipi sadārasantosopi uposathopi ariyamaggopi sakalasāsanampi ajjhāsayopi vīriyampi vuccati.
“ 你的誓愿是什么?又修的是什么梵行?
这是哪一种善行带来的果报?
神通、光明、力量、精进与成就,
龙啊,这广大的天宫也属于你。
我和妻子在人间时,
我们俩凭着信心,做了施主。
那时我的家就像一处公共饮水处,
沙门和婆罗门都得到了满足。
这就是我的誓愿,这就是我的梵行,
这就是那善行所带来的果报;
神通、光辉、力量与精进的成就,
智者啊,这是我的大天宫。”巴利
‘‘Kiṃ te vataṃ kiṃ pana brahmacariyaṃ, Kissa suciṇṇassa ayaṃ vipāko; Iddhī jutī balavīriyūpapatti, Idañca te nāga mahāvimānaṃ. Ahañca bhariyā ca manussaloke, Saddhā ubho dānapatī ahumhā; Opānabhūtaṃ me gharaṃ tadāsi, Santappitā samaṇabrāhmaṇā ca. Taṃ me vataṃ taṃ pana brahmacariyaṃ, Tassa suciṇṇassa ayaṃ vipāko; Iddhī jutī balavīriyūpapatti, Idañca me dhīra mahāvimāna’’nti. (jā. 2.22.1592, 1593, 1595) –
在这部《布纳咖本生》里,布施被称为梵行。巴利
Imasmiñhi puṇṇakajātake dānaṃ brahmacariyanti vuttaṃ.
“ 靠什么,手能满人所愿?靠什么,手能流出甘蜜?
你靠什么样的梵行,让福德在手中得以成就?
以那只手施予所欲,以那只手流出甘甜。
凭这个梵行,我的福德就在手中成就。”巴利
‘‘Kena pāṇi kāmadado, kena pāṇi madhussavo; Kena te brahmacariyena, puññaṃ pāṇimhi ijjhati. Tena pāṇi kāmadado, tena pāṇi madhussavo; Tena me brahmacariyena, puññaṃ pāṇimhi ijjhatī’’ti. (pe. va. 275) –
在《嫩芽饿鬼事》里,说的是“服务”就是梵行。在《鹧鸪本生》里——“诸比丘,过去确实有这样的梵行,名叫鹧鸪梵行”——这里说的是五学处就是梵行。在《大典尊经》里——“五髻,我所修的这梵行,不是为了厌离,不是为了离贪,不是为了灭尽,只是为了往生梵天世界”——这里说的是四梵住就是梵行。在“在一梵行中,有千人征服了死亡”这句里,说的是说法就是梵行。在《削减经》里——“别人将是非梵行者,我们在这里要成为梵行者”——这里说的是远离淫欲就是梵行。巴利
Imasmiṃ aṅkurapetavatthusmiṃ veyyāvaccaṃ brahmacariyanti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ kho taṃ, bhikkhave, tittiriyaṃ nāma brahmacariyaṃ ahosī’’ti (cūḷava. 311) imasmiṃ tittirajātake pañcasikkhāpadaṃ brahmacariyanti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Taṃ kho pana me pañcasikha brahmacariyaṃ neva nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya, yāvadeva brahmalokūpapattiyā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.329) imasmiṃ mahāgovindasutte brahmavihārā brahmacariyanti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ekasmiṃ brahmacariyasmiṃ, sahassaṃ maccuhāyina’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.184) ettha dhammadesanā brahmacariyanti vuttā. ‘‘Pare abrahmacārī bhavissanti, mayamettha brahmacārī bhavissāmā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.83) sallekhasutte methunavirati brahmacariyanti vuttā.
“ 我等不负妻室,
妻室亦不负我等。
除了那些女人之外,我们修梵行,
所以,我们年轻人确实不会死。”巴利
‘‘Mayañca bhariyā nātikkamāma, Amhe ca bhariyā nātikkamanti; Aññatra tāhi brahmacariyaṃ carāma, Tasmā hi amhaṃ daharā na mīyare’’ti. (jā. 1.10.97) –
在《大护法本生》中,满足于自己的妻子被称为梵行。巴利
Mahādhammapālajātake sadārasantoso brahmacariyanti vutto.
“ 劣梵行者,投生刹帝利;中梵行者,得生天界;
殊胜梵行者,则证清净。”巴利
‘‘Hīnena brahmacariyena, khattiye upapajjati; Majjhimena ca devattaṃ, uttamena visujjhatī’’ti. (jā. 1.8.75) –
在《尼米本生》里,以调伏自己为基础而持守的八支伍波萨他,被称为梵行。而在《大典尊经》中又说:“五髻,我这个梵行彻底导向厌离、离贪……乃至……这正是圣八支道”,这是把圣道称为梵行。在《清净经》中说:“这个梵行成就、兴旺、广传、众人共修、普遍流布,乃至被天与人善为宣说”,这是把含摄三学的教法称为梵行。巴利
Evaṃ nimijātake attadamanavasena kato aṭṭhaṅgiko uposatho brahmacariyanti vutto. ‘‘Idaṃ kho pana me, pañcasikha, brahmacariyaṃ ekantanibbidāya virāgāya…pe… ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.329) mahāgovindasuttasmiññeva ariyamaggo brahmacariyanti vutto. ‘‘Tayidaṃ brahmacariyaṃ iddhañceva phītañca vitthārikaṃ bāhujaññaṃ puthubhūtaṃ yāva devamanussehi suppakāsita’’nti (dī. ni. 3.174) pāsādikasutte sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sāsanaṃ brahmacariyanti vuttaṃ.
“ 不急不躁的人,想要的果实照样能结成。
我已经修完清净的梵行,村长,你要这样知道。”巴利
‘‘Api ataramānānaṃ, phalāsāva samijjhati; Vipakkabrahmacariyosmi, evaṃ jānāhi gāmaṇī’’ti. (jā. 1.1.8) –
在这里,“意向”被称为梵行;但在这个地方,所指的梵行是“精进”。因为这部经讲的正是精进梵行。由于在同一个生命体当中完成了四种难行,所以它被称为具备四支。巴利
Ettha ajjhāsayo brahmacariyanti vutto. Idha pana vīriyaṃ brahmacariyanti adhippetaṃ. Vīriyabrahmacariyassa hi idameva suttaṃ. Tadetaṃ ekasmiṃ attabhāve catubbidhassa dukkarassa katattā caturaṅgasamannāgatanti vuttaṃ.
“我是苦行者”里的“确实”只是个语气词,意思是“我是依靠苦行的人”。“最上苦行者”就是最高的苦行者,在依靠苦行的人当中最殊胜。“我是粗陋者”就是“我是粗陋的”。“厌恶者”是指厌恶罪恶的人。“我是远离者”就是“我是远离的”。接着“舍利弗,在那里,我这是如此”,这是在说明:在那四支梵行当中,这就是我的苦行状态;也就是说,在我依靠苦行的身份里,这属于我像裸形外道等那样的苦行表现。巴利
Tapassī sudaṃ homīti sudanti nipātamattaṃ, tapanissitako homīti attho. Paramatapassīti paramo tapassī, tapanissitakānaṃ uttamo. Lūkho sudaṃ homīti lūkho homi. Jegucchīti pāpajegucchiko. Pavivitto sudaṃ homīti pavivitto ahaṃ homi. Tatrāssu me idaṃ, sāriputtāti tatra caturaṅge brahmacariye idaṃ mama tapassitāya hoti, tapanissitakabhāve mayhaṃ idaṃ acelakāditapassitakattaṃ hotīti dasseti.
在这其中,“裸形者”就是不着衣、赤身裸体的人。“散乱行者”就是行为放逸的人,在大小便等事情上,不按世间良家子弟的方式来做,而是站着大小便,站着吃东西、嚼东西。“用手擦拭者”是说:食物还在手上时,我就用舌头舔手;或者大便之后,把手当作木条想,然后直接用手擦——他这样显示。据说,外道认为木条是有情,所以为了圆满他们的修行方式,就这样做。为了拿食物,别人说“来吧,尊者”,他却不去,所以叫“不应唤者”。即使被说“请站住,尊者”,他也不站住,所以叫“不应留者”。外道认为,这两者若是对他这样说,就会成为他的把柄,因此他们不做。他显示:我也曾这样做。“已持来”是指他人事先拿好并持送来的食物;“为特定人准备”是指已明说“这是特别为你们准备的”食物;“非邀请”是指即使有“请您进入某家、某街、某村”这样的邀请,我亦不接受、不取用这类主动邀请的食物。巴利
Tattha acelakoti niccelo naggo. Muttācāroti visaṭṭhācāro, uccārakammādīsu lokiyakulaputtācārena virahito, ṭhitakova uccāraṃ karomi, passāvaṃ karomi, khādāmi bhuñjāmi ca. Hatthāpalekhanoti hatthe piṇḍamhi ṭhite jivhāya hatthaṃ apalikhāmi, uccāraṃ vā katvā hatthasmiññeva daṇḍakasaññī hutvā hatthena apalikhāmīti dasseti. Te kira daṇḍakaṃ sattoti paññapenti, tasmā tesaṃ paṭipadaṃ pūrento evamakāsi. Bhikkhāgahaṇatthaṃ ehi bhaddanteti vutto na etīti na ehibhaddantiko. Tena hi tiṭṭha bhaddanteti vuttopi na tiṭṭhatīti na tiṭṭhabhaddantiko. Tadubhayampi titthiyā evaṃ etassa vacanaṃ kataṃ bhavissatīti na karonti. Ahampi evaṃ akāsinti dasseti. Abhihaṭanti puretaraṃ gahetvā āhaṭaṃ bhikkhaṃ. Uddissakatanti idaṃ tumhe uddissa katanti evaṃ ārocitabhikkhaṃ. Na nimantananti asukaṃ nāma kulaṃ vā vīthiṃ vā gāmaṃ vā paviseyyāthāti evaṃ nimantitabhikkhampi na sādiyāmi na gaṇhāmi.
不从锅口取食:别人从锅里舀出来递给我的食物,我不接受。不从罐口取食:“罐”指小锅或篮子。从这些器皿里直接取出来给我的食物,我也不接受。为什么?因为如果我接受,锅和罐就会为了我而挨勺子敲打。不从门槛中间取食:别人把门槛当作隔断递来的食物,我不接受。为什么?因为这样一来,那人就会为了我而站在门槛中间挡路。用杖和杵递食也是同样的道理。不从两人中间取食:两个人正在吃饭时,其中一个起身递来的食物,我不接受。为什么?因为这会妨碍施食者吞咽食物。对于孕妇等情形:孕妇腹中的胎儿会受苦,哺乳妇会给婴儿的吃奶造成障碍,与男子同处的妇人会妨碍性交,所以我不接受。不从集中食(取食):指募集食材后特别烹制的食物。据说在饥荒时期,裸行外道的弟子们为了裸行外道,从各处募集米等物,然后煮成食物。最上等的裸行外道也不从那里接受。巴利
Na kumbhimukhāti kumbhito uddharitvā diyyamānaṃ bhikkhaṃ na gaṇhāmi. Na kaḷopimukhāti kaḷopīti ukkhali vā pacchi vā. Tatopi na gaṇhāmi. Kasmā? Kumbhikaḷopiyo maṃ nissāya kaṭacchunā pahāraṃ labhantīti. Na eḷakamantaranti ummāraṃ antaraṃ katvā diyyamānaṃ na gaṇhāmi. Kasmā? Ayaṃ maṃ nissāya antarakaraṇaṃ labhatīti. Daṇḍamusalesupi eseva nayo. Na dvinnanti dvīsu bhuñjamānesu ekasmiṃ uṭṭhāya dente na gaṇhāmi. Kasmā? Kabaḷantarāyo hotīti. Na gabbhiniyātiādīsu pana gabbhiniyā kucchiyaṃ dārako kilamati, pāyantiyā dārakassa khīrantarāyo hoti, purisantaragatāya ratiantarāyo hotīti na gaṇhāmi. Na saṃkittīsūti saṃkittetvā katabhattesu. Dubbhikkhasamaye kira acelakasāvakā acelakānaṃ atthāya tato tato taṇḍulādīni samādapetvā bhattaṃ pacanti. Ukkaṭṭhācelako tatopi na paṭiggaṇhāti.
狗正守在那里、心里想着“我会有食物团吃”的地方,我不接受别人不给它而拿来的食物。为什么?因为这会妨碍它得到那团食物。所谓“成群游飞”,就是成群结队地飞。假如有人看见裸形修行者,心想“我们要把食物布施给这位”,就走进施食的人家。他们进去时,藏在锅口等处的苍蝇就飞起来,成群结队地乱飞。从那里拿来的食物,我不接受。为什么?因为由于我的缘故,苍蝇觅食的地方受到了妨碍,我自己也曾那样做过。所谓“不是米泔水”,是指用各种谷物配料做成的酸粥。在这里,只有饮酒才是有过失的,但这个人却把一切都看成有过失的。巴利
Na yattha sāti yattha sunakho piṇḍaṃ labhissāmīti upaṭṭhito hoti, tattha tassa adatvā āhaṭaṃ na gaṇhāmi. Kasmā? Etassa piṇḍantarāyo hotīti. Saṇḍasaṇḍacārinīti samūhasamūhacārinī, sace hi acelakaṃ disvā imassa bhikkhaṃ dassāmāti mānusakā bhattagehaṃ pavisanti. Tesu ca pavisantesu kaḷopimukhādīsu nilīnā makkhikā uppatitvā saṇḍasaṇḍā caranti. Tato āhaṭaṃ bhikkhaṃ na gaṇhāmi. Kasmā? Maṃ nissāya makkhikānaṃ gocarantarāyo jātoti, ahampi tathā akāsiṃ. Na thusodakanti sabbasassasambhārehi kataṃ loṇasovīrakaṃ. Ettha ca surāpānameva sāvajjaṃ, ayaṃ pana sabbesupi sāvajjasaññī.
“一家食者”,就是只在一户人家拿到食物就回来的人。“一口食者”,就是只靠一口食物维持生活的人。“二家食者”等等也照这样理解。“即使从一施物”,就是从一份施物得到食物。所谓“施物”,是一只小碗,人们把最先得到的食物放进去摆着。“一日一食”,就是隔一天吃一次。“半月一食”,就是隔半个月吃一次。“轮次食”,就是按轮次进食。按一天一轮、两天一轮、七天一轮、半个月一轮,像这样按天数轮着带来的饭食。巴利
Ekāgārikoti yo ekasmiññeva gehe bhikkhaṃ labhitvā nivattati. Ekālopikoti yo ekeneva ālopena yāpeti. Dvāgārikādīsupi eseva nayo. Ekissāpi dattiyāti ekāya dattiyā. Datti nāma ekā khuddakapāti hoti, yattha aggabhikkhaṃ pakkhipitvā ṭhapenti. Ekāhikanti ekadivasantarikaṃ. Addhamāsikanti addhamāsantarikaṃ. Pariyāyabhattabhojananti vārabhattabhojanaṃ. Ekāhavārena dvīhavārena sattāhavārena aḍḍhamāsavārenāti evaṃ divasavārena ābhataṃ bhattabhojanaṃ.
吃生菜的人,就是吃新鲜生菜的人。吃稗子的人,就是吃稗米的人。在野谷等当中,野谷指的是在森林里自然生长的稻类。渣滓,就是皮匠刮过皮之后扔掉的碎皮屑。胶质,说的是黏液、水藻,还有翅子树等树木的树脂。糠,就是米糠。焦饭残渣,就是粘在饭锅上的焦饭,从丢弃的地方捡来吃。也有人管它叫饭汁。油饼等是显而易见的。吃自然落下的果实的人,就是吃掉落下来的果实的人。巴利
Sākabhakkhoti allasākabhakkho. Sāmākabhakkhoti sāmākataṇḍulabhakkho. Nīvārādīsu nīvārā nāma tāva araññe sayaṃjātavīhijāti. Daddulanti cammakārehi cammaṃ likhitvā chaḍḍitakasaṭaṃ. Haṭaṃ vuccati silesopi sevālopi kaṇikārādirukkhaniyyāsopi. Kaṇanti kuṇḍakaṃ . Ācāmoti bhattaukkhalikāya laggo jhāmaodano, taṃ chaḍḍitaṭṭhāne gahetvā khādati. ‘‘Odanakañjiya’’ntipi vadanti. Piññākādayo pākaṭā eva. Pavattaphalabhojīti patitaphalabhojī.
麻布衣,就是用麻纤维织成的布做的衣服。杂布衣,就是用混合材料织成的布做的衣服。尸衣,就是从死人身上丢弃的衣服。或者把吉祥草等草编起来做成的下衣。粪扫衣,就是丢在地上的破布片。树皮衣,就是用树皮做的衣服。兽皮,就是黑鹿的皮。裂兽皮,就是把那张皮从中间剖开。也有人叫它“有蹄兽皮”。茅草衣,就是把吉祥草编起来做成的衣。树皮衣、叶衣也是同样的道理。人发毯,就是用人发做成的毯子。关于这个,经里说:“比丘们,无论什么样的布,若是由线织成的,人发毯被认为是最可厌的。比丘们,人发毯在冷时冷,在热时热,颜色难看,气味难闻,触感难受。”兽毛毯,就是用马毛等毛做成的毯子。枭羽衣,就是把枭的羽毛编起来做成的下衣。常立者,就是站着的人。蹲踞精进者,就是致力于蹲踞精进,走路时也蹲着跳起跳起地走。荆棘卧具者,就是在地上铺上铁荆棘或天然荆棘,把皮铺在那上面,在那里做站立、经行等,这样显示。卧具,就是睡的时候也在那里铺设卧具。日暮第三次,就是日暮第三次。早晨、中午、日暮,一天三次下水沐浴,致力于下水沐浴而住,这样显示。巴利
Sāṇānīti sāṇavākacoḷāni. Masāṇānīti missakacoḷāni. Chavadussānīti matasarīrato chaḍḍitavatthāni. Erakatiṇādīni vā ganthetvā katanivāsanāni. Paṃsukūlānīti pathaviyaṃ chaḍḍitanantakāni. Tiritānīti rukkhattacavatthāni. Ajinanti ajinamigacammaṃ. Ajinakkhipanti tadeva majjhe phālitaṃ. Sakhurakantipi vadanti. Kusacīranti kusatiṇaṃ ganthetvā katacīraṃ. Vākacīraphalakacīresupi eseva nayo. Kesakambalanti manussakesehi katakambalaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘yāni kānici, bhikkhave, tantāvutānaṃ vatthānaṃ, kesakambalo tesaṃ paṭikuṭṭho akkhāyati. Kesakambalo, bhikkhave, sīte sīto, uṇhe uṇho, dubbaṇṇo duggandho dukkhasamphaso’’ti (a. ni. 3.138). Vālakambalanti assavālādīhi katakambalaṃ. Ulūkapakkhakanti ulūkapattāni ganthetvā katanivāsanaṃ. Ubbhaṭṭhakoti uddhaṃ ṭhitako. Ukkuṭikappadhānamanuyuttoti ukkuṭikavīriyaṃ anuyutto, gacchantopi ukkuṭikova hutvā uppatitvā uppatitvā gacchati. Kaṇṭakāpassayikoti ayakaṇṭake vā pakatikaṇṭake vā bhūmiyaṃ koṭṭetvā tattha cammaṃ attharitvā ṭhānacaṅkamādīni karomīti dasseti. Seyyanti sayantopi tattheva seyyaṃ kappemi. Sāyaṃ tatiyamassāti sāyatatiyakaṃ. Pāto majjhanhike sāyanti divasassa tikkhattuṃ pāpaṃ pavāhessāmīti udakorohanānuyogaṃ anuyutto viharāmīti dasseti.
156 “非多年积聚”是指非多年积聚所生成的。“尘垢”是指尘土污秽,这是就他自己受持尘垢行的那段时间来说的。“厌恶”是指在厌恶恶行的状态中。“乃至水滴”是说,乃至对一滴水,我的悲悯都现前,更何况对其他砂砾、陶片、木杖、沙粒等呢。据说,他们把水滴以及这些砂砾、陶片等安立为微小生命。因此说:“乃至对一滴水,我的悲悯都现前。”我连一滴水都不杀害、不毁坏,是什么原因呢?就是为了“不要让我对处于别处的微小生命造成杀害”。对于处在高低不平的地面、草尖、树枝等别处的水滴类微小生命,我不造成杀害,不令灭除。这个意思由“我具念而行”显示出来。据说在裸形者当中,从脚踩上地面的那一刻起,就没有所谓的具戒者。他们去乞食时也是破戒而去,在施主家中进食时也是破戒而食,回来时也是破戒而回。但当他们用孔雀翎清扫木板,决意受戒而坐下时,那时才被称为具戒者。巴利
156.Nekavassagaṇikanti nekavassagaṇasañjātaṃ. Rajojallanti rajamalaṃ, idaṃ attano rajojallakavatasamādānakālaṃ sandhāya vadati. Jegucchisminti pāpajigucchanabhāve. Yāva udakabindumhipīti yāva udakathevakepi mama dayā paccupaṭṭhitā hoti, ko pana vādo aññesu sakkharakaṭhaladaṇḍakavālikādīsu. Te kira udakabinduṃ ca ete ca sakkharakaṭhalādayo khuddakapāṇāti paññapenti. Tenāha ‘‘yāva udakabindumhipi me dayā paccupaṭṭhitā hotī’’ti. Udakabindumpi na hanāmi na vināsemi, kiṃ kāraṇā. Māhaṃ khuddake pāṇe visamagate saṅghātaṃ āpādesinti. Ninnathalatiṇaggarukkhasākhādīsu visamaṭṭhāne gate udakabindusaṅkhāte khuddakapāṇe saṅghātaṃ vadhaṃ mā āpādesinti. Etamatthaṃ ‘‘satova abhikkamāmī’’ti dasseti. Acelakesu kira bhūmiṃ akkantakālato pabhuti sīlavā nāma natthi. Bhikkhācāraṃ gacchantāpi dussīlāva hutvā gacchanti, upaṭṭhākānaṃ gehe bhuñjantāpi dussīlāva hutvā bhuñjanti. Āgacchantāpi dussīlāva hutvā āgacchanti. Yadā pana morapiñchena phalakaṃ sammajjitvā sīlaṃ adhiṭṭhāya nisīdanti, tadā sīlavantā nāma honti.
林作者:就是为了找块茎、根和各种果实等而在林中四处游走的人。由林而林:就是从这个林到那个林,这个道理在一切处都一样。我行:就是我去。阿兰若者:就是在阿兰若中出生、长大的人,这是就他自己过邪命外道生活的那段时期说的。据说,菩萨是为了考察外道才依那种出家法出家,虽然知道那没有实质意义,却也没有还俗,因为菩萨对于自己所进入的任何境地,本性上都是不退转的。不过出家之后,为了“别让他们看见我,我也别看见他们”,他就从那里进入了阿兰若。因此他说:“他们莫见我,我亦莫见他们。”巴利
Vanakammikanti kandamūlaphalāphalādīnaṃ atthāya vane vicarantaṃ. Vanena vananti vanato vanaṃ, esa nayo sabbattha. Saṃpatāmīti gacchāmi. Āraññakoti araññe jātavuddho, idaṃ attano ājīvakakālaṃ sandhāya vadati. Bodhisatto kira pāsaṇḍapariggaṇhaṇatthāya taṃ pabbajjaṃ pabbaji, niratthakabhāvaṃ pana ñatvāpi na uppabbajjito, bodhisattā hi yaṃ yaṃ ṭhānaṃ upenti, tato anivattitadhammā honti, pabbajitvā pana mā maṃ koci addasāti tatova araññaṃ paviṭṭho. Tenevāha ‘‘mā maṃ te addasaṃsu ahañca mā te addasa’’nti.
牛棚就是牛住的地方。已离开的牛,就是已经走出去的牛。在那里,所谓四足而行,意思是:他站在林子边上,看见牧牛人和母牛们一起离开了,就把两只手和两个膝盖撑在地上,这样四肢着地爬过去。我吃那些,是说年长牛犊的牛粪又干又没营养,所以他不吃那些,专挑那些还在吃奶长大的幼小牛犊的牛粪,那些牛粪有营养,他吃饱了肚子,就又钻进密林里去。就是针对这个才说“我吃那些”。所谓只要我,意思是:只要我自己的屎尿还没排完,只要我的排泄之门还通着,我就一直吃那些。然而时间流逝,肌肉和血耗尽,排泄之门断绝,我就吃幼犊的牛粪。所谓于大不净食,于极大的不净食,也就是非寻常的食物,这是其含义。巴利
Goṭṭhāti govajā. Paṭṭhitagāvoti nikkhantagāvo. Tattha catukkuṇḍikoti vananteyeva ṭhito gopālakānaṃ gāvīhi saddhiṃ apagatabhāvaṃ disvā dve hatthe dve ca jaṇṇukāni bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapetvā evaṃ catukkuṇḍiko upasaṅkamitvāti attho. Tāni sudaṃ āhāremīti mahallakavacchakānaṃ gomayāni kasaṭāni nirojāni honti, tasmā tāni vajjetvā yāni taruṇavacchakānaṃ khīrapāneneva vaḍḍhantānaṃ saojāni gomayāni tāni kucchipūraṃ khāditvā puna vanasaṇḍameva pavisati. Taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tāni sudaṃ āhāremī’’ti. Yāvakīvañca meti yattakaṃ kālaṃ mama sakaṃ muttakarīsaṃ aparikkhīṇaṃ hoti. Yāva me dvāravaḷañjo pavattittha, tāva tadeva āhāremīti attho. Kāle pana gacchante gacchante parikkhīṇamaṃsalohito upacchinnadvāravaḷañjo vacchakānaṃ gomayāni āhāremi. Mahāvikaṭabhojanasminti mahante vikaṭabhojane, apakatibhojaneti attho.
157 舍利弗,在那里,那个令人恐惧的密林之所以令人恐惧,确实就在于它的令人恐惧。其中,“在那里”是承接前面所说的话。“确实”只是个虚词,用来补足音节。“舍利弗”是称呼语。这里的意思应当这样理解:所谓“某个令人恐惧的密林”,在那里,那个被称为令人恐惧的密林,其令人恐惧就在于它的令人恐惧,也就是说,存在于令人恐惧的作用之中,这就是意思所在。那是什么存在呢?就是这个:任何尚未离贪的人……身毛竖立。巴利
157.Tatrāssudaṃ, sāriputta, bhiṃsanakassa vanasaṇḍassa bhiṃsanakatasmiṃ hotīti. Tatrāti purimavacanāpekkhanaṃ. Sudanti padapūraṇamatte nipāto. Sāriputtāti ālapanaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha atthayojanā – tatrāti yaṃ vuttaṃ aññataraṃ bhiṃsanakaṃ vanasaṇḍanti, tatra yo so bhiṃsanako vanasaṇḍo vutto, tassa bhiṃsanakassa vanasaṇḍassa bhiṃsanakatasmiṃ hoti, bhiṃsanakakiriyāya hotīti attho. Kiṃ hoti? Idaṃ hoti, yo koci avītarāgo…pe… lomāni haṃsantīti.
或者,“于此”是表示所属关系的位格。“su”是虚词,就像“诸位贤者沙门、婆罗门,究竟什么是……”等句里那样。“此”是指示词,把所指的意思当作眼前可见的一样说出来。“suda”就是 su 加 idaṃ,要知道因为连声规则省略了 i 音,就像“眼根、女根、未知当知根,什么是已证得的呢?”等句里那样。这里的意思应当这样连接:舍利弗,对于那个恐怖丛林,在它的恐怖性中,有此存在。所谓“于恐怖性”,就是处于恐怖的状态。应当看出省略了一个 t 字母。或者原文就是 bhiṃsanakattasmiṃ。又或者,本来该说 bhiṃsanakatāya,却做了性别转换,而这个位格表示原因。因此应当这样理解其关联:以恐怖性而有此存在,以恐怖性为因、以恐怖性为缘而有此存在。任何未离贪的人进入那片丛林,大多身毛竖立——多数毛发竖立,向上竖起,像针、像刺一样立着,少数不竖立;或者说,大多数众生的毛发竖立,只有少数极为勇猛的人不竖立。巴利
Atha vā tatrāti sāmiatthe bhummaṃ. Su iti nipāto. Kiṃ su nāma te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇātiādīsu viya. Idanti adhippetamatthaṃ paccakkhaṃ viya katvā dassanavacanaṃ. Sudanti su idaṃ, sandhivasena ikāralopo veditabbo. Cakkhundriyaṃ itthindriyaṃ anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ kiṃ sūdhavittantiādīsu viya. Ayaṃ panettha atthayojanā, tassa, sāriputta, bhiṃsanakassa vanasaṇḍassa bhiṃsanakatasmiṃ idaṃsu hotīti. Bhiṃsanakatasminti bhiṃsanakabhāveti attho. Ekassa takārassa lopo daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Bhiṃsanakattasmi’’ntiyeva vā pāṭho , bhiṃsanakatāya iti vā vattabbe liṅgavipallāso kato, nimittatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Tasmā evaṃ sambandho veditabbo, bhiṃsanakabhāve idaṃsu hoti, bhiṃsanakabhāvanimittaṃ bhiṃsanakabhāvahetu, bhiṃsanakabhāvapaccayā idaṃsu hoti. Yo koci avītarāgo taṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ pavisati. Yebhuyyena lomāni haṃsanti bahutarāni lomāni haṃsanti, uddhaṃ mukhāni sūcisadisāni kaṇṭakasadisāni ca hutvā tiṭṭhanti, appāni na haṃsanti, bahutarānaṃ vā sattānaṃ haṃsanti, appakānaṃ atisūrapurisānaṃ na haṃsantīti.
中间八夜:摩伽月末尾四夜,加上颇勒窭那月开头四夜,这样两个月之间共有八夜。在露地:菩萨在下雪的时候,夜里住在露地,那时他毛孔里的雪珠像串起来的珍珠一样停在那里,身体就像披了一层白布。白天在丛林:白天雪珠被阳光照到就化了,本来可以喘口气,但这位菩萨太阳刚一升起就进入丛林,在那里被阳光晒化的雪水又滴在身上。白天住在露地,夜里住在丛林:据说热季时,他白天住在露地,因此腋下汗水直流;夜里本来可以喘口气,但这位菩萨太阳刚一落下就进入丛林。那时,白天吸收了热气的丛林中,他的身体就像被投进火坑一样被烧灼。不奇特:就是不奇特。显现:就是现起。巴利
Antaraṭṭhakāti māghamāsassa avasāne catasso, phagguṇamāsassa ādimhi catassoti evaṃ ubhinnaṃ antare aṭṭharatti. Abbhokāseti mahāsatto himapātasamaye rattiṃ abbhokāse viharati, athassa lomakūpesu āvutamuttā viya himabindūni tiṭṭhanti, sarīraṃ setadukūlapārutaṃ viya hoti. Divā vanasaṇḍeti divā himabindūsu sūriyātapasamphassena vigatesu assāsopi bhaveyya, ayaṃ pana sūriye uggacchanteyeva vanasaṇḍaṃ pavisati, tatrāpissa sūriyātapena paggharantaṃ himaṃ sarīreyeva patati. Divā abbhokāse viharāmi rattiṃ vanasaṇḍeti gimhakāle kiresa divā abbhokāse vihāsi, tenassa kacchehi sedadhārā mucciṃsu, rattiṃ assāso bhaveyya, ayaṃ pana sūriye atthaṃ gacchanteyeva vanasaṇḍaṃ pavisati. Athassa divā gahitausme vanasaṇḍe aṅgārakāsuyaṃ pakkhitto viya attabhāvo paridayhittha. Anacchariyāti anuacchariyā. Paṭibhāsīti upaṭṭhāsi.
白天被太阳晒得滚烫,夜里被树林里的热气蒸得滚烫,所以叫“善热”。夜里被雪冻透,白天又被雪水浸透,所以叫“善湿”。令人恐惧,所以叫“善怖”。“裸形”就是没有衣服穿。这是要说明:如果有下裙和上衣,寒冷或炎热就不至于逼得太厉害,可我连这些都没有。“也不靠近火”,就是连火也不去靠近。“专求清净”,就是为了寻求清净而专心用功。“牟尼”,是说那时他把自己当作牟尼,才这样讲。巴利
Sotattoti divā ātapena rattiṃ vanausmāya sutatto. Sosinnoti rattiṃ himena divā himodakena suṭṭhu tinto. Bhiṃsanaketi bhayajanake. Naggoti niccelo. Nivāsanapārupane hi sati sītaṃ vā uṇhaṃ vā na atibādheyya, tampi me natthīti dasseti. Na caggimāsinoti aggimpi na upagato. Esanāpasutoti suddhiesanatthāya pasuto, payutto. Munīti, tadā attānaṃ munīti katvā katheti.
“半焦的骨头”:就是被烧得半焦的骨头。“垫在头下和脚下”:意思是像铺床一样,把骨头铺开,头下有枕、脚下有垫,都清清楚楚,然后就在那里躺下——他显示的是这个情形。“村童”:就是放牛的小孩。据说那些牧童走到菩萨跟前,说:“善慧,你为什么坐在这里?说话啊!”菩萨低着头坐着,不说话。于是他们围住他,说:“你再不说,我们就不放过你!”朝他吐口水,把唾沫吐在他身上。即使这样,菩萨还是不说话。他们又说:“你不说吗?”就对着他小便,把尿撒在他身上。即使这样,菩萨也还是不说话。接着他们喊着“说!说!”用尘土往他身上撒。即使这样,菩萨也仍然不说话。然后他们又说:“你不说!”拿起小木棍和细枝条,插进他的耳朵里。菩萨忍受着剧烈、难忍、苦楚的苦受,心里决定不对任何人做任何事,像死人一样待着。因此(佛陀)说:“舍利弗,我回忆不起我曾对他们生起过恶念。”意思就是,我不曾对他们生起过哪怕一丝恶念。“住于舍”:就是处于舍的状态。这里“住”本身就是“住”的意思。因此,在“idaṃsu me”这个地方,也应理解为“ayaṃsu me”。按照这个方式,其他类似的说法也应当这样理解。这里显示的是:在距今九十一劫以前,他圆满了舍的修行。针对这一点,他说:巴利
Chavaṭṭhikānīti upaḍḍhadaḍḍhāni aṭṭhīni. Upadhāyāti yathā sīsūpadhānañca pādūpadhānañca paññāyati, evaṃ santharitvā tattha seyyaṃ kappemīti dasseti. Gāmaṇḍalāti gopāladārakā. Te kira bodhisattassa santikaṃ gantvā, sumedha, tvaṃ imasmiṃ ṭhāne kasmā nisinno, kathehīti vadanti. Bodhisatto adhomukho nisīdati, na katheti. Atha naṃ te akathetuṃ na dassāmāti parivāretvā oṭṭhubhanti sarīre kheḷaṃ pātenti. Bodhisatto evampi na katheti. Atha naṃ tvaṃ na kathesīti omuttenti passāvamassa upari vissajjenti. Bodhisatto evampi na kathetiyeva. Tato naṃ kathehi kathehīti paṃsukena okiranti. Bodhisatto evampi na kathetiyeva. Athassa na kathesīti daṇḍakasalākā gahetvā kaṇṇasotesu pavesenti. Bodhisatto dukkhā tibbā kaṭukā vedanā adhivāsento kassaci kiñci na karissāmīti matako viya acchati. Tenāha ‘‘na kho panāhaṃ, sāriputta, abhijānāmi tesu pāpakaṃ cittaṃ uppādetā’’ti. Na mayā tesu pāpakaṃ cittampi uppāditanti attho. Upekkhāvihārasmiṃ hotīti upekkhāvihāro hoti. Vihāro eva hi vihārasminti vutto. Teneva ca ‘‘idaṃsu me’’ti etthāpi ayaṃsu meti evaṃ attho veditabbo. Iminā nayena aññānipi evarūpāni padāni veditabbāni. Iminā ito ekanavutikappe pūritaṃ upekkhāvihāraṃ dasseti. Yaṃ sandhāyāha –
“ 得到快乐时,我不贪恋;身处痛苦中,我也不沮丧。
在一切情况下,我都保持平衡,这就是我的舍巴拉密。”巴利
‘‘Sukhapatto na rajjāmi, dukkhe na homi dummano; Sabbattha tulito homi, esā me upekkhāpāramī’’ti.
食物清净的注释巴利
Āhārasuddhivaṇṇanā
158 158.“靠食物得清净”是说:有些人认为,仅靠枣子之类的少量食物就能变得清净,他们持有这样的见解。“他们这样说”,就是他们这样讲。“用枣子”,指枣片。“枣水”,是把枣捣碎做成的饮料。“枣制品”,指枣沙拉、枣糕、枣丸等用枣加工成的各种食品。“以此为最高”,意思是把这一点当作最高标准。不过,在那个时候——也就是九十一劫那么久远的时代——枣的大小并不像木苹果或棕榈果那样,那时的枣,大小和现在的枣差不多。巴利
158.Āhārenasuddhīti kolādinā ekaccena parittakaāhārena sakkā sujjhitunti evaṃdiṭṭhino honti. Evamāhaṃsūti evaṃ vadanti. Kolehīti padarehi. Kolodakanti kolāni madditvā katapānakaṃ. Kolavikatinti kolasāḷavakolapūvakolaguḷādikolavikāraṃ. Etaparamoti etaṃ pamāṇaṃ paramaṃ assāti etaparamo. Tadā ekanavutikappamatthake pana na beluvapakkatālapakkapamāṇo kolo hoti, yaṃ etarahi kolassa pamāṇaṃ, ettakova hotīti attho.
159 “极度消瘦”是指极其瘦弱的状态。所谓“像阿西提卡藤节或卡拉藤节”,是说就像阿西提卡藤或卡拉藤在连接处干缩之后,中间一段一段凸起来那样,我的大小肢体也变成这样——这是在显示他的身形。“像骆驼蹄印一样”,是说就像骆驼的蹄印中间是凹的,同样,菩萨的血肉干枯之后,因为肛门向内陷进去,所以坐处中间是凹的。于是他坐在地上的那个地方,就像被箭羽末端踩过一样,中间是凸起的。“像串珠一样”,是说就像用绳子串起来的珠链,珠子与珠子之间是凹的,珠子所在处是凸的,同样,他的脊椎骨也是凸凹起伏的。“像旧屋的椽子”,是指旧屋的椽子,有的从竹梁上脱开,卡在环圈里,有的又从环圈里脱开,落到地上;这样一根在上面,一根在下面,就变得歪歪斜斜、参差不齐。可是菩萨的肋骨并不是那样。因为他血液枯竭、肌肉萎缩,肋骨之间的皮肤向下塌陷,就是针对这一点才这样说的。巴利
159.Adhimattakasimānanti ativiya kisabhāvaṃ. Āsītikapabbāni vā kāḷapabbāni vāti yathā āsītikavalliyā vā kāḷavalliyā vā sandhiṭṭhānesu milāyitvā majjhe unnatunnatāni honti, evaṃ mayhaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgāni hontīti dasseti. Oṭṭhapadanti yathā oṭṭhassa padaṃ majjhe gambhīraṃ hoti, evamevaṃ bodhisattassa milāte maṃsalohite vaccadvārassa antopaviṭṭhattā ānisadaṃ majjhe gambhīraṃ hoti. Athassa bhūmiyaṃ nisinnaṭṭhānaṃ sarapoṅkhena akkantaṃ viya majjhe unnataṃ hoti. Vaṭṭanāvaḷīti yathā rajjuyā āvunitvā katā vaṭṭanāvaḷī vaṭṭanānaṃ antarantarā ninnā hoti, vaṭṭanaṭṭhānesu unnatā, evaṃ piṭṭhikaṇṭako unnatāvanato hoti, jarasālāya gopānasiyoti jiṇṇasālāya gopānasiyo, tā vaṃsato muccitvā maṇḍale patiṭṭhahanti, maṇḍalato muccitvā bhūmiyanti; evaṃ ekā upari hoti, ekā heṭṭhāti oluggaviluggā bhavanti. Bodhisattassa pana na evaṃ phāsuḷiyo, tassa hi lohite chinne maṃse milāte phāsuḷantarehi cammāni heṭṭhā otiṇṇāni, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
“深陷”是指向下凹陷进去。据说,他的血被耗尽、肉干瘪之后,眼窝陷进去贴到了脑髓上,因此他的眼珠就成了那副样子。“生割”是指在还非常年轻的时候就被割断,因为它一碰到风和日晒就会干枯。舍利弗啊,我的腹皮一直贴到了脊梁骨。或者也可以这样理解前后关系:舍利弗啊,我的苦行极其严酷,所以我的腹皮一直贴到了脊梁骨。说“我就摸到脊梁骨”,意思是连腹皮一起摸到了;说“我就摸到腹皮”,意思是连脊梁骨一起摸到了。说“我倒栽下去”,是因为他坐着排便排尿时,尿根本排不出来,大便也只出来一两块像小石子那么大的东西,产生强烈的痛苦,全身冒汗,就地倒栽在地上。因此说“我倒栽下去”。说“就是这具身体”,是指那九十一劫末尾时的身体。而在《大萨恰咖经》中,则是针对最后一生的身体说“就是这具身体”。说“腐烂的根”,是指它们还留在肉里或血里。但如果没有血肉,那些毛就像从一块皮上脱落一样,只粘在手上。针对这种情况说“毛根腐烂,毛从身体上掉落”。巴利
Okkhāyikāti heṭṭhā anupaviṭṭhā. Tassa kira lohite chinne maṃse milāte akkhiāvāṭakā matthaluṅgaṃ āhacca aṭṭhaṃsu, tenassa evarūpā akkhitārakā ahesuṃ. Āmakacchinnoti atitaruṇakāle chinno, so hi vātātapena saṃphusati ceva milāyati ca. Yāvassu me, sāriputtāti, sāriputta, mayhaṃ udaracchavi yāva piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṃ allīnā hoti. Atha vā yāvassu me, sāriputta, bhāriyabhāriyā ahosi dukkarakārikā, mayhaṃ udaracchavi yāva piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṃ allīnā ahosīti evamettha sambandho veditabbo. Piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṃyeva pariggaṇhāmīti sahaudaracchaviṃ gaṇhāmi. Udaracchaviṃyeva pariggaṇhāmīti sahapiṭṭhikaṇṭakaṃ gaṇhāmi. Avakujjo papatāmīti tassa hi uccārapassāvatthāya nisinnassa passāvo neva nikkhamati, vaccaṃ pana ekaṃ dve kaṭakaṭṭhimattaṃ nikkhamati. Balavadukkhaṃ uppādeti. Sarīrato sedā muccanti, tattheva avakujjo bhūmiyaṃ patati. Tenāha ‘‘avakujjo papatāmī’’ti. Tameva kāyanti taṃ ekanavutikappamatthake kāyaṃ. Mahāsaccakasutte pana pacchimabhavikakāyaṃ sandhāya imameva kāyanti āha. Pūtimūlānīti maṃse vā lohite vā sati tiṭṭhanti. Tassa pana abhāve cammakhaṇḍe lomāni viya hattheyeva lagganti, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘pūtimūlāni lomāni kāyasmā patantī’’ti.
“足以成就圣者的知见殊胜”,就是指能够使人成为圣者的出世间之道。“正是由于这种圣慧”——是说由于没有证得观慧。“那种圣”——是指已经证得的道慧。这里说的是:就像现在因为证得了观慧,所以证得了道慧;同样,在九十一劫之前那时,因为我没有证得观慧,所以没有证得出世间道的智慧。不过,中部诵者长老们说:这里说的“这种”和“那种圣”,两者都只是指道慧本身。于是比丘们对他们说:“尊者,如果是这样,那就成了因为未证得道,所以说‘我没有证得道’,是这个意思吗?”他们说:“贤友,虽然我没法把它讲得更清楚,但这两处都只是道慧,在这里只有这种解释才合理。否则,用‘那种’来解释就对不上了。”巴利
Alamariyañāṇadassanavisesanti ariyabhāvaṃ kātuṃ samatthaṃ lokuttaramaggaṃ. Imissāyeva ariyāya paññāyāti vipassanāpaññāya anadhigamā. Yāyaṃ ariyāti yā ayaṃ maggapaññā adhigatā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā etarahi vipassanāpaññāya adhigatattā maggapaññā adhigatā, evaṃ ekanavutikappamatthake vipassanāpaññāya anadhigatattā lokuttaramaggapaññaṃ nādhigatosmīti, majjhimabhāṇakattherā panāhu, imissāyevāti vuttapaññāpi yāyaṃ ariyāti vuttapaññāpi maggapaññāyeva. Atha ne bhikkhū āhaṃsu ‘‘evaṃ sante maggassa anadhigatattā maggaṃ nādhigatosmīti idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti, bhante’’ti. Āvuso, kiñcāpi dīpetuṃ na sakkomi, dvepi pana maggapaññāyevāti, etadeva cettha yuttaṃ. Itarathā hi yā ayanti niddeso ananurūpo siyā.
关于轮回清净等的注释巴利
Saṃsārasuddhiādivaṇṇanā
160 160. “通过轮回得到清净”——他们说,是经过很多次轮回流转而得到清净。“通过再生得到清净”——他们说,是经过很多次投生而得到清净。“通过住处得到清净”——他们说,是在很多地方居住过后得到清净。在这三种情况里,按流转来说就是轮回,按投生来说就是再生,按居住来说就是住处,说的其实都是五蕴。“通过祭祀”——他们说,是举办很多祭祀后得到清净。“通过灌顶”——指以三种螺号声举行刹帝利灌顶,头顶被浇灌过。“通过侍奉火”——他们说,是很多次侍奉火后得到清净。巴利
160.Saṃsārena suddhīti bahukaṃ saṃsaritvā sujjhantīti vadanti. Upapattiyā suddhīti bahukaṃ upapajjitvā sujjhantīti vadanti. Āvāsena suddhīti bahūsu ṭhānesu vasitvā sujjhantīti vadanti. Tīsupi ṭhānesu saṃsaraṇakavasena saṃsāro. Upapajjanakavasena upapatti. Vasanakavasena āvāsoti khandhāyeva vuttā. Yaññenāti bahuyāge yajitvā sujjhantīti vadanti. Muddhāvasittenāti tīhi saṅkhehi khattiyābhisekena muddhani abhisittena. Aggipāricariyāyāti bahuaggiparicaraṇena sujjhantīti vadanti.
161 “年少者”指年轻的人。“青年”指具足青春的人。“极黑发者”指头发非常乌黑。“具足吉祥的青春”这句话是在说明:他具足那种使他成为青年的青春,而那青春是吉祥的、美好的。“第一韶华”指所谓第一韶华就是三十三岁,意思是具足这个年岁。“以慧明达”指以智慧明辨。“老”指因衰老而衰朽。“年迈”指身体各部分发育成熟而稳固。“长老”指年纪高迈。“经久”指走过漫长路途、经过了很久时间。“达至寿限”指已到达百岁的第三阶段,即最后之寿期。据说这部经是世尊在般涅槃那年说的,所以说“我今已年届八十”。“最胜”指最上等的。“以念”等词中:能够一边讲说百句乃至千句、一边当下受持,这叫念。那同样的、能够执持并持续系念不忘的能力,叫持。如此受持、保持、能够背诵的堪能之力,叫精进。能够看清它的意义和原因,叫慧明达。巴利
161.Daharoti taruṇo. Yuvāti yobbanena samannāgato. Susukāḷakesoti suṭṭhu kāḷakeso. Bhadrena yobbanena samannāgatoti imināssa yena yobbanena samannāgato yuvā, taṃ yobbanaṃ bhaddaṃ laddhakanti dasseti. Paṭhamena vayasāti paṭhamavayo nāma tettiṃsa vassāni, tena samannāgatoti attho, paññāveyyattiyenāti paññāveyyattibhāvena. Jiṇṇoti jarājiṇṇo. Vuddhoti vaḍḍhitvā ṭhitaaṅgapaccaṅgo. Mahallakoti jātimahallako. Addhagatoti bahuaddhānaṃ gato cirakālātikkanto. Vayo anuppattoti vassasatassa tatiyakoṭṭhāsaṃ pacchimavayaṃ anuppatto. Āsītiko me vayo vattatīti imaṃ kira suttaṃ bhagavā parinibbānasaṃvacchare kathesi. Tasmā evamāha. Paramāyāti uttamāya. Satiyātiādīsu padasatampi padasahassampi vadantasseva gahaṇasamatthatā sati nāma. Tadeva ādhāraṇaupanibandhanasamatthatā gati nāma. Evaṃ gahitaṃ dhāritaṃ sajjhāyaṃ kātuṃ samatthavīriyaṃ dhiti nāma. Tassa atthañca kāraṇañca dassanasamatthatā paññāveyyattiyaṃ nāma.
持坚弓的弓手是指拿着坚弓站着的射手。所谓坚弓,是指有两千力强度的弓。所谓两千力,就是把弓弦上好、挂上铅块等重物,用棍子挑起来,举到与箭一样高的时候,弓身刚好离开地面。这就是两千力的标准。受过训练是指在老师家里学了十年或十二年技艺的人。手法熟练是说有的人虽然学了技艺,但手还不熟练;而这个人手法熟练,已经达到运用自如的程度。曾在王宫等处展示过技艺是指在王宫等地方演练过技艺的人。用轻箭是指把箭内部挖空、填上棉花之类的东西、再涂上漆,做成很轻的小箭。这样做的箭,本来能射一牛吼远的,就能射两牛吼远;能射八牛吼远的,就能射十六牛吼远。毫不费力就是毫不吃力。超越就是越过。像这样具有极强念力的人,就像那个弓手能迅速越过一拃四指宽的影子一样,他也能领受、执持、修习上百句乃至上千句,并且能审察其中的意义和原因。除了吃、喝、咀嚼、品尝的时候:因为吃、喝等事,世尊也要做,比丘们也要做,所以这句话是在说明,除了应付这些必要事情的时间之外。巴利
Daḷhadhammā dhanuggahoti daḷhaṃ dhanuṃ gahetvā ṭhito issāso. Daḷhadhanu nāma dvisahassathāmaṃ vuccati, dvisahassathāmaṃ nāma yassa āropitassa jiyābaddho lohasīsādīnaṃ bhāro daṇḍe gahetvā yāva kaṇḍappamāṇā ukkhittassa pathavito muccati. Sikkhitoti dasa dvādasa vassāni ācariyakule uggahitasippo. Katahatthoti koci sippameva uggaṇhāti. Katahattho na hoti, ayaṃ pana katahattho ciṇṇavasībhāvo. Katūpāsanoti rājakulādīsu dassitasippo. Lahukena asanenāti anto susiraṃ katvā tūlādīni pūretvā katalākhāparikammena sallahukakaṇḍena. Evaṃ katañhi ekausabhagāmī dve usabhāni gacchati, aṭṭhausabhagāmī soḷasausabhāni gacchati. Appakasirenāti nidukkhena. Atipāteyyāti atikkameyya. Evaṃ adhimattasatimantoti yathā so dhanuggaho taṃ vidatthicaturaṅgulachāyaṃ sīghaṃ eva atikkameti, evaṃ padasatampi padasahassampi uggahetuṃ upadhāretuṃ sajjhāyituṃ atthakāraṇāni ca upaparikkhituṃ samatthāti attho. Aññatra asitapītakhāyitasāyitāti asitapītādīni hi bhagavatāpi kātabbāni honti, bhikkhūhipi. Tasmā tesaṃ karaṇamattakālaṃ ṭhapetvāti dasseti.
没有穷尽就是完全没有减少。假如一位比丘问身念处,另一位问受念处,另一位问心随观,另一位问法念处,他们不会想“他问了这个,我也去问这个”而看着对方。即便如此,他们的提问还是能看出有先后次序。但在佛陀这里,次序根本看不出来。因为甚至在一个影子掠过一拃四指宽那么短的时间之前,世尊就能讲十四种身念处、九种受念处、十六种心随观、五种法念处。先不说这四种念处,就算另外有人分别问四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、八正道,世尊也能讲。先不说这八组,就算有三十七个人同时问菩提分法,世尊也能当下就讲。为什么?因为世间普通人说一句话的时间里,阿难长老能说八句;而阿难长老说一句话的时间里,世尊能说十六句。为什么?因为世尊的舌头柔软,牙齿排列齐密,说出的话清晰流畅,语流轻快无碍。所以经中说:“舍利弗,如来的说法,确实没有穷尽。”巴利
Apariyādinnāyevāti aparikkhīṇāyeva. Sace hi eko bhikkhu kāyānupassanaṃ pucchati, añño vedanānupassanaṃ, añño cittānupassanaṃ, ayyo dhammānupassanaṃ. Iminā puṭṭhaṃ ahaṃ pucchissāmīti eko ekaṃ na oloketi. Evaṃ santepi tesaṃ vāro paññāyati. Evaṃ buddhānaṃ pana vāro na paññāyati, vidatthicaturaṅgulachāyaṃ atikkamato puretaraṃyeva bhagavā cuddasavidhena kāyānupassanaṃ, navavidhena vedanānupassanaṃ, soḷasavidhena cittānupassanaṃ, pañcavidhena dhammānupassanaṃ katheti. Tiṭṭhantu vā tāva ete cattāro. Sace hi aññe cattāro sammappadhānesu, aññe iddhipādesu, aññe pañca indriyesu, aññe pañca balesu, aññe satta bojjhaṅgesu, aññe aṭṭha maggaṅgesu pañhaṃ puccheyyuṃ, tampi bhagavā katheyya. Tiṭṭhantu vā ete aṭṭha. Sace aññe sattatiṃsa janā bodhipakkhiyesu pañhaṃ puccheyyuṃ, tampi bhagavā tāvadeva katheyya. Kasmā? Yāvatā hi lokiyamahājanā ekaṃ padaṃ kathenti. Tāva ānandatthero aṭṭha padāni katheti. Ānandatthere pana ekaṃ padaṃ kathenteyeva bhagavā soḷasapadāni katheti. Kasmā? Bhagavato hi jivhā mudukā dantāvaraṇaṃ suphusitaṃ vacanaṃ agalitaṃ bhavaṅgaparivāso lahuko. Tenāha ‘‘apariyādinnāyevassa, sāriputta, tathāgatassa dhammadesanā’’ti.
这里,“法的示导”是指安立教说。“法句文辞”是指圣典中的词句,也就是能表达各种义理的字。“问难辩才”是指解答问题的能力。这要说明什么呢?如来在年轻时,能把字母组合成词,能把词组合成偈颂,也能用四字、八字或十六字一句的偈颂来说明其中的义理。到了年老时,也绝不会说“现在不能把字母组合成词,不能把词组合成偈颂,不能说明偈颂的义理了”。所以,无论年轻还是年老,如来的这一切能力都毫无减损——这里要显示的就是这一点。“即使躺在床上”这句话,只是为了显示佛的力量而作的假设。实际上,根本不会有这样的时候:把具足十力的如来抬到床上,在村落、城镇、王都之间巡行。因为如来还在寿命的第五阶段,尚未被衰老等征服,金色身体还没有失去光泽,仍为天人所喜爱悦意,就入般涅槃了。巴利
Tattha dhammadasenāti tantiṭhapanā. Dhammapadabyañjananti pāḷiyā padabyañjanaṃ, tassa tassa atthassa byañjanakaṃ akkharaṃ. Pañhapaṭibhānanti pañhabyākaraṇaṃ. Iminā kiṃ dasseti? Tathāgato pubbe daharakāle akkharāni sampiṇḍetvā padaṃ vattuṃ sakkoti, padāni sampiṇḍetvā gāthaṃ vattuṃ sakkoti, catuakkharehi vā aṭṭhaakkharehi vā soḷasaakkharehi vā padehi yuttāya gāthāya atthaṃ vattuṃ sakkoti. Idāni pana mahallakakāle akkharāni sampiṇḍetvā padaṃ vā, padāni sampiṇḍetvā gāthaṃ vā, gāthāya atthaṃ vā vattuṃ na sakkotīti evaṃ natthi. Daharakāle ca mahallakakāle ca sabbametaṃ tathāgatassa apariyādinnamevāti imaṃ dasseti. Mañcakena cepi manti idaṃ buddhabaladīpanatthameva parikappetvā āha. Dasabalaṃ pana mañcake āropetvā gāmanigamarājadhāniyo pariharaṇakālo nāma natthi. Tathāgatā hi pañcame āyukoṭṭhāse khaṇḍiccādīhi anabhibhūtā suvaṇṇavaṇṇasarīrassa vevaṇṇiye ananuppatte devamanussānaṃ piyamanāpakāleyeva parinibbāyanti.
162 那嘎萨玛拉是这位长老的名字。在佛陀最初成道后的二十年里,像伍巴瓦那、那吉达、美吉亚这些长老一样,他也是世尊的侍者。正在扇风,是指用扇子慢慢地扇出凉风,让世尊感到气候舒适。这样说,是指他听完整部经后,对世尊过去所行的种种难行苦行生起净信,便说出“稀有啊,尊者”等话。其中,“应当击掌”就是稀有的意思;“未曾有过而如今有了”就是希有的意思。这两个词都是在表达他自己的惊叹。他问“尊者,这个法门叫什么名字”,心里想的是:这个法门真好,我要请求世尊给它取个名字。于是世尊为这个法门取名,说“因此,你……”等等。意思是:那嘎萨玛拉,因为你听了这部经后,身上的毛发都欢喜地竖立起来,所以你应该把这个法门记作“毛发竖立法门”。巴利
162.Nāgasamāloti tassa therassa nāmaṃ. Paṭhamabodhiyañhi vīsativassabbhantare upavānanāgitameghiyattherā viya ayampi bhagavato upaṭṭhāko ahosi. Bījayamānoti mandamandena tālavaṇṭavātena bhagavato utusukhaṃ samuṭṭhāpayamāno. Etadavocāti sakalasuttantaṃ sutvā bhagavato pubbacaritaṃ dukkarakārakaṃ āgamma pasanno etaṃ ‘‘acchariyaṃ bhante’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tattha accharaṃ paharituṃ yuttanti acchariyaṃ. Abhūtapubbaṃ bhūtanti abbhutaṃ. Ubhayenapi attano vimhayameva dīpeti. Ko nāmo ayaṃ bhanteti idaṃ bhaddako vatāyaṃ dhammapariyāyo, handassa bhagavantaṃ āyācitvā nāmaṃ gaṇhāpemīti adhippāyena āha. Athassa bhagavā nāmaṃ gaṇhanto tasmā tiha tvantiādimāha. Tassattho, yasmā idaṃ suttaṃ sutvā tava lomāni haṭṭhāni, tasmā tiha tvaṃ , nāgasamāla, imaṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ ‘‘lomahaṃsana pariyāyo’’tveva naṃ dhārehīti.
3. 《大苦蕴经》的注释巴利
3. Mahādukkhakkhandhasuttavaṇṇanā
163 如是我闻这句,说的是《大苦蕴经》。在这部经的注释里,依律藏的用法,三个人就叫“众多”,超过这个数目才叫僧团;依经藏的用法,则三个仍是三个,超过这个数才叫“众多”。这里应当按经藏的用法来理解,所以“众多”是指超过三人。“他们进村乞食”,是说他们已经进去了。其实他们那时还没进去,但因为已经出门,心里想着“我们就要进去”,所以也说“进去了”。就像一个人出门要去某个村子,虽然还没到那个村子,有人问“某某去哪儿了”,也会回答“去村里了”,道理就是这样。“外道们的园林”,是说在祇园精舍不远处,有一处其他外道游行者的园林,他们就是指那个地方说的。“朋友,沙门”,意思是:朋友,你们的老师是沙门乔达摩。“遍知诸欲”,是说他指出对诸欲的断除和超越。对色、受等,也应当这样理解。巴利
163.Evaṃme sutanti mahādukkhakkhandhasuttaṃ. Tattha vinayapariyāyena tayo janā sambahulāti vuccanti, tato paraṃ saṅgho. Suttantapariyāyena tayo tayo eva, tato uddhaṃ sambahulāti vuccanti. Idha suttantapariyāyena sambahulāti veditabbā. Piṇḍāya pāvisiṃsūti paviṭṭhā, te pana na tāva paviṭṭhā, pavisissāmāti nikkhantattā pana pavisiṃsūti vuttā. Yathā gāmaṃ gamissāmīti nikkhantapuriso taṃ gāmaṃ appattopi ‘‘kuhiṃ itthannāmo’’ti vutte ‘‘gāmaṃ gato’’ti vuccati, evaṃ. Paribbājakānaṃ ārāmoti jetavanato avidūre aññatitthiyānaṃ paribbājakānaṃ ārāmo atthi, taṃ sandhāya evamāhaṃsu. Samaṇo, āvusoti, āvuso, tumhākaṃ satthā samaṇo gotamo. Kāmānaṃ pariññanti kāmānaṃ pahānaṃ samatikkamaṃ paññapeti. Rūpavedanāsupi eseva nayo.
在这里,外道们虽然了解自己的教义,却会施设对欲的遍知,说的是初禅;会施设对色的遍知,说的是无色有;会施设对受的遍知,说的是无想有。可是他们连“这是初禅、这是色有、这是无色有”都不知道。他们没法真正施设,只是嘴上说“我们在施设,我们在施设”。如来则用不来道施设对欲的遍知,用阿拉汉道施设对色和受的遍知。明明有这么大的差别,他们却在这里说:“贤友,这有什么差别呢?”等等。巴利
Tattha titthiyā sakasamayaṃ jānantā kāmānaṃ pariññaṃ paññapeyyuṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ vadamānā, rūpānaṃ pariññaṃ paññapeyyuṃ arūpabhavaṃ vadamānā, vedanānaṃ pariññaṃ paññapeyyuṃ asaññabhavaṃ vadamānā. Te pana ‘‘idaṃ nāma paṭhamajjhānaṃ ayaṃ rūpabhavo ayaṃ arūpabhavo’’tipi na jānanti. Te paññapetuṃ asakkontāpi kevalaṃ ‘‘paññapema paññapemā’’ti vadanti. Tathāgato kāmānaṃ pariññaṃ anāgāmimaggena paññapeti, rūpavedanānaṃ arahattamaggena . Te evaṃ mahante visese vijjamānepi idha no, āvuso, ko vivesotiādimāhaṃsu.
在这里,“此处”是指这种施设。或者说“在说法中”,意思是:沙门乔达摩的说法和我们的说法之间,或者我们的说法和沙门乔达摩的说法之间,所说的差别到底是什么?第二句也是同样的道理。就这样,他们把自己仅凭言说所得的见解,和正法教导并列在一起,就像杂色黄金一样。他们不随喜,就是不认可“是这样”;不拒绝,就是不否定“不是这样”。为什么?据说那些外道就像盲人一样,不管懂不懂都可能乱说,所以不随喜;但因为“遍知”这个词稍微带有一点教法的味道,所以不拒绝。又或者,因为当地人对自宗和他宗的教义都不太精通,所以既不随喜也不拒绝。巴利
Tattha idhāti imasmiṃ paññāpane. Dhammadesanāya vā dhammadesananti yadidaṃ samaṇassa vā gotamassa dhammadesanāya saddhiṃ amhākaṃ dhammadesanaṃ, amhākaṃ vā dhammadesanāya saddhiṃ samaṇassa gotamassa dhammadesanaṃ ārabbha nānākaraṇaṃ vuccetha, taṃ kinnāmāti vadanti. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo . Iti vemajjhe bhinnasuvaṇṇaṃ viya sāsanena saddhiṃ attano laddhivacanamattena samadhuraṃ ṭhapayiṃsu. Neva abhinandiṃsūti evametanti na sampaṭicchiṃsu. Nappaṭikkosiṃsūti nayidaṃ evanti nappaṭisedhesuṃ. Kasmā? Te kira titthiyā nāma andhasadisā, jānitvā vā ajānitvā vā katheyyunti nābhinandiṃsu, pariññanti vacanena īsakaṃ sāsanagandho atthīti nappaṭikkosiṃsu. Janapadavāsino vā te sakasamayaparasamayesu na suṭṭhu kusalātipi ubhayaṃ nākaṃsu.
165 “不能完整解说”,意思是无法圆满地讲清楚。“更增苦恼”,意思是由于不能圆满解说,会更加陷入痛苦;因为对无法圆满解说的人来说,苦确实会生起。比丘们,“正如……对非境界所问”中的“如”是表示原因的词,“彼”只是一个小品词,意思是:因为问题是问到他们能力范围之外的事。“含天神的”,就是与天神一起的世间;对魔等也是如此。这样,先把三个处所的世间都包括进来,又提到两类众生,就是说:在这个含天神等各种类别的世间里,我看不到那个天神或人。或者,从我的教法听闻之后,即使非如来,即使非如来的弟子,也能令对方欢喜满足。这表明除此之外,没有其他能令人满意的方法。巴利
165.Na ceva sampāyissantīti sampādetvā kathetuṃ na sakkhissanti. Uttariñca vighātanti asampāyanato uttarimpi dukkhaṃ āpajjissanti. Sampādetvā kathetuṃ asakkontānaṃ nāma hi dukkhaṃ uppajjati. Yathā taṃ, bhikkhave, avisayasminti ettha yathāti kāraṇavacanaṃ, tanti nipātamattaṃ. Yasmā avisaye pañho pucchito hotīti attho. Sadevaketi saha devehi sadevake. Samārakādīsupi eseva nayo. Evaṃ tīṇi ṭhānāni loke pakkhipitvā dve pajāyāti pañcahipi sattalokameva pariyādiyitvā etasmiṃ sadevakādibhede loke taṃ devaṃ vā manussaṃ vā na passāmīti dīpeti. Ito vā pana sutvāti ito vā pana mama sāsanato sutvā atathāgatopi atathāgatasāvakopi ārādheyya paritoseyya. Aññathā ārādhanaṃ nāma natthīti dasseti.
166 现在,为了解答他们那些问题,借此显示自己令心欢喜,便说了“ko ca, bhikkhave”等话。“诸欲乐”中,“欲”是可贪求的意思;“功德”是束缚的意思。比如“诸比丘,我允许用未裁剪的布做双层桑喀帝”(《大品》348)这句里,“功德”是层叠的意思。比如“时光流逝,昼夜飞驰,寿命的功德次第舍弃”(《相应部》1.4)这句里,“功德”是积聚的意思。比如“应期待百倍的供养”(《中部》3.379)这句里,“功德”是利益的意思。比如“肠膜,应作许多花鬘”(《小部》3 三十二行相;《长部》2.377;《法句》53)这句里,“功德”是束缚的意思。这里也是这个意思,所以说“功德是束缚的意思”。“眼所识”是指应由眼识来见的。以这个方法,在“耳所识”等里也应知道其义。“可爱”是指或者被寻求,或者不被寻求,是可爱所缘的意思。“可意”是指可欲的。“悦意”是指令心增长的。“喜乐形态”是指有喜乐之性的。“与欲相应”是指与以此所缘而生起的欲相应。“可染”是指可染着的,是生起贪的原因的意思。巴利
166. Idāni attano tesaṃ pañhānaṃ veyyākaraṇena cittārādhanaṃ dassento ko ca, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Kāmaguṇāti kāmayitabbaṭṭhena kāmā. Bandhanaṭṭhena guṇā. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ahatānaṃ vatthānaṃ dviguṇaṃ saṅghāṭi’’nti (mahāva. 348) ettha hi paṭalaṭṭho guṇaṭṭho. ‘‘Accenti kālā tarayanti rattiyo, vayoguṇā anupubbaṃ jahantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.4) ettha rāsaṭṭho guṇaṭṭho. ‘‘Sataguṇā dakkhiṇā pāṭikaṅkhitabbā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.379) ettha ānisaṃsaṭṭho guṇaṭṭho. ‘‘Antaṃ antaguṇaṃ (khu. pā. 3 dvattiṃsākāre; dī. ni. 2.377) kayirā mālāguṇe bahū’’ti (dha. pa. 53) ettha bandhanaṭṭho guṇaṭṭho. Idhāpi eseva adhippeto, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bandhanaṭṭhena guṇā’’ti. Cakkhuviññeyyāti cakkhuviññāṇena passitabbā. Etenupāyena sotaviññeyyādīsupi attho veditabbo. Iṭṭhāti pariyiṭṭhā vā hontu mā vā, iṭṭhārammaṇabhūtāti attho. Kantāti kamanīyā. Manāpāti manavaḍḍhanakā. Piyarūpāti piyajātikā. Kāmūpasaṃhitāti ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppajjamānena kāmena upasaṃhitā. Rajanīyāti rajjaniyā, rāguppattikāraṇabhūtāti attho.
167 如果是以手印等来谋生:手印,就是在手指关节上做个记号,然后用手比划出的手势。计算,是不间断地数数。算数,是整体地估算。靠这些本事,他们看看田地,就知道这里能有多少稻谷;看看树木,就知道这里能有多少果实;看看天空,就知道这片天空里会有多少飞禽。巴利
167.Yadi muddāyātiādīsu muddāti aṅgulipabbesu saññaṃ ṭhapetvā hatthamuddā. Gaṇanāti acchiddagaṇanā. Saṅkhānanti piṇḍagaṇanā. Yāya khettaṃ oloketvā idha ettakā vīhī bhavissanti , rukkhaṃ oloketvā idha ettakāni phalāni bhavissanti, ākāsaṃ oloketvā ime ākāse sakuṇā ettakā nāma bhavissantīti jānanti.
耕田就是耕作。经商就是步行经商、陆路经商之类的谋生方式。牧牛就是替自己或别人看牛,靠贩卖五种牛乳制品来维持生活。弓术是指拿起武器做护卫的工作。王臣是指拿着武器替国王办事、做护卫。其余技艺是指除了前面已经提到的之外,剩下的象术、马术等技艺。寒为前导:就像箭靶位于箭的前方一样,寒冷就在前面,意思是被寒冷逼迫。热也应这样理解。虻等当中,虻是指黄蝇,蚊是指一切蝇类,蛇是指任何爬行的动物。被恼害是指被侵害、被触碰。死是指死亡。比丘们,这是指依靠手印等谋生,以寒冷等为缘而引生的疾病。欲的过患,是指在诸欲中的灾祸、障碍。现见是指眼前可见、自己能亲自看到的。苦蕴是指苦的积聚。欲因等当中:从缘的意义说,欲是它的因,所以叫欲因;从根的意义说,欲是它的起因,所以叫欲之因,这只是词性变化而说成欲之因;从原因的意义说,欲是它的诤事,所以叫欲之诤事,也只是词性变化而说成欲之诤事。唯欲因,这是决定性的说法,意思是必定以欲为缘而生起。巴利
Kasīti kasikammaṃ. Vaṇijjāti jaṅghavaṇijjathalavaṇijjādivaṇippatho. Gorakkhanti attano vā paresaṃ vā gāvo rakkhitvā pañcagorasavikkayena jīvanakammaṃ. Issattho vuccati āvudhaṃ gahetvā upaṭṭhānakammaṃ. Rājaporisanti āvudhena rājakammaṃ katvā upaṭṭhānaṃ. Sippaññataranti gahitāvasesaṃ hatthiassasippādi. Sītassa purakkhatoti lakkhaṃ viya sarassa sītassa purato, sītena bādhīyamānoti attho. Uṇhepi eseva nayo. Ḍaṃsādīsu ḍaṃsāti piṅgalamakkhikā. Makasāti sabbamakkhikā, sarīsapāti ye keci saritvā gacchanti. Rissamānoti ruppamāno, ghaṭṭiyamāno. Mīyamānoti maramāno. Ayaṃ, bhikkhaveti, bhikkhave, ayaṃ muddādīhi jīvikakappanaṃ āgamma sītādipaccayo ābādho. Kāmānaṃ ādīnavoti kāmesu upaddavo, upassaggoti attho. Sandiṭṭhikoti paccakkho sāmaṃ passitabbo. Dukkhakkhandhoti dukkharāsi. Kāmahetūtiādīsu paccayaṭṭhena kāmā assa hetūti kāmahetu. Mūlaṭṭhena kāmā nidānamassāti kāmanidāno. Liṅgavipallāsena pana kāmanidānanti vutto. Kāraṇaṭṭhena kāmā adhikaraṇaṃ assāti kāmādhikaraṇo. Liṅgavipallāseneva pana kāmādhikaraṇanti vutto. Kāmānameva hetūti idaṃ niyamavacanaṃ, kāmapaccayā uppajjatiyevāti attho.
“奋起”是指靠谋生的精进努力而奋发。“勤策”是指把那份精进前后相续地不断鞭策。“精进”是指努力、勇猛、加行。“不成就”是指不成功,到不了手。“忧愁”是指因心中生起强烈的忧愁而忧伤。“疲惫”是指因身体生起的痛苦而疲惫。“悲叹”是指用言语悲叹。“捶胸”是指捶打胸膛。“哭泣”是指哭号。“陷入迷乱”是指像失去知觉一样昏乱。“徒劳”是指空虚无用。“无果”是指没有结果。“因守护之故”是指守护的原因。“如何”是指用什么办法。“凡我所有”是指我通过耕种等劳作所积攒的财物。“那些也没有了”是指那些如今对我们来说也不存在了。巴利
Uṭṭhahatoti ājīvasamuṭṭhāpakavīriyena uṭṭhahantassa. Ghaṭatoti taṃ vīriyaṃ pubbenāparaṃ ghaṭentassa. Vāyamatoti vāyāmaṃ parakkamaṃ payogaṃ karontassa. Nābhinipphajjantīti na nipphajjanti, hatthaṃ nābhiruhanti. Socatīti citte uppannabalavasokena socati. Kilamatīti kāye uppannadukkhena kilamati. Paridevatīti vācāya paridevati. Urattāḷinti uraṃ tāḷetvā. Kandatīti rodati. Sammohaṃ āpajjatīti visaññī viya sammūḷho hoti. Moghanti tucchaṃ. Aphaloti nipphalo. Ārakkhādhikaraṇanti ārakkhakāraṇā. Kintīti kena nu kho upāyena. Yampi meti yampi mayhaṃ kasikammādīni katvā uppāditaṃ dhanaṃ ahosi. Tampi no natthīti tampi amhākaṃ idāni natthi.
168 再者,比丘们,接着又用“以欲为因”等说法,先指出原因,然后才说明过患。其中,“以欲为因”是指以欲为缘,连国王与国王之间也互相争执。“以欲为根源”是中性抽象名词,意思是以欲为起因,而互相争执。“以欲为诤事”也是中性抽象名词,意思是以欲为争执的缘由,而互相争执。“唯以欲为因”是指为了村庄、城镇、城市、将军、国师、地位等,仅仅为了欲本身而互相争执。“攻击”是指击打。“刀与盾”是指刀以及盾牌等。“备好弓和箭囊”是指拿起弓、系好箭囊。“两面密集”是指两边密集布阵,“闯入”是指冲入其中,“于箭”是指于箭杆,“闪烁”是指回转飞舞,“彼等于彼处”是指彼等于彼战斗中。巴利
168.Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, kāmahetūtiādināpi kāraṇaṃ dassetvāva ādīnavaṃ dīpeti. Tattha kāmahetūti kāmapaccayā rājānopi rājūhi vivadanti. Kāmanidānanti bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ, kāme nidānaṃ katvā vivadantīti attho. Kāmādhikaraṇantipi bhāvanapuṃsakameva, kāme adhikaraṇaṃ katvā vivadantīti attho. Kāmānameva hetūti gāmanigamanagarasenāpatipurohitaṭṭhānantarādīnaṃ kāmānameva hetu vivadantīti attho. Upakkamantīti paharanti. Asicammanti asiñceva kheṭakaphalakādīni ca. Dhanukalāpaṃ sannayhitvāti dhanuṃ gahetvā sarakalāpaṃ sannayhitvā. Ubhatobyūḷanti ubhato rāsibhūtaṃ. Pakkhandantīti pavisanti. Usūsūti kaṇḍesu. Vijjotalantesūti viparivattantesu. Te tatthāti te tasmiṃ saṅgāme.
这里,“湿泥涂抹的壁垛”是指:人们用砖砌成马蹄形的墙基,再在上面涂上石灰。这样砌成的墙基就叫作壁垛。它们被湿泥浇淋后,就叫作湿泥涂抹。“冲进去”是指:即使它们在下面被锋利的铁枪等刺中,又因为墙壁湿滑而爬不上去,仍然一个劲地往前冲。“粪锅”是指用煮沸的牛粪。“大压板”是指有百齿的器具。把它做成八齿的形状,当有人喊着“攻破城门冲进去”而来时,站在上方城门的人就砍断系着它的绳索,用这块大压板碾压他们。巴利
Addāvalepanāupakāriyoti cettha manussā pākārapādaṃ assakhurasaṇṭhānena iṭṭhakāhi cinitvā upari sudhāya limpanti. Evaṃ katā pākārapādā upakāriyoti vuccanti. Tā tintena kalalena sittā addāvalepanā nāma honti. Pakkhandantīti tāsaṃ heṭṭhā tikhiṇaayasūlādīhi vijjhīyamānāpi pākārassa picchilabhāvena ārohituṃ asakkontāpi upadhāvantiyeva. Chakaṇakāyāti kuthitagomayena. Abhivaggenāti satadantena. Taṃ aṭṭhadantākārena katvā ‘‘nagaradvāraṃ bhinditvā pavisissāmā’’ti āgate uparidvāre ṭhitā tassa bandhanayottāni chinditvā tena abhivaggena omaddanti.
169 砍断屋缝,就是破坏房屋的接缝处。劫掠,就是闯进村子大肆抢掠。独屋,就是纠集五十人或六十人围住屋主,活捉后勒索赎金。拦路,就是做拦路抢劫的勾当。用粗棍,就是用槌子打人;或者把四肘长的木棍砍成两截,拿短棍来打。醪粥刑,是一种用酸粥锅行刑的刑罚。行刑时掀开头盖骨,用钳子夹起烧红的铁丸放进去,脑髓立刻沸腾,向上涌出来。螺首刑,是一种做成螺壳头的刑罚。行刑时割开上唇、两边耳垂和脖子上的皮,把所有头发扎成一束,用木棍绞起来往上拔,皮就连着头发一起被扯下来。然后用粗沙磨擦头骨并洗干净,让它变成螺壳那样的颜色。巴利
169.Sandhimpi chindantīti gharasandhimpi chindanti. Nillopanti gāme paharitvā mahāvilopaṃ karonti. Ekāgārikanti paṇṇāsamattāpi saṭṭhimattāpi parivāretvā jīvaggāhaṃ gahetvā āharāpenti. Paripanthepi tiṭṭhantīti panthadūhanakammaṃ karonti. Aḍḍhadaṇḍakehīti muggarehi pahārasādhanatthaṃ vā catuhatthadaṇḍaṃ dvedhā chetvā gahitadaṇḍakehi. Bilaṅgathālikanti kañjiyaukkhalikammakāraṇaṃ, taṃ karontā sīsakapālaṃ uppāṭetvā tattaṃ ayoguḷaṃ saṇḍāsena gahetvā tattha pakkhipanti, tena matthaluṅgaṃ pakkuthitvā upari uttarati. Saṅkhamuṇḍikanti saṅkhamuṇḍakammakāraṇaṃ, taṃ karontā uttaroṭṭhaubhatokaṇṇacūḷikagaḷavāṭaparicchedena cammaṃ chinditvā sabbakese ekato gaṇṭhiṃ katvā daṇḍakena vallitvā uppāṭenti, saha kesehi cammaṃ uṭṭhahati. Tato sīsakaṭāhaṃ thūlasakkharāhi ghaṃsitvā dhovantā saṅkhavaṇṇaṃ karonti.
罗睺口刑,就是罗睺口刑罚的做法:行刑的人用铁签把嘴撬开,在嘴里点灯。或者从耳垂开始,用凿子把嘴凿开,血流出来灌满嘴巴。火焰鬘刑,就是把全身用浸了油的布缠起来,然后点火。手灯刑,就是把双手用浸了油的布缠起来,像灯一样点燃。艾拉迦衣刑,就是艾拉迦衣刑罚的做法:行刑的人从脖子开始,把连着皮的肉割开,一直割到脚踝,然后用绳子绑住拖拽。受刑的人踩在自己被割下的皮肉上,一步步摔倒。树皮衣刑,就是树皮衣刑罚的做法:行刑的人同样把连着皮的肉割开,先放置到腰部,再从腰部开始割到脚踝。上半身割下的皮肉使下半身如同穿了树皮衣一样。伊内亚卡刑,就是伊内亚卡刑罚的做法:行刑的人在两肘和两膝上套上铁环,钉入铁桩。受刑的人就以四根铁桩撑立在地上。然后人们在四周点火。在说到“伊内亚卡刑的火光围绕”那段时,说的也是这个。人们时不时拔掉铁桩,只让他用四根骨尖撑着。像这样的刑罚,实在是没有比这更残忍的了。巴利
Rāhumukhanti rāhumukhakammakāraṇaṃ, taṃ karontā saṅkunā mukhaṃ vivaritvā antomukhe dīpaṃ jālenti . Kaṇṇacūḷikāhi vā paṭṭhāya mukhaṃ nikhādanena khaṇanti. Lohitaṃ paggharitvā mukhaṃ pūreti. Jotimālikanti sakalasarīraṃ telapilotikāya veṭhetvā ālimpanti. Hatthapajjotikanti hatthe telapilotikāya veṭhetvā dīpaṃ viya jālenti. Erakavattikanti erakavattakammakāraṇaṃ, taṃ karontā gīvato paṭṭhāya cammabaddhe kantitvā gopphake ṭhapenti. Atha naṃ yottehi bandhitvā kaḍḍhanti. So attano cammabaddhe akkamitvā akkamitvā patati. Cīrakavāsikanti cīrakavāsikakammakāraṇaṃ, taṃ karontā tatheva cammabaddhe kantitvā kaṭiyaṃ ṭhapenti. Kaṭito paṭṭhāya kantitvā gopphakesu ṭhapenti. Uparimehi heṭṭhimasarīraṃ cīrakanivāsananivatthaṃ viya hoti. Eṇeyyakanti eṇeyyakakammakāraṇaṃ. Taṃ karontā ubhosu kapparesu ca jāṇūsu ca ayavalayāni datvā ayasūlāni koṭṭenti. So catūhi ayasūlehi bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhahati. Atha naṃ parivāretvā aggiṃ karonti. ‘‘Eṇeyyako jotipariggaho yathā’’ti āgataṭṭhānepi idameva vuttaṃ. Taṃ kālena kālaṃ sūlāni apanetvā catūhi aṭṭhikoṭīhiyeva ṭhapenti. Evarūpā kāraṇā nāma natthi.
鱼钩肉刑:用两头带钩的钩子打进去,把皮、肉、筋腱撕扯出来。钱币刑:用锋利的斧刀,从头顶开始,把全身一块一块地削成铜钱大小的薄片。碱水去皮刑:用兵器在身上各处击打之后,再用刷子把碱水刷进去,皮肉筋腱溃烂流淌,只剩下一副骨头架子立在那里。门闩翻转刑:让人侧躺,在耳孔里钉入铁桩,固定在地上,然后抓住双脚旋转甩动。稻草座刑:熟练的刽子手割去皮肤与外皮,用石臼杵砸碎骨头,然后抓住头发提起来,只剩一堆肉,再用头发缠裹抓牢,像捆稻草束一样。以犬刑:几天不给食物,让饥饿的狗来啃食,片刻之间就只剩一副骨头架子。来世:指来世第二生的异熟果报。巴利
Baḷisamaṃsikanti ubhatomukhehi baḷisehi paharitvā cammamaṃsanhārūni uppāṭenti. Kahāpaṇikanti sakalasarīraṃ tiṇhāhi vāsīhi koṭito paṭṭhāya kahāpaṇamattaṃ kahāpaṇamattaṃ pātentā koṭṭenti. Khārāpatacchikanti sarīraṃ tattha tattha āvudhehi paharitvā kocchehi khāraṃ ghaṃsanti. Cammasaṃsanhārūni paggharitvā savanti. Aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikāva tiṭṭhati. Palighaparivattikanti ekena passena nipajjāpetvā kaṇṇacchidde ayasūlaṃ koṭṭetvā pathaviyā ekābaddhaṃ karonti. Atha naṃ pāde gahetvā āvijjhanti. Palālapīṭhakanti cheko kāraṇiko chavicammaṃ acchinditvā nisadapotehi aṭṭhīni bhinditvā kesesu gahetvā ukkhipanti. Maṃsarāsiyeva hoti, atha naṃ keseheva pariyonandhitvā gaṇhanti. Palālavaṭṭiṃ viya katvā pana veṭhenti. Sunakhehipīti katipayāni divasāni āhāraṃ adatvā chātakehi sunakhehi khādāpenti. Te muhuttena aṭṭhisaṅkhalikameva karonti. Samparāyikoti samparāye dutiyattabhāve vipākoti attho.
170 “欲贪的调伏、欲贪的舍断”就是涅槃。因为依靠涅槃,对诸欲的欲贪既被调伏,也被舍断,所以说涅槃是欲贪的调伏和欲贪的舍断。“或自己能遍知诸欲”,意思是他们自己将以三种遍知来遍知诸欲。“为如性”就是为如实的状态。“如所行道”就是依照那条道路而修行。巴利
170.Chandarāgavinayo chandarāgappahānanti nibbānaṃ. Nibbānañhi āgamma kāmesu chandarāgo vinīyati ceva pahīyati ca, tasmā nibbānaṃ chandarāgavinayo chandarāgappahānanti ca vuttaṃ. Sāmaṃ vā kāme parijānissantīti sayaṃ vā te kāme tīhi pariññāhi parijānissanti. Tathattāyāti tathabhāvāya. Yathāpaṭipannoti yāya paṭipadāya paṭipanno.
171 “刹帝利少女”等语,是为了说明:以广大而非狭小的善业获得结生的人,投生在能得到衣服、装饰等物的处所。“十五岁少女”就是十五岁的年纪。第二个词也是这样。为什么要取年龄这一点?是为了显示容貌的圆满。因为女人即使生在贫苦家庭,到了这个年龄,容貌也会一点一点变得明净;而男人要到二十岁、二十五岁时才变得明净。“不过长”等语,是说明远离六种缺陷的身体圆满。“色光”就是肤色本身。巴利
171.Khattiyakaññāvātiādi aparittena vipulena kusalena gahitapaṭisandhikaṃ vatthālaṅkārādīni labhanaṭṭhāne nibbattaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Pannarasavassuddesikāti pannarasavassavayā. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Vayapadesaṃ kasmā gaṇhāti? Vaṇṇasampattidassanatthaṃ. Mātugāmassa hi duggatakule nibbattassāpi etasmiṃ kāle thokaṃ thokaṃ vaṇṇāyatanaṃ pasīdati. Purisānaṃ pana vīsativassakāle pañcavīsativassakāle pasannaṃ hoti. Nātidīghātiādīhi chadosavirahitaṃ sarīrasampattiṃ dīpeti. Vaṇṇanibhāti vaṇṇoyeva.
衰老就是被年老摧残。像椽子一样弯曲,就是像屋顶椽子那样弯。已朽坏,就是已经败坏,这里也正显示它弯曲的状态。以杖为依靠,就是以杖为依止,以杖为伴。颤抖,就是身体抖动。病苦,就是被衰老之苦折磨。齿缺,就是因为年老而牙齿残缺。白发,就是头发变白。秃顶,就像被人拔过头发一样,头顶光秃。头秃,就是头顶大面积光秃。有皱纹,就是身上生出了皱纹。斑点散布之身,就是身体上散布着黑白斑点。有病,就是身患疾病。受苦,就是遭受痛苦。巴利
Jiṇṇanti jarājiṇṇaṃ. Gopānasivaṅkanti gopānasī viya vaṅkaṃ. Bhogganti bhaggaṃ, imināpissa vaṅkabhāvameva dīpeti. Daṇḍaparāyaṇanti daṇḍapaṭisaraṇaṃ daṇḍadutiyaṃ. Pavedhamānanti kampamānaṃ. Āturanti jarāturaṃ. Khaṇḍadantanti jiṇṇabhāvena khaṇḍitadantaṃ. Palitakesanti paṇḍarakesaṃ. Vilūnanti luñcitvā gahitakesaṃ viya khallāṭaṃ. Khalitasiranti mahākhallāṭasīsaṃ. Valinanti sañjātavaliṃ. Tilakāhatagattanti setakāḷatilakehi vikiṇṇasarīraṃ. Ābādhikanti byādhikaṃ. Dukkhitanti dukkhapattaṃ.
病得极重,就是病势非常严重。被丢弃在坟场,就是被扔在弃尸林里。这里剩下的内容,和《念处经》里已经说过的相同。在这里,欲贪的调伏本身就是涅槃。巴利
Bāḷhagilānanti adhimattagilānaṃ. Sivathikāya chaḍḍitanti āmakasusāne pātitaṃ. Sesamettha satipaṭṭhāne vuttameva. Idhāpi nibbānaṃyeva chandarāgavinayo.
173 173. 在那时,不会为了伤害自己:在那个时候,他不会为了给自己带来痛苦而刻意去做。只是没有伤害:就是完全没有痛苦。巴利
173.Neva tasmiṃ samaye attabyābādhāyāti tasmiṃ samaye attanopi dukkhatthāya na ceteti. Abyābajjhaṃyevāti niddukkhameva .
174 比丘们,“受是无常的”这句话的意思是:比丘们,因为受是无常的,所以这种“无常”等观察角度本身就是受的过患。而“出离”,就是前面所说的那样。巴利
174.Yaṃ, bhikkhave, vedanā aniccāti, bhikkhave, yasmā vedanā aniccā, tasmā ayaṃ aniccādiākārova vedanāya ādīnavoti attho, nissaraṇaṃ vuttappakāramevāti.
《小苦蕴经》的注释巴利
4. Cūḷadukkhakkhandhasuttavaṇṇanā
175 如是我闻这句,就是《小苦蕴经》。其中在释迦族人中,指的是一个叫释迦的地区。因为那个地区是释迦族王子们居住的地方,所以就被称为释迦。释迦族的来历,在《安巴塔经》里已经讲过了。在迦毗罗卫城,指的是名叫迦毗罗卫的这座城市。这座城因为建在迦毗罗仙人的住处,所以叫迦毗罗卫;世尊把它作为托钵行化的村落。在榕树园,有一位名叫榕树的释迦族人,在亲族聚会的时候,世尊来到迦毗罗卫,他就让人在自己的园林里建了一座精舍,奉献给世尊,世尊就住在那里——这是这句话的意思。玛哈那玛是阿那律长老的兄弟,是世尊叔父的儿子。苏托达那、白饭、斛饭、甘露饭、甘饭,这五个人是兄弟。有一位名叫甘露的王后,是他们的姐妹。帝萨长老是她的儿子。如来和难陀长老是苏托达那王的儿子,玛哈那玛和阿那律长老是白饭王的儿子。阿难长老是甘饭王的儿子,是世尊的堂弟。玛哈那玛年纪更大,是一位证得一来果的圣弟子。巴利
175.Evaṃme sutanti cūḷadukkhakkhandhasuttaṃ. Tattha sakkesūti evaṃnāmake janapade. So hi janapado sakyānaṃ rājakumārānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānattā sakyātveva saṅkhyaṃ gato. Sakyānaṃ pana uppatti ambaṭṭhasutte āgatāva. Kapilavatthusminti evaṃnāmake nagare. Tañhi kapilassa isino nivāsaṭṭhāne katattā kapilavatthūti vuttaṃ, taṃ gocaragāmaṃ katvā. Nigrodhārāmeti nigrodho nāma sakko, so ñātisamāgamakāle kapilavatthuṃ āgate bhagavati attano ārāme vihāraṃ kāretvā bhagavato niyyātesi, tasmiṃ viharatīti attho. Mahānāmoti anuruddhattherassa bhātā bhagavato cuḷapituputto. Suddhodano sukkodano sakkodano dhotodano amitodanoti ime pañca janā bhātaro. Amitā nāma devī tesaṃ bhaginī. Tissatthero tassā putto. Tathāgato ca nandatthero ca suddhodanassa puttā, mahānāmo ca anuruddhatthero ca sukkodanassa. Ānandatthero amitodanassa, so bhagavato kaniṭṭho. Mahānāmo mahallakataro sakadāgāmī ariyasāvako.
“长久以来”这句话是在说明:从我证得一来果开始,在漫长的时间里,我都一直知道。“贪法”就是指被称为贪的那些法,这里是针对种种不同形态的贪而说的。其余两种(嗔法、痴法)也应当同样理解。“遍取而住立”的意思是:灭尽之后仍然住立。因为这里的“遍取”,在“遍取所有象军、遍取所有马军、遍取所有车军、遍取所有步军之后,把他活着放走”这段经文里,是作为“执取”的意思出现的;而在“诸比丘,修习无常想、多修习无常想,能遍取一切欲贪”这段经文里,则是“灭尽”的意思。这里也是指“灭尽”。所以说“遍取已,就是灭尽已”。巴利
Dīgharattanti mayhaṃ sakadāgāmiphaluppattito paṭṭhāya cirarattaṃ jānāmīti dasseti. Lobhadhammāti lobhasaṅkhātā dhammā, nānappakārakaṃ lobhaṃyeva sandhāya vadati. Itaresupi dvīsu eseva nayo. Pariyādāya tiṭṭhantīti khepetvā tiṭṭhanti. Idañhi pariyādānaṃ nāma ‘‘sabbaṃ hatthikāyaṃ pariyādiyitvā sabbaṃ assakāyaṃ sabbaṃ rathakāyaṃ sabbaṃ pattikāyaṃ pariyādiyitvā jīvantaṃyeva naṃ osajjeyya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.126) ettha gahaṇe āgataṃ. ‘‘Aniccasaññā, bhikkhave, bhāvitā bahulīkatā sabbaṃ kāmarāgaṃ pariyādiyatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.102) ettha khepane. Idhāpi khepane adhippetaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘pariyādiyitvāti khepetvā’’ti.
他问的是:“何以我有时候贪法也会占据我的心并持续存在?”据说这位国王曾认为:“通过一来道,贪、嗔、痴被彻底断除。”他知道自己还有未断除的烦恼,但以那些未断除的为依据,便以为已经断除的烦恼日后还会再次生起。圣弟子会产生这样的疑惑吗?会的,会产生。为什么?因为对教理分类不通达。对于“这个烦恼是被某条道所断”这一教理分类不通达的圣弟子,也会这样想。难道他没有省察吗?有。但那种省察并非所有人都圆满。有人只省察已断的烦恼,有人只省察剩余的烦恼,有人只省察道,有人只省察果,有人只省察涅槃。然而在这五种省察中,一种或两种都没有获得,是不应该的。因此,对于省察不圆满的人,由于对“道所断烦恼”这一教理分类不通达,就会产生这样的疑惑。巴利
Yena me ekadā lobhadhammāpīti yena mayhaṃ ekekasmiṃ kāle lobhadhammāpi cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭhantīti pucchati. Ayaṃ kira rājā ‘‘sakadāgāmimaggena lobhadosamohā niravasesā pahīyantī’’ti saññī ahosi, ayaṃ ‘‘appahīnaṃ me atthī’’tipi jānāti, appahīnakaṃ upādāya pahīnakampi puna pacchatovāvattatīti saññī hoti. Ariyasāvakassa evaṃ sandeho uppajjatīti? Āma uppajjati. Kasmā? Paṇṇattiyā akovidattā. ‘‘Ayaṃ kileso asukamaggavajjho’’ti imissā paṇṇattiyā akovidassa hi ariyasāvakassapi evaṃ hoti. Kiṃ tassa paccavekkhaṇā natthīti? Atthi. Sā pana na sabbesaṃ paripuṇṇā hoti. Eko hi pahīnakilesameva paccavekkhati. Eko avasiṭṭhakilesameva, eko maggameva, eko phalameva, eko nibbānameva. Imāsu pana pañcasu paccavekkhaṇāsu ekaṃ vā dve vā no laddhuṃ na vaṭṭati. Iti yassa paccavekkhaṇā na paripuṇṇā, tassa maggavajjhakilesapaṇṇattiyaṃ akovidattā evaṃ hoti.
176 正是你自己的贪、嗔、痴——意思是:那贪、嗔、痴在你的心相续中并没有断除,你却自以为已经断除了。“而那是你的”——就是说,那是属于你的贪、嗔、痴法。“对诸欲”——指两种欲。“你不应享用”——意思是说,你应当像我们一样出家。巴利
176.Soeva kho teti soyeva lobho doso moho ca tava santāne appahīno, tvaṃ pana pahīnasaññī ahosīti dasseti. So ca hi teti so tuyhaṃ lobhadosamohadhammo. Kāmeti duvidhe kāme. Na paribhuñjeyyāsīti mayaṃ viya pabbajeyyāsīti dasseti.
177 “少味”是指快乐很少。“多苦”是指这里现世和来世的苦本来就很多。“多忧恼”是指这里现世和来世的忧恼烦恼本来就很多。“过患”是指现世和来世的灾祸。“在这里更多”是指在这些欲乐中,这个过患本来就更多。但它的滋味,比起雪山来,就像一粒芥子那么少,那么微不足道。“即使玛哈那玛如此”是说,玛哈那玛啊,即使圣弟子已经这样了。“如实”是按照事物的真实样子。这是说明他以正确的道理、以原因、用智慧清楚地照见了。“其中以慧”,是指以观慧、以下二道智,这就是此句的意思。“他”是指那位以二道已见诸欲过患的圣弟子。“喜与乐”是以此显示有喜的二禅。或比其他更寂静者:比那二禅更寂静的其他,即上二禅与二道。“尚未不转向诸欲”:然而,那位已通达并安住于二道的圣弟子,因为尚未证得更高的禅那或道,所以还做不到不转向诸欲;既然还没有“不转向”,也就谈不上“不涉入”;既然仍在转向,那就确实是有涉入的。为什么呢?因为无论是靠四种禅那镇伏而得的断,还是靠二道彻底而得的断,此时都还不存在。巴利
177.Appassādāti parittasukhā. Bahudukkhāti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikadukkhamevettha bahukaṃ. Bahupāyāsāti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyiko upāyāsakilesoyevettha bahu. Ādīnavoti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyiko upaddavo. Ettha bhiyyoti etesu kāmesu ayaṃ ādīnavoyeva bahu. Assādo pana himavantaṃ upanidhāya sāsapo viya appo, parittako. Iti cepi mahānāmāti mahānāma evaṃ cepi ariyasāvakassa. Yathābhūtanti yathāsabhāvaṃ. Sammā nayena kāraṇena paññāya suṭṭhu diṭṭhaṃ hotīti dasseti. Tattha paññāyāti vipassanāpaññāya, heṭṭhāmaggadvayañāṇenāti attho. Socāti so eva maggadvayena diṭṭhakāmādīnavo ariyasāvako. Pītisukhanti iminā sappītikāni dve jhānāni dasseti. Aññaṃ vā tato santataranti tato jhānadvayato santataraṃ aññaṃ uparijhānadvayañceva maggadvayañca. Neva tāva anāvaṭṭī kāmesu hotīti atha kho so dve magge paṭivijjhitvā ṭhitopi ariyasāvako upari jhānānaṃ vā maggānaṃ vā anadhigatattā neva tāva kāmesu anāvaṭṭī hoti, anāvaṭṭino anābhogo na hoti. Āvaṭṭino sābhogoyeva hoti. Kasmā? Catūhi jhānehi vikkhambhanappahānassa, dvīhi maggehi samucchedappahānassa abhāvā.
我也是这样——不只是你一个人如此,我也是这样。在正觉之前——就是在道正觉之前更早的时候。已经用智慧善见——这里指的是断除烦恼遮蔽的智慧善见。没有获得喜乐——没有证得那两种有喜的禅那。或者其他比这更寂静的——这里指的是更高的两种禅那以及四种道。我完全了知——我彻底了知了。巴利
Mayhampikhoti na kevalaṃ tuyheva, atha kho mayhampi. Pubbeva sambodhāti maggasambodhito paṭhamatarameva. Paññāya sudiṭṭhaṃ hotīti ettha orodhanāṭakā pajahanapaññā adhippetā. Pītisukhaṃ nājjhagamanti sappītikāni dve jhānāni na paṭilabhiṃ. Aññaṃ vā tato santataranti idha upari jhānadvayaṃ ceva cattāro ca maggā adhippetā. Paccaññāsinti paṭiaññāsiṃ.
179 179.“玛哈那玛,有一次……”这段话为什么开始讲?这是一个单独的连结。前面已经讲了欲的滋味和欲的过患,却没有讲出离;为了讲出离,才开始了这段开示。再者,沉溺欲乐是一个极端,自我折磨是另一个极端:为了以果定为顶端,宣说“从这两个极端解脱出来,这就是我的教法”,并借此展示整个教法,也才开始了这段开示。巴利
179.Ekamidāhaṃ mahānāma samayanti kasmā āraddhaṃ? Ayaṃ pāṭiyekko anusandhi. Heṭṭhā kāmānaṃ assādopi ādīnavopi kathito , nissaraṇaṃ na kathitaṃ, taṃ kathetuṃ ayaṃ desanā āraddhā. Kāmasukhallikānuyogo hi eko anto attakilamathānuyogo ekoti imehi antehi muttaṃ mama sāsananti upari phalasamāpattisīsena sakalasāsanaṃ dassetumpi ayaṃ desanā āraddhā.
在灵鹫山:那座山有一个像秃鹫一样的山峰,所以叫灵鹫山。或者因为秃鹫住在它的山峰上,也叫灵鹫山。在仙吞山侧:就是仙吞山的侧面。在黑岩上:指黑色的石板岩。他们是直立者:他们一直站着,不坐下。由自苦行而生者:指通过站立等自己的努力而产生的苦受。他们无法说出别的原因,就把这事归到尼干陀身上,说“尼干陀,贤友啊”。他是全知者、全见者:这是说我们的这位导师知道、看见过去、未来、现在的一切。他自称有无余的智见:我们的这位导师,了知无余的法,自称有被称为无余的智见,而且他这样自称:“无论我在行走、站立……都已现前。”其中,satataṃ 是恒常的意思。samitaṃ 是同一个词的另一种说法。巴利
Gijjhakūṭe pabbateti tassa pabbatassa gijjhasadisaṃ kūṭaṃ atthi, tasmā gijjhakūṭoti vuccati. Gijjhā vā tassa kūṭesu nivasantītipi gijjhakūṭoti vuccati. Isigilipasseti isigilipabbatassa passe. Kāḷasilāyanti kāḷavaṇṇe piṭṭhipāsāṇe. Ubbhaṭṭhakā hontīti uddhaṃyeva ṭhitakā honti anisinnā. Opakkamikāti ubbhaṭṭhakādinā attano upakkamena nibbattitā. Nigaṇṭho, āvusoti aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ vattuṃ asakkontā nigaṇṭhassa upari pakkhipiṃsu. Sabbaññū sabbadassāvīti so amhākaṃ satthā atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ sabbaṃ jānāti passatīti dasseti. Aparisesaṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ paṭijānātīti so amhākaṃ satthā aparisesaṃ dhammaṃ jānanto aparisesasaṅkhātaṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ paṭijānāti, paṭijānanto ca evaṃ paṭijānāti ‘‘carato ca me tiṭṭhato ca…pe… paccupaṭṭhita’’nti. Tattha satatanti niccaṃ. Samitanti tasseva vevacanaṃ.
180 “贤友,你们尼干陀难道知道‘只有这么多苦已经被消尽’吗?”这里世尊是在说明:一个人做了什么,他自己是知道的。比如借了二十钱币的债,还了十钱后,知道“我已经还了十,还欠十”;全部还完后,知道“全部还完了”。又比如收割田地三分之一后,知道“已经割了一分,还剩两分”;再割一分,知道“已经割了两分,还剩一分”;那一分也割完后,知道“全部完成了”。同样,在一切事情上,已做的和未做的他都知道,你们也应当这样知道。接着“为了断除不善法”,他用这句话来问:在你们的教法中,到底有没有这样的尼干陀——已经断除不善、修习善法、达到清净的人?巴利
180.Kiṃ pana tumhe, āvuso, nigaṇṭhā jānātha ettakaṃ vā dukkhaṃ nijjiṇṇanti idaṃ bhagavā puriso nāma yaṃ karoti, taṃ jānāti. Vīsatikahāpaṇe iṇaṃ gahetvā dasa datvā ‘‘dasa me dinnā dasa avasiṭṭhā’’ti jānāti, tepi datvā ‘‘sabbaṃ dinna’’nti jānāti. Khettassa tatiyabhāgaṃ lāyitvā ‘‘eko bhāgo lāyito, dve avasiṭṭhā’’ti jānāti. Puna ekaṃ lāyitvā ‘‘dve lāyitā, eko avasiṭṭho’’ti jānāti. Tasmimpi lāyite ‘‘sabbaṃ niṭṭhita’’nti jānāti, evaṃ sabbakiccesu katañca akatañca jānāti, tumhehipi tathā ñātabbaṃ siyāti dasseti. Akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ pahānanti iminā akusalaṃ pahāya kusalaṃ bhāvetvā suddhantaṃ patto nigaṇṭho nāma tumhākaṃ sāsane atthīti pucchati.
“如果真是这样”:这是说,当你们处在这样不了解的状态时。
“残忍”:指行为残忍。
“血手”:指杀害众生、夺人性命,双手沾满鲜血的人。其实,即使杀生的人手上没有沾到血,也仍然被称为“血手”。
“粗恶业者”:指做暴恶之事的人。也就是对母亲、父亲,以及对如法的沙门、婆罗门等造下罪过的人。或者指捕鹿者等从事粗猛行业的人。巴利
Evaṃ santeti tumhākaṃ evaṃ ajānanabhāve sati. Luddāti luddācārā. Lohitapāṇinoti pāṇe jīvitā voropentā lohitena makkhitapāṇino. Pāṇaṃ hi hanantassapi yassa lohitena pāṇi na makkhiyati , sopi lohitapāṇītveva vuccati. Kurūrakammantāti dāruṇakammā. Mātari pitari dhammikasamaṇabrāhmaṇādīsu ca katāparādhā. Māgavikādayo vā kakkhaḷakammā.
“贤友,并非乔达摩啊”——尼干陀们心里想:“这个人是在指出我们教义里的毛病,我们也把毛病安到他身上去。”于是就开口说了这话。这段话的意思是:“贤友乔达摩,像你们那样穿着上等衣服、吃着白米饭配肉、住在像天宫一样漂亮的香室里,靠享乐去得到快乐——这样靠享乐是不可能得到快乐的。可像我们这样,通过蹲踞苦行等各种方式去受苦,这才是靠受苦来得到快乐。”
“再者,贤友,如果靠享乐……”这句话是说:假如靠享乐就能得到快乐,那么国王就应该得到快乐。这是为了显示这一点而说的。其中,“摩揭陀”指摩揭陀国的统治者;“舍尼耶”是他的名字;“频毗”是他的身体之名。他是那(国家)的精华,长得好看、令人欢喜,因身体圆满而被称为频婆娑罗。“更住于乐”这句,是那些尼干陀针对国王在三座宫殿中与三种年龄的舞女一起享受福报之事而说的。“必定”指决定无疑。“轻率、未加思择”指轻率而为,没有仔细省察;就像贪者因贪而说、嗔者因嗔而说、痴者因痴而说那样,说明话就是这样说出来的。巴利
Na kho, āvuso, gotamāti idaṃ nigaṇṭhā ‘‘ayaṃ amhākaṃ vāde dosaṃ deti, mayampissa dosaṃ āropemā’’ti maññamānā ārabhiṃsu. Tassattho, ‘‘āvuso, gotama yathā tumhe paṇītacīvarāni dhārentā sālimaṃsodanaṃ bhuñjantā devavimānavaṇṇāya gandhakuṭiyā vasamānā sukhena sukhaṃ adhigacchatha, na evaṃ sukhena sukhaṃ adhigantabbaṃ. Yathā pana mayaṃ ukkuṭikappadhānādīhi nānappakāraṇaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavāma, evaṃ dukkhena sukhaṃ adhigantabba’’nti. Sukhena ca hāvusoti idaṃ sace sukhena ca sukhaṃ adhigantabbaṃ siyā. Rājā adhigaccheyyāti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ . Tattha māgadhoti magadharaṭṭhassa issaro. Seniyoti tassa nāmaṃ. Bimbīti attabhāvassa nāmaṃ. So tassa sārabhūto dassanīyo pāsādiko attabhāvasamiddhiyā bimbisāroti vuccati. Sukhavihāritaroti idaṃ te nigaṇṭhā rañño tīsu pāsādesu tividhavayehi nāṭakehi saddhiṃ sampattianubhavanaṃ sandhāya vadanti. Addhāti ekaṃsena. Sahasā appaṭisaṅkhāti sāhasaṃ katvā, appaccavekkhitvāva yathā ratto rāgavasena duṭṭho dosavasena mūḷho mohavasena bhāsati, evamevaṃ vācā bhāsitāti dasseti.
在这里,我将反问,就是我就那个问题发问。依你们所能接受的,就是依照你们所喜欢的方式。能,就是有能力做到。巴利
Tattha paṭipucchissāmīti tasmiṃ atthe pucchissāmi. Yathā vo khameyyāti yathā tumhākaṃ rucceyya. Pahotīti sakkoti.
不动摇:就是不被动摇。领受纯一之乐:就是领受不间断的乐。贤友们,我尼干陀确实能够……领受纯一之乐——他说这话,是为了显示自己在果等至中的乐。在这里,为了确立论题,在国王那一轮问答中,是以七为起点来发问的。因为如果说了七日七夜都不够,就可以接着用六、五、四来追问乐的问题。但在纯修那一轮中,如果已经说了七,再被问六、五、四,就太平常了,所以从一开头就开始教导。其余各处都很浅显易懂。巴利
Aniñjamānoti acalamāno. Ekantasukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedīti nirantarasukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedī. ‘‘Ahaṃ kho , āvuso, nigaṇṭhā pahomi…pe… ekantasukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedī’’ti idaṃ attano phalasamāpattisukhaṃ dassento āha. Ettha ca kathāpatiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ rājavāre satta ādiṃ katvā pucchā katā. Satta rattindivāni nappahotīti hi vutte cha pañca cattārīti sukhaṃ pucchituṃ hoti. Suddhavāre pana sattāti vutte puna cha pañca cattārīti vuccamānaṃ anacchariyaṃ hoti, tasmā ekaṃ ādiṃ katvā desanā katā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
《推度经》的注释巴利
5. Anumānasuttavaṇṇanā
181 “如是我闻”这一段,就是《推度经》。其中“在跋伽人当中”:是在一个叫跋伽的地方,这个词的含义可以按照前面说过的来解释。“在鳄鱼山”:是在一座叫鳄鱼山的城里。据说在给这座城勘定地基的那天,附近一个水池里有鳄鱼发出声音,吼了一声。后来城建好了,就给它取名叫鳄鱼山。“在有怖林”:是在一座叫有怖的树林里。也有写成“有怖伽罗林”的版本。“在鹿野苑”:那片树林所在的地方,是给鹿和鸟施无畏的地方,所以叫鹿野苑。巴利
181.Evaṃme sutanti anumānasuttaṃ. Tattha bhaggesūti evaṃnāmake janapade, vacanattho panettha vuttānusāreneva veditabbo. Susumāragireti evaṃnāmake nagare. Tassa kira nagarassa vatthupariggahadivase avidūre udakarahade suṃsumāro saddamakāsi, giraṃ nicchāresi. Atha nagare niṭṭhite suṃsumāragiraṃ tvevassa nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Bhesakaḷāvaneti bhesakaḷānāmake vane. ‘‘Bhesagaḷāvane’’tipi pāṭho. Migadāyeti taṃ vanaṃ migapakkhīnaṃ abhayadinnaṭṭhāne jātaṃ, tasmā migadāyoti vuccati.
“令欢喜”:就是让人产生意愿。“请说”:意思是请他们以教诫和教导的方式来说,也就是请他们教导。“我应被说”:意思是我应当被你们说,应当被教导、应当被教诫。“而他成为难说者”:意思是他很难被劝说,被说的时候受不了。“以造成难说性的诸法”:就是以那些导致难劝谏的、后面会讲到的十六种法。“不接受教导的人”:当有人对他说法时,他说:“你们凭什么说我?我自己知道什么是合适、什么是不合适,什么有罪、什么无罪,什么有意义、什么没意义。”他不从正面接受教导,而是从反面接受,所以被称为不接受教导的人。巴利
Pavāretīti icchāpeti. Vadantūti ovādānusāsanivasena vadantu, anusāsantūti attho. Vacanīyomhīti ahaṃ tumhehi vattabbo, anusāsitabbo ovaditabboti attho. So ca hoti dubbacoti so ca dukkhena vattabbo hoti, vutto na sahati. Dovacassakaraṇehīti dubbacabhāvakārakehi upari āgatehi soḷasahi dhammehi. Appadakkhiṇaggāhī anusāsaninti yo hi vuccamāno tumhe maṃ kasmā vadatha, ahaṃ attano kappiyākappiyaṃ sāvajjānavajjaṃ atthānatthaṃ jānāmīti vadati. Ayaṃ anusāsaniṃ padakkhiṇato na gaṇhāti, vāmato gaṇhāti, tasmā appadakkhiṇaggāhīti vuccati.
对卑劣的欲望,就是指低劣的、对不该生起之事的希求。抵触,就是成为对立者,站在相反的一方。排斥,就是这样冲撞对方:“你这个愚痴、不明事理的人,你说的话算什么?你居然也以为自己有资格说话?”反责,就是这样把罪推回去:“你也犯了某某罪,你先去把那个处理掉吧。”巴利
Pāpikānaṃ icchānanti lāmakānaṃ asantasambhavanapatthanānaṃ. Paṭippharatīti paṭiviruddho, paccanīko hutvā tiṭṭhati, apasādetīti kiṃ nu kho tuyhaṃ bālassa abyattassa bhaṇitena, tvampi nāma bhaṇitabbaṃ maññissasīti evaṃ ghaṭṭeti. Paccāropetīti, tvampi khosi itthannāmaṃ āpattiṃ āpanno, taṃ tāva paṭikarohīti evaṃ paṭiāropeti.
用另一个理由或另一句话来遮掩另一个理由或另一句话,就叫“以其他掩盖其他”。当有人对他说“你犯了罪”时,他却说:“谁犯了?犯了什么?在哪里犯的?你们在说谁?在说什么?”当有人对他说“你见过像这样的事吗”时,他就把耳朵凑过去说:“我听不见。”所谓“把话题引向外面”,就是当有人问他“你犯了某某罪”时,他回答“我去过华氏城”;接着对方说“我们不是问你有没有去华氏城,是问你的罪”,他又说“我从那里去了王宫”,或者说去了婆罗门家,然后又说“我在那里得到了猪肉”等等。像这样说着各种话,就是把话题向外岔开。巴利
Aññenaññaṃ paṭicaratīti aññena kāraṇena vacanena vā aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ vacanaṃ vā paṭicchādeti. ‘‘Āpattiṃ āpannosī’’ti vutte ‘‘ko āpanno, kiṃ āpanno, kismiṃ āpanno, kaṃ bhaṇatha, kiṃ bhaṇathā’’ti vā vadati. ‘‘Evarūpaṃ kiñci tayā diṭṭha’’nti vutte ‘‘na suṇāmī’’ti sotaṃ vā upaneti. Bahiddhā kathaṃ apanāmetīti ‘‘itthannāmaṃ āpattiṃ āpannosī’’ti puṭṭho ‘‘pāṭaliputtaṃ gatomhī’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘na tava pāṭaliputtagamanaṃ pucchāma, āpattiṃ pucchāmā’’ti vutte ‘‘tato rājagehaṃ gatomhī’’ti, rājagehaṃ vā yāhi brāhmaṇagehaṃ vā, āpattiṃ āpannosīti. Tattha me sūkaramaṃsaṃ laddhantiādīni vadanto kathaṃ bahiddhā vikkhipati.
“事迹”是指自己的行迹。所谓“不能详尽叙述”:贤友,当被问到“你住在哪里?依止谁而住?”或者你声称“我亲眼见到这个人犯戒”时,接着问他:“你当时在做什么?这个人在做什么?你在哪里?他又在哪里?”像这样以种种方式追问他的行迹时,他没办法详尽地说清楚。巴利
Apadāneti attano cariyāya. Na sampāyatīti, āvuso, tvaṃ kuhiṃ vasasi, kaṃ nissāya vasasīti vā, yaṃ tvaṃ vadesi ‘‘mayā esa āpattiṃ āpajjanno diṭṭho’’ti. Tvaṃ tasmiṃ samaye kiṃ karosi, ayaṃ kiṃ karoti, kattha vā tvaṃ acchasi kattha vā ayantiādinā nayena cariyaṃ puṭṭho sampādetvā kathetuṃ na sakkoti.
183 在此,“贤友”是说:贤友,在那十六种法当中。“应当自己这样推度自己”是说:应当自己这样推度、衡量、判断自己。巴利
183.Tatrāvusoti , āvuso, tesu soḷasasu dhammesu. Attanāva attānaṃ evaṃ anuminitabbanti evaṃ attanāva attā anumetabbo tuletabbo tīretabbo.
184 应当观察,就是应当被观察。日夜修学,意思是无论白天还是夜晚都在修学,也就是日夜在善法中修学时,应当只让喜和欢悦生起。巴利
184.Paccavekkhitabbanti paccavekkhitabbo. Ahorattānusikkhināti divāpi rattimpi sikkhantena, ratiñca divā ca kusalesu dhammesu sikkhantena pītipāmojjameva uppādetabbanti attho.
在清澈的水里,或者在一碗干净的水中。面容相就是脸的倒影。尘是外来的灰尘。污点是在那里长出来的痣、斑点或小疙瘩。断除所有这些恶不善法这句话,是用来说明一切断除。怎么说明呢?当出家人这样反思:这些不善法对出家人来说不合适,由此生起反思,就是反思断除。以戒为立足点,开始修遍作,成就八等至的人,这是镇伏断除。以等至为立足点,增长观智的人,这是彼分断除。增长观智之后修习圣道的人,这是正断断除。到达果位时,是止息断除;到达涅槃时,是出离断除。这样,在这部经里就确实说明了全部的断除。巴利
Acche vā udakapatteti pasanne vā udakabhājane. Mukhanimittanti mukhapaṭibimbaṃ. Rajanti āgantukarajaṃ. Aṅgaṇanti tattha jātakaṃ tilakaṃ vā piḷakaṃ vā. Sabbepime pāpake akusale dhamme pahīneti iminā sabbappahānaṃ kathesi. Kathaṃ? Ettakā akusalā dhammā pabbajitassa nānucchavikāti paṭisaṅkhānaṃ uppādayato hi paṭisaṅkhānappahānaṃkathitaṃ hoti. Sīlaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ katvā kasiṇaparikammaṃ ārabhitvā aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattentassa vikkhambhanappahānaṃ kathitaṃ. Samāpattiṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhentassa tadaṅgappahānaṃ kathitaṃ. Vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā maggaṃ bhāventassa samucchedappahānaṃ kathitaṃ. Phale āgate paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ, nibbāne āgate nissaraṇappahānanti evaṃ imasmiṃ sutte sabbappahānaṃ kathitaṃva hoti.
这部经,古德们说,名叫“比丘巴帝摩卡”。每天应当省察三遍。清晨进入住处坐下后,应当省察:“我心中有没有这些烦恼?”如果发现还有,就应当努力断除它们。如果没发现,就应当欢喜地想:“我真是善出家了。”吃完饭之后,在夜间住处或日间住处坐下,也应当省察。傍晚在住处坐下,也应当省察。如果做不到三遍,就应当省察两遍。如果连两遍也做不到,那就务必省察一遍,绝不可以不省察——古德们是这样说的。其余部分在各处都很浅显易懂。巴利
Idañhi suttaṃ bhikkhupātimokkhaṃ nāmāti porāṇā vadanti. Idaṃ divasassa tikkhattuṃ paccavekkhitabbaṃ. Pāto eva vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pavisitvā nisinnena ‘‘ime ettakā kilesā atthi nu kho mayhaṃ natthī’’ti paccavekkhitabbā. Sace atthīti passati, tesaṃ pahānāya vāyamitabbaṃ. No ce passati, supabbajitosmīti attamanena bhavitabbaṃ. Bhattakiccaṃ katvā rattiṭṭhāne vā divāṭṭhāne vā nisīditvāpi paccavekkhitabbaṃ. Sāyaṃ vasanaṭṭhāne nisīditvāpi paccavekkhitabbaṃ. Tikkhattuṃ asakkontena dve vāre paccavekkhitabbaṃ. Dve vāre asakkontena pana avassaṃ ekavāraṃ paccavekkhitabbaṃ, appaccavekkhituṃ na vaṭṭatīti vadanti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
《心荒芜经》注释巴利
6. Cetokhilasuttavaṇṇanā
185 185.“如是我闻”这句是《心荒芜经》的开头。其中,“心荒芜”指心的僵硬状态、心的污秽状态、心的枯桩状态。“心的系缚”指像把心绑住、攥在拳头里一样抓住它,所以叫心的系缚。“增长”等处:以戒而有增长,以道而有发育,以涅槃而有广大;或者以戒和定而有增长,以观和道而有发育,以果和涅槃而有广大。“对导师疑惑”指对导师的身体或功德有疑惑。对身体疑惑时,他想:“具足三十二种殊胜大人相、庄严无比的身体,到底是有还是没有?”对功德疑惑时,他想:“能了知过去、未来、现在一切的全知智,到底是有还是没有?”“疑惑”指思来想去而困苦,陷入痛苦,无法作出决断。“不信解”指对“就是这样”无法获得确信。“不净信”指不能深入功德之中,不能以毫无疑惑的状态生起净信,不能变得澄净。“为热勤”指为了焚烧烦恼、发起精进。“为修习”指反复不断地修习。“为相续”指持续不断地用功。“为策励”指策励自身。这是第一种心荒芜,也就是对导师的疑惑所构成的第一种心的僵硬状态。对这位比丘来说,它还没有被断除。“于法”指对教法和证法。对教法疑惑时,人们说“三藏佛语,八万四千法蕴”,他便疑惑:“这到底是有还是没有?”对证法疑惑时,人们说“观行的果是道,道的果是果,舍弃一切行是涅槃”,他便疑惑:“那到底是有还是没有?”“于僧伽疑惑”指依照“善修行”等语句,如此修行、具足四向四果的八种人合在一起名为僧伽,他疑惑:“这到底是有还是没有?”对学处疑惑时,人们说“有增上戒学、增上心学、增上慧学”,他疑惑:“这到底是有还是没有?”这是第五种,也就是对同梵行者怀有忿怒所构成的第五种心的僵硬状态、污秽状态、枯桩状态。巴利
185.Evaṃme sutanti cetokhilasuttaṃ. Tattha cetokhilāti cittassa thaddhabhāvā kacavarabhāvā khāṇukabhāvā. Cetaso vinibandhāti cittaṃ bandhitvā muṭṭhiyaṃ katvā viya gaṇhantīti cetaso vinibandhā. Vuddhintiādīsu sīlena vuddhiṃ, maggena viruḷhiṃ, nibbānena vepullaṃ. Sīlasamādhīhi vā vuddhiṃ, vipassanāmaggehi viruḷhiṃ, phalanibbānehi vepullaṃ. Satthari kaṅkhatīti satthu sarīre vā guṇe vā kaṅkhati. Sarīre kaṅkhamāno dvattiṃsavaralakkhaṇappaṭimaṇḍitaṃ nāma sarīraṃ atthi nu kho natthīti kaṅkhati, guṇe kaṅkhamāno atītānāgatapaccuppannajānanasamatthaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ atthi nu kho natthīti kaṅkhati. Vicikicchatīti vicinanto kicchati, dukkhaṃ āpajjati, vinicchetuṃ na sakkoti. Nādhimuccatīti evametanti adhimokkhaṃ na paṭilabhati. Na sampasīdatīti guṇesu otaritvā nibbicikicchabhāvena pasīdituṃ, anāvilo bhavituṃ na sakkoti. Ātappāyāti kilesasantāpakavīriyakaraṇatthāya. Anuyogāyāti punappunaṃ yogāya. Sātaccāyāti satatakiriyāya padhānāyāti padahanatthāya. Ayaṃ paṭhamo cetokhiloti ayaṃ satthari vicikicchāsaṅkhāto paṭhamo cittassa thaddhabhāvo, evametassa bhikkhuno appahīno hoti. Dhammeti pariyattidhamme ca paṭivedhadhamme ca. Pariyattidhamme kaṅkhamāno, tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānīti vadanti, atthi nu kho etaṃ natthīti kaṅkhati. Paṭivedhadhamme kaṅkhamāno vipassanānissando maggo nāma, magganissando phalaṃ nāma, sabbasaṅkhārapaṭinissaggo nibbānaṃ nāmāti vadanti. Taṃ atthi nu kho natthīti kaṅkhati. Saṅghe kaṅkhatīti suppaṭipannotiādīnaṃ padānaṃ vasena evarūpaṃ paṭipadaṃ paṭipannā cattāro maggaṭṭhā cattāro phalaṭṭhāti aṭṭhannaṃ puggalānaṃ samūhabhūto saṅgho nāma, so atthi nu kho natthīti kaṅkhati. Sikkhāya kaṅkhamāno adhisīlasikkhā nāma adhicittasikkhā nāma adhipaññāsikkhā nāmāti vadanti. Sā atthi nu kho natthīti kaṅkhati. Ayaṃ pañcamoti ayaṃ sabrahmacārīsu kopasaṅkhāto pañcamo cittassa thaddhabhāvo kacavarabhāvo khāṇukabhāvo.
186 在种种系缚中,“欲”既指事欲,也指烦恼欲。“身”指自己的身体。“色”指外在的诸色。“随所欲”指想要多少就取多少。“满腹”指把肚子填满。因为把肚子填塞得鼓胀,所以称为“满腹”。“床座乐”指床椅之乐,或者气候适宜之乐。“侧卧乐”指像翻来覆去躺着睡的人那样,右胁或左胁所生起的乐。“睡眠乐”指睡觉的乐。“致力”指专心投入其中而安住。巴利
186. Vinibandhesu kāmeti vatthukāmepi kilesakāmepi. Kāyeti attano kāye. Rūpeti bahiddhā rūpe. Yāvadatthanti yattakaṃ icchati, tattakaṃ. Udarāvadehakanti udarapūraṃ. Tañhi udaraṃ avadehanato udarāvadehakanti vuccati. Seyyasukhanti mañcapīṭhasukhaṃ, utusukhaṃ vā. Passasukhanti yathā samparivattakaṃ sayantassa dakkhiṇapassavāmapassānaṃ sukhaṃ hoti, evaṃ uppannasukhaṃ. Middhasukhanti niddāsukhaṃ. Anuyuttoti yuttapayutto viharati.
“发愿”就是渴望、希求。“以戒”等词中,“戒”指四种清净的戒,“禁”指受持禁戒,“苦行”指修苦行,“梵行”指远离淫欲。“我将成为天人”就是将成为有大威力的天人;“或成为某位天人”就是成为威力较小的天人中的某一位。巴利
Paṇidhāyāti patthayitvā. Sīlenātiādīsu sīlanti catupārisuddhisīlaṃ. Vatanti vatasamādānaṃ. Tapoti tapacaraṇaṃ. Brahmacariyanti methunavirati. Devo vā bhavissāmīti mahesakkhadevo vā bhavissāmi. Devaññataro vāpi appesakkhadevesu vā aññataro.
189 在四神足当中,依靠欲而生起的定,就是欲定;作为精进(勤)的诸行,就是精进行。“具足”是指具备那些法。是神变的足,或者本身成为神变之足,所以叫神足。其余三种也是同样的道理,这里只是简略说明。详细解释则见于《神足分别》,它的含义在《清净道论》中也已经阐明。以上用这四种神足说明了镇伏断。第五项“奋进”,在这里“奋进”指的是在一切应当做的事上都提起精进。“具足奋进十五支”:舍断五种心荒芜、舍断五种心系缚、四种神足、奋进,如此与奋进一起具足十五支。“堪能”是指相应、适合。“为通达”是指以智破除烦恼。“为正觉”是指四道正觉。“无上”是指最胜。“瑜伽安稳”是指脱离四种瑜伽而安稳的阿拉汉果。“为证得”是指获得。“犹如”是表示譬喻义的虚词。“亦(pi)”是表示尊重之义。以这两者,即“犹如”和“亦”,来表示“犹如,诸比丘”。巴利
189. Iddhipādesu chandaṃ nissāya pavatto samādhi chandasamādhi. Padhānabhūtā saṅkhārā padhānasaṅkhārā. Samannāgatanti tehi dhammehi upetaṃ. Iddhiyā pādaṃ, iddhibhūtaṃ vā pādanti iddhipādaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo, ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana iddhipādavibhaṅge āgato yeva. Visuddhimaggepissa attho dīpito. Iti imehi catūhi iddhipādehi vikkhambhanappahānaṃ kathitaṃ. Ussoḷhīyeva pañcamīti ettha ussoḷhīti sabbattha kattabbavīriyaṃ dasseti. Ussoḷhīpannarasaṅgasamannāgatoti pañca cetokhilappahānāni pañca vinibandhappahānāni cattāro iddhipādā ussoḷhīti evaṃ ussoḷhiyā saddhiṃ pannarasahi aṅgehi samannāgato. Bhabboti anurūpo, anucchaviko. Abhinibbhidāyāti ñāṇena kilesabhedāya. Sambodhāyāti catumaggasambodhāya. Anuttarassāti seṭṭhassa. Yogakkhemassāti catūhi yogehi khemassa arahattassa. Adhigamāyāti paṭilābhāya. Seyyathāti opammatthe nipāto. Pīti sambhāvanatthe. Ubhayenapi seyyathāpi nāma, bhikkhaveti dasseti .
母鸡的蛋有八枚、十枚或十二枚。这里虽然母鸡所生的蛋实际上可能比这少或多,但为了言语顺口,才这样说,因为世间的话就是这样顺口说的。“它们应当有”就是那些蛋应当存在。“被母鸡正确地卧孵”:指那只生蛋的母鸡张开翅膀,伏在蛋上面卧着,这就是正确地卧孵。“正确地暖育”:指时时让蛋感受适宜的温度,好好地从四周暖着它们,让它们得到热气。“正确地培护”:指时时好好地从四周抚育它们,让它们沾上母鸡的气味。即使那只母鸡以这三种做法毫不放逸地去做,虽然不一定生起这样的愿望,但那些小鸡确实能够按所说的方式平安地破壳而出。因为那些蛋被母鸡以这三种方式守护着,就不会腐坏;蛋里湿软的部分也会耗尽;蛋壳变薄;脚爪尖和嘴喙变硬;它们自己逐渐成熟。由于蛋壳变薄,外面的光就能透到里面,于是它们心想:“我们长久蜷缩着手脚,住在拥挤狭窄的地方;现在看到外面有光,这下我们会有安乐的住处了。”于是它们想出来,用脚踢蛋壳,伸长脖子,蛋壳就裂成两半。接着它们振动翅膀,发出与那一刻相应的叫声,就这样出来了;出来后,它们游走在村落和田野间,处处增添光彩。巴利
Kukkuṭiyāaṇḍāni aṭṭha vā dasa vā dvādasa vāti ettha pana kiñcāpi kukkuṭiyā vuttappakārato ūnādhikānipi aṇḍāni honti, vacanasiliṭṭhatāya pana evaṃ vuttaṃ. Evañhi loke siliṭṭhaṃ vacanaṃ hoti. Tānassūti tāni assu, bhaveyyunti attho. Kukkuṭiyā sammā adhisayitānīti tāya janettiyā kukkuṭiyā pakkhe pasāretvā tesaṃ upari sayantiyā sammā adhisayitāni. Sammā pariseditānīti kālena kālaṃ utuṃ gāhāpentiyā suṭṭhu samantato seditāni usmīkatāni. Sammā paribhāvitānīti kālena kālaṃ suṭṭhu samantato bhāvitāni, kukkuṭagandhaṃ gāhāpitānīti attho. Kiñcāpi tassā kukkuṭiyāti tassā kukkuṭiyā imaṃ tividhakiriyākaraṇena appamādaṃ katvā kiñcāpi na evaṃ icchā uppajjeyya. Atha kho bhabbāva teti atha kho te kukkuṭapotakā vuttanayena sotthinā abhinibbhijjituṃ bhabbāva. Te hi yasmā tāya kukkuṭiyā evaṃ tīhākārehi tāni aṇḍāni paripālīyamānāni na pūtīni honti. Yopi nesaṃ allasineho, sopi pariyādānaṃ gacchati, kapālaṃ tanukaṃ hoti, pādanakhasikhā ca mukhatuṇḍakañca kharaṃ hoti, sayaṃ paripākaṃ gacchati, kapālassa tanuttā bahi āloko anto paññāyati, tasmā ‘‘ciraṃ vata mayaṃ saṅkuṭitahatthapādā sambādhe sayimhā, ayañca bahi āloko dissati, ettha dāni no sukhavihāro bhavissatī’’ti nikkhamitukāmā hutvā kapālaṃ pādena paharanti, gīvaṃ pasārenti, tato taṃ kapālaṃ dvedhā bhijjati. Atha te pakkhe vidhunantā taṅkhaṇānurūpaṃ viravantā nikkhamantiyeva, nikkhamitvā ca gāmakkhettaṃ upasobhayamānā vicaranti.
“正是如此”这句话,是把譬喻和义理对应起来说明。应当这样结合义理来理解:就像那只母鸡对蛋做三种动作,这位比丘也具足了奋迅十五支。母鸡完成三种动作,蛋就不会腐坏;同样,具足十五支的比丘完成三种随观,他的观智就不会退失。母鸡做三种动作,蛋里的湿气就被耗尽;同样,那位比丘完成三种随观,就耗尽了对随逐三有的爱染湿气。蛋壳变薄,就像这位比丘的无明蛋壳变薄。雏鸡的脚爪和嘴喙变得坚硬锐利,就像这位比丘的观智变得锐利、猛利、清净、勇健。雏鸡成熟的时节,就是那位比丘的观智成熟、增长、入胎的时节。应当知道,雏鸡用脚爪尖或嘴喙啄破蛋壳、拍动翅膀安稳出壳的时节,就等于那位比丘摄持观智之胎而游行,遇到适合的时节、适合的食物、适合的人、适合的听法因缘,在一座之上增长观智,以次第证得的阿拉汉道破开无明蛋壳,展开神通的翅膀,安稳证得阿拉汉果的时节。又像母鸡知道雏鸡已经成熟,便啄破蛋壳;同样,对于那样的比丘,世尊知道他智慧成熟,便——巴利
Evameva khoti idaṃ opammasampaṭipādanaṃ. Taṃ evaṃ atthena saṃsandetvā veditabbaṃ – tassā kukkuṭiyā aṇḍesu tividhakiriyākaraṇaṃ viya hi imassa bhikkhuno ussoḷhīpannarasehi aṅgehi samannāgatabhāvo. Kukkuṭiyā tividhakiriyāsampādanena aṇḍānaṃ apūtibhāvo viya pannarasaṅgasamannāgatassa bhikkhuno tividhānupassanāsampādanena vipassanāñāṇassa aparihāni. Tassā tividhakiriyākaraṇena aṇḍānaṃ allasinehapariyādānaṃ viya tassa bhikkhuno tividhānupassanāsampādanena bhavattayānugatanikantisinehapariyādānaṃ . Aṇḍakalāpānaṃ tanubhāvo viya bhikkhuno avijjaṇḍakosassa tanubhāvo. Kukkuṭapotakānaṃ pādanakhamutuṇḍakānaṃ thaddhakharabhāvo viya bhikkhuno vipassanāñāṇassa tikkhakharavippasannasūrabhāvo. Kukkuṭapotakānaṃ pariṇāmakālo viya bhikkhuno vipassanāñāṇassa pariṇāmakālo vaḍḍhitakālo gabbhaggahaṇakālo. Kukkuṭapotakānaṃ pādanakhasikhāya vā mukhatuṇḍakena vā aṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā pakkhe papphoṭetvā sotthinā abhinikkhamanakālo viya tassa bhikkhuno vipassanāñāṇagabbhaṃ gaṇhāpetvā vicarantassa tajjātikaṃ utusappāyaṃ vā bhojanasappāyaṃ vā puggalasappāyaṃ vā dhammassavanasappāyaṃ vā labhitvā ekāsane nisinnasseva vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhentassa anupubbādhigatena arahattamaggena avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā abhiññāpakkhe papphoṭetvā sotthinā arahattappattakālo veditabbo. Yathā pana kukkuṭapotakānaṃ pariṇatabhāvaṃ ñatvā mātāpi aṇḍakosaṃ bhindati, evaṃ tathārūpassa bhikkhuno ñāṇaparipākaṃ ñatvā satthāpi –
“ 斩断自己的贪爱,就像用手折断秋天的白莲花。
只要修习这条通向寂静的道路,也就是善逝所宣说的涅槃。”巴利
‘‘Ucchinda sinehamattano, kumudaṃ sāradikaṃva pāṇinā; Santimaggameva brūhaya, nibbānaṃ sugatena desita’’nti. (dha. pa. 285) –
以此等方式把光明扩散开来,再用偈颂击打无明卵壳。他在偈颂结束时打破无明卵壳,证得阿拉汉果。从那时起,就像那些小鸡点缀着村庄田地,到处走动一样,这位大漏尽者也把以涅槃为所缘的果定作为目标,点缀着僧园而四处游行。巴利
Ādinā nayena obhāsaṃ pharitvā gāthāya avijjaṇḍakosaṃ paharati, so gāthāpariyosāne avijjāṇḍakosaṃ bhinditvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tato paṭṭhāya yathā te kukkuṭapotakā gāmakkhettaṃ upasobhayamānā tattha tattha vicaranti, evaṃ ayampi mahākhīṇāsavo nibbānarammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā saṅghārāmaṃ upasobhayamāno vicarati.
就这样,在这部经里讲了四种断除。怎么讲的呢?通过断除心的荒芜和心的系缚,讲了审察断;通过四神足,讲了镇伏断;讲到道时,讲了正断;讲到果时,讲了止息断。其余各处都很容易理解。巴利
Iti imasmiṃ sutte cattāri pahānāni kathitāni. Kathaṃ? Cetokhilānañhi cetovinibandhānaṃ pahānena paṭisaṅkhānappapahānaṃ kathitaṃ, iddhipādehi vikkhambhanappahānaṃ kathita, magge āgate samucchedappahānaṃ kathitaṃ, phale āgate paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ kathitaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
7. 《林野经》的注释巴利
7. Vanapatthapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā
190 “如是我闻”这一段,讲的是林野经。其中“林野经”是指林野的因缘,或者说是关于林野的开示。巴利
190.Evaṃme sutanti vanapatthapariyāyaṃ. Tattha vanapatthapariyāyanti vanapatthakāraṇaṃ, vanapatthadesanaṃ vā.
191 依靠林野而住:是指依靠远离人烟的森林丛中的住处,修习沙门法而住。在“未现前”等语中,意思是:先前未现前的念,即使依靠那里而住也不会现前;先前未得定的心,不会得定;先前未灭尽的诸漏,不会灭尽;先前未证得的、称为无上安稳的阿拉汉果,也不会证得。“活命资具”就是维持生命所需的东西。“应筹集”就是应收集起来。“艰难地生起”是说很辛苦才产生。“于夜间时分或于白昼时分”:指夜间那段时间或白天那段时间。在这里,如果在夜间时分审察了知后,就应在夜间离开;如果夜间有猛兽等障碍,就应等到破晓。如果在白昼时分审察了知后,就应在白昼离开;如果白昼有障碍,就应等到日落。巴利
191.Vanapatthaṃ upanissāya viharatīti manussūpacārātikkantaṃ vanasaṇḍasenāsanaṃ nissāya samaṇadhammaṃ karonto viharati. Anupaṭṭhitātiādīsu pubbe anupaṭṭhitā sati taṃ upanissāya viharatopi na upaṭṭhāti, pubbe asamāhitaṃ cittaṃ na samādhiyati, pubbe aparikkhīṇā āsavā na parikkhayaṃ gacchanti, pubbe ananuppattaṃ anuttaraṃ yogakkhemasaṅkhātaṃ arahattañca na pāpuṇātīti attho. Jīvitaparikkhārāti jīvitasambhārā. Samudānetabbāti samāharitabbā. Kasirena samudāgacchantīti dukkhena uppajjanti. Rattibhāgaṃ vā divasabhāgaṃ vāti rattikoṭṭhāse vā divasakoṭṭhāse vā. Ettha ca rattibhāge paṭisañcikkhamānena ñatvā rattiṃyeva pakkamitabbaṃ, rattiṃ caṇḍavāḷādīnaṃ paribandhe sati aruṇuggamanaṃ āgametabbaṃ. Divasabhāge ñatvā divāva pakkamitabbaṃ, divā paribandhe sati sūriyatthaṅgamanaṃ āgametabbaṃ.
192 “思惟”:这样了知沙门法不能成就的情况。但在下一段里,“思惟”:这样了知沙门法能够成就的情况。巴利
192.Saṅkhāpīti evaṃ samaṇadhammassa anipphajjanabhāvaṃ jānitvā. Anantaravāre pana saṅkhāpīti evaṃ samaṇadhammassa nipphajjanabhāvaṃ jānitvā.
194 只要生命还在延续,就应当一直住下去。巴利
194.Yāvajīvanti yāva jīvitaṃ pavattati, tāva vatthabbameva.
195 “那个人”这个词,要和“不应追随”连在一起理解。这里说的“不告而别”,意思是不用向那个人打招呼,就可以直接离开。巴利
195.So puggaloti padassa nānubandhitabboti iminā sambandho. Anāpucchāti idha pana taṃ puggalaṃ anāpucchā pakkamitabbanti attho.
197 了知沙门法这样无法成就之后,就不该再跟着那个人,应当向他告辞再离开。巴利
197.Saṅkhāpīti evaṃ samaṇadhammassa anipphajjanabhāvaṃ ñatvā so puggalo nānubandhitabbo, taṃ āpucchā pakkamitabbaṃ.
198 即使被人驱赶,即使被人赶走。像这样的人,就算有人让他搬来一百捆柴、一百罐水、一百担沙,或者拿棍子打他,说“你别住在这里”,把他赶走,他也应该一一向对方请求原谅,然后一辈子都住下来。巴利
198.Apipanujjamānenāpīti api nikkaḍḍhīyamānenāpi. Evarūpo hi puggalo sacepi dārukalāpasataṃ vā udakaghaṭasataṃ vā vālikambaṇasataṃ vā daṇḍaṃ āharāpeti, mā idha vasīti nikkaḍḍhāpeti vā, taṃ taṃ khamāpetvā yāvajīvaṃ vatthabbamevāti.
8. 蜜丸经注释巴利
8. Madhupiṇḍikasuttavaṇṇanā
199 “如是我闻”这句开头所说的,就是《蜜丸经》。其中“大林”,是指与雪山连成一片、没有人工栽植的天然森林,不像毗舍离那里是人工种植和天然混在一起的。“为日间休息”,是为了白天独处静修。“在贝卢瓦幼树下”,是在幼嫩的贝卢瓦树下。“执杖者”,并不是因为年老体弱才拄杖。这个人其实很年轻,正处在青春年华,只因为喜欢拿杖,就握着一根金杖到处走动,所以被称为“执杖者”。“经行”,是为了消除双腿疲劳而行走,也就是来回走动。“来回漫步、到处游历”,是为了观赏园林、观赏树林、观赏山景等,从这里到那里到处走动。据说他有时无缘无故就从王宫出来,这样随处漫游。“倚杖而立”,是把杖倚靠著,像牧牛童一样把杖竖在身前,双手放在杖顶端,用手背托著下巴,站在一旁。巴利
199. Evaṃ me sutanti madhupiṇḍikasuttaṃ. Tattha mahāvananti himavantena saddhiṃ ekābaddhaṃ aropimaṃ jātivanaṃ, na yathā vesāliyaṃ ropitāropitamissakaṃ. Divāvihārāyāti divā paṭisallānatthāya. Beluvalaṭṭhikāyāti taruṇabeluvarukkhassa. Daṇḍapāṇīti na jarādubbalatāya daṇḍahattho. Ayañhi taruṇo paṭhamavaye ṭhito, daṇḍacittatāya pana suvaṇṇadaṇḍaṃ gahetvā vicarati, tasmā daṇḍapāṇīti vutto. Jaṅghāvihāranti jaṅghākilamathavinodanatthaṃ jaṅghācāraṃ. Anucaṅkamamāno anuvicaramānoti ārāmadassana-vanadassana-pabbatadassanādīnaṃ atthāya ito cito ca vicaramāno. Adhiccanikkhamano kiresa kadāci deva nikkhamitvā evaṃ vicarati. Daṇḍamolubbhāti daṇḍaṃ olumbhitvā gopālakadārako viya daṇḍaṃ purato ṭhapetvā daṇḍamatthake dve hatthe patiṭṭhāpetvā piṭṭhipāṇiṃ hanukena uppīḷetvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi.
200 “持什么见解”,就是问他抱持哪种观点。“宣说什么”,就是问他说什么法。这位王族没有礼敬世尊,只稍微寒暄了一下就直接提问。而且他提问并不是真想弄明白,而是带着轻慢的心在问。为什么?据说他是提婆达多那边的人。提婆达多只要有人来亲近自己,就会去挑拨那人和如来的关系。据说他〔提婆达多〕常这样说:“沙门乔达摩跟我们家族有仇,不希望我们家族兴旺。我那个本该享受转轮王福报的姊妹,他〔乔达摩〕把她抛弃了,说‘让她完蛋吧’,就出家了。我那个外甥,他〔乔达摩〕明知是转轮王的种,却不愿意我们家族兴旺,说‘让他〔外甥〕完蛋吧’,在孩子还很小的时候就让他出家了。我呢,因为离开他〔乔达摩〕活不下去,也跟着出了家。可就算我这样出了家,从我出家那天起,他〔乔达摩〕就从没用正眼看过我。他〔乔达摩〕在大众中说法的时候,也像拿大斧头劈下来一样,说什么‘提婆达多是堕恶趣的人’之类的话。”就这样,这位王族也被提婆达多挑拨了,所以才做出这样的举动。巴利
200.Kiṃvādīti kiṃdiṭṭhiko. Kimakkhāyīti kiṃ katheti. Ayaṃ rājā bhagavantaṃ avanditvā paṭisanthāramattakameva katvā pañhaṃ pucchati. Tampi na aññātukāmatāya, acittīkārena pucchati. Kasmā? Devadattassa pakkhiko kiresa. Devadatto attano santikaṃ āgacchamāne tathāgate bhindati. So kira evaṃ vadeti ‘‘samaṇo gotamo amhākaṃ kulena saddhiṃ verī, na no kulassa vuddhiṃ icchati. Bhaginīpi me cakkavattiparibhogā, taṃ pahāya ‘nassatesā’ti nikkhamitvā pabbaji. Bhāgineyyopi me cakkavattibījanti ñatvā amhākaṃ kulassa vaḍḍhiyā atussanto ‘nassateta’nti tampi daharakāleyeva pabbājesi. Ahaṃ pana tena vinā vattituṃ asakkonto anupabbajito. Evaṃ pabbajitampi maṃ pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya na ujukehi akkhīhi oloketi. Parisamajjhe bhāsantopi mahāpharasunā paharanto viya āpāyiko devadattotiādīni bhāsatī’’ti. Evaṃ ayampi rājā devadattena bhinno, tasmā evamakāsi.
这时,世尊想:“我要用这样的方式来说法,让这位国王没法说‘我问了世尊问题,他却不回答’;同时也要让他听不懂所说的意思。”于是,世尊就按照适合他的程度,讲出了“如说者”等那一番话。巴利
Atha bhagavā yathā ayaṃ rājā mayā pañhe pucchite na kathetīti vattuṃ na labhati, yathā ca bhāsitassa atthaṃ na jānāti, evamassa kathessāmīti tassānucchavikaṃ kathento yathāvādī khotiādimāha.
在这里,“不与世间任何人诤论而住”,意思是:不与世间任何人作诤论性的交谈,不争执。因为如来确实不与世间诤论;反倒是世间与如来诤论:如来宣说“无常”,世间却说“常”;宣说“苦、无我、不净”,世间却说“乐、我、净”,这样就诤论起来。所以世尊说:“诸比丘,我不与世间诤论,是世间与我诤论。诸比丘,说法者不与世间任何人诤论,非法说者才诤论。”(《相应部》3.94)
“如”,是指以什么原因。
“关于欲”,是指关于事欲,也关于烦恼欲。
“那位婆罗门”,是指那位漏尽者婆罗门。
“无有疑惑”,是指没有犹豫。
“已断恶作”,因为已经断除了追悔的恶作和手足无措的恶作,所以叫“已断恶作”。
“于有与非有”,是指在生生不已的“有”中,或者在低劣与殊胜的“有”中;殊胜的“有”称为“非有”,也就是增长圆满的“有”。
“想”,是指烦恼想。或者说,这里用“想”这个名称来指称诸烦恼。因此,整句的意思是:以什么原因,对于那位离欲而住、不被世间贬毁的漏尽婆罗门,烦恼想不再随眠,而我宣说那个原因。世尊就这样阐明了自己漏尽的特质。
“搓揉之后”,是指拔出来之后又搓弄。
“三叉”,是指有三个叉。
“额纹”,是指额上的皱纹;意思是显示额上三道纹路,把皱纹挤出来。
“杖”,是指把杖压下去。也有写成“抓住杖之后”的读法,意思是拿了就走。巴利
Tattha na kenaci loke viggayha tiṭṭhatīti loke kenaci saddhiṃ viggāhikakathaṃ na karoti na vivadati. Tathāgato hi lokena saddhiṃ na vivadati; loko pana tathāgatena saddhiṃ aniccanti vutte niccanti vadamāno, dukkhaṃ, anattā, asubhanti vutte subhanti vadamāno vivadati. Tenevāha ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, lokena vivadāmi, lokova kho, bhikkhave, mayā vivadati, tathā na, bhikkhave, dhammavādī kenaci lokasmiṃ vivadati, adhammavādīva kho, bhikkhave, vivadatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.94). Yathāti yena kāraṇena. Kāmehīti vatthukāmehipi kilesakāmehipi. Taṃ brāhmaṇanti taṃ khīṇāsavaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ. Akathaṃkathinti nibbicikicchaṃ. Chinnakukkuccanti vippaṭisārakukkuccassa ceva hatthapādakukkuccassa ca chinnattā chinnakukkuccaṃ. Bhavābhaveti punappunabbhave, hīnapaṇīte vā bhave, paṇīto hi bhavo vuddhippatto abhavoti vuccati. Saññāti kilesasaññā. Kilesāyeva vā idha saññānāmena vuttā, tasmā yena kāraṇena kāmehi visaṃyuttaṃ viharantaṃ taṃ loke ninnāvādiṃ khīṇāsavabrāhmaṇaṃ kilesasaññā nānusenti, tañca kāraṇaṃ ahaṃ vadāmīti ayamettha attho. Iti bhagavā attano khīṇāsavabhāvaṃ dīpeti. Nillāḷetvāti nīharitvā kīḷāpetvā. Tivisākhanti tisākhaṃ. Nalāṭikanti valibhaṅgaṃ nalāṭe tisso rājiyo dassento valibhaṅgaṃ vuṭṭhāpetvāti attho. Daṇḍamolubbhāti daṇḍaṃ uppīḷetvā. ‘‘Daṇḍamālubbhā’’tipi pāṭho, gahetvā pakkāmīti attho.
201 “某一位”指的是一个没有留下名字的比丘。据说他擅长把握教法的前后关联。世尊刚才说“丹达巴尼并不了知,我只是那样说了”,他听了之后心想:“世尊到底是以什么方式,让丹达巴尼无法了知而宣说了这个论题呢?”他抓住这个关联,为了请十力世尊把这个义理向比丘僧团讲明白,就从座位上起身,把上衣搭到一边肩膀上,举起双手合掌,十指并拢光洁,然后问道:“尊者,世尊是持什么论……”等等。巴利
201.Aññataroti nāmena apākaṭo eko bhikkhu. So kira anusandhikusalo, bhagavatā yathā daṇḍapāṇī na jānāti, tathā mayā kathitanti vutte kinti nu kho bhagavatā aviññeyyaṃ katvā pañho kathitoti anusandhiṃ gahetvā dasabalaṃ yācitvā imaṃ pañhaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa pākaṭaṃ karissāmīti uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā dasanakhasamujjalaṃ añjaliṃ paggayha kiṃvādī pana, bhante bhagavātiādimāha.
“从哪里生起”这句话是中性词,意思是:以什么为原因、在什么原因存在时发生。
“戏论想的种类”中,“种类”指部分。“戏论想”是指与渴爱、慢、见这些戏论相应的想;或者是以“想”这个名称来指戏论本身。所以这里的意思是“戏论的种类”。
“现起”是指转起、发生。
“如果在这里没有可欢喜的”:意思是,在被称为十二处的这个原因存在时,戏论想的种类就会现起;但在这里,如果连一个处都没有可欢喜、可称赞、可执取的,它们就不现起。
其中,“可欢喜”是指可以“我、我所”的方式去欢喜。“可称赞”是指可以说“我、我所”。“可执取”是指对它执取、吞没、认定之后,还牢牢抓住不放的。通过这句话,说明渴爱等在这里根本不转起。
“这即是终点”:欢喜等不存在的这个状态本身,就是贪随眠等的尽头。这个道理在一切处都一样。巴利
Yatonidānanti bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ etaṃ, yena kāraṇena yasmiṃ kāraṇe satīti attho. Papañcasaññāsaṅkhāti ettha saṅkhāti koṭṭhāso. Papañcasaññāti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhipapañcasampayuttā saññā , saññānāmena vā papañcāyeva vuttā. Tasmā papañcakoṭṭhāsāti ayamettha attho. Samudācarantīti pavattanti. Ettha ce natthi abhinanditabbanti yasmiṃ dvādasāyatanasaṅkhāte kāraṇe sati papañcasaññāsaṅkhā samudācaranti, ettha ekāyatanampi ce abhinanditabbaṃ abhivaditabbaṃ ajjhositabbaṃ natthīti attho. Tattha abhininditabbanti ahaṃ mamanti abhinanditabbaṃ. Abhivaditabbanti ahaṃ mamāti vattabbaṃ. Ajjhositabbanti ajjhositvā gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā gahetabbayuttaṃ. Etenettha taṇhādīnaṃyeva appavattiṃ katheti. Esevantoti ayaṃ abhinandanādīnaṃ natthibhāvova rāgānusayādīnaṃ anto. Eseva nayo sabbattha.
关于拿棍棒等行为:如果以某种思心所去拿棍棒,那个思就是“拿棍棒”。如果以某种思去拿刀、去抓刀,那个思就是“拿刀”。吵到顶点的争执,是“斗诤”。各执一词的纷争,是“纷争”。各说各话的争论,是“争辩”。互相指着对方说“你!你!”这种表现,就是“你你之争”。挑拨离间、让人关系破裂,是“两舌”。说与事实不符的假话,应当知道那就是“妄语”。在这里,就是指在这十二处当中的这些烦恼。因为烦恼生起时,是依靠十二处而生起;灭去时,也只是在这十二处中灭去。这样,在哪里生起,就在哪里灭去。这个道理应当通过集谛的问答来说明:巴利
Daṇḍādānādīsu pana yāya cetanāya daṇḍaṃ ādiyati, sā daṇḍādānaṃ. Yāya satthaṃ ādiyati parāmasati, sā satthādānaṃ. Matthakappattaṃ kalahaṃ. Nānāgāhamattaṃ viggahaṃ. Nānāvādamattaṃ vivādaṃ. Tuvaṃ tuvanti evaṃ pavattaṃ tuvaṃ tuvaṃ. Piyasuññakaraṇaṃ pesuññaṃ. Ayathāsabhāvaṃ musāvādaṃ karoti, sā musāvādoti veditabbā. Ettheteti ettha dvādasasu āyatanesu ete kilesā. Kilesā hi uppajjamānāpi dvādasāyatanāni nissāya uppajjanti, nirujjhamānāpi dvādasasu āyatanesuyeva nirujjhanti. Evaṃ yatthuppannā, tattheva niruddhā honti. Svāyamattho samudayasaccapañhena dīpetabbo –
“那么,这渴爱在哪里生起时生起,在哪里安住时安住呢?”这样说之后,以“世间中凡是可爱、可喜的色相,这渴爱就在那里生起时生起,就在那里安住时安住。世间中什么是可爱、可喜的色相?眼在世间是可爱、可喜的色相……”等这样的方式,依照《分别论》203的理路,说明了这渴爱正是在十二处中生起和灭去。正如渴爱在这十二处中生起后,依涅槃而灭尽时,由于不再于诸处现起,所以说它就是在诸处中灭尽的;同样应当知道,这些恶不善法也是在诸处中灭尽的。或者换句话说,前面所说的“欢喜等完全不存在,就是贪随眠等的尽头”。在这被称为“贪随眠等的尽头”的涅槃中,恶不善法无余灭尽。凡是某处不存在的东西,就说它在该处已灭,这个道理应当通过灭谛的问答来阐明。经中确实这样说:“入第二禅的人,寻、伺、语行都已止息……”等等。巴利
‘‘Sā kho panesā taṇhā kattha uppajjamānā uppajjati, kattha nivisamānā nivisatī’’ti vatvā – ‘‘yaṃ loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ, etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, ettha nivisamānā nivisati. Kiñca loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ? Cakkhu loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpa’’ntiādinā (vibha. 203) nayena dvādasasuyeva āyatanesu tassā uppatti ca nirodho ca vutto. Yatheva ca taṇhā dvādasasu āyatanesu uppajjitvā nibbānaṃ āgamma niruddhāpi āyatanesu puna samudācārassa abhāvato āyatanesuyeva niruddhāti vuttā, evamimepi pāpakā akusalā dhammā āyatanesu nirujjhantīti veditabbā. Atha vā yvāyaṃ abhinandanādīnaṃ abhāvova rāgānusayādīnaṃ antoti vutto. Etthete rāgānusayādīnaṃ antoti laddhavohāre nibbāne pāpakā akusalā dhammā aparisesā nirujjhanti. Yañhi yattha natthi, taṃ tattha niruddhaṃ nāma hoti, svāyamattho nirodhapañhena dīpetabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa vitakkavicārā vacīsaṅkhārā paṭippassaddhā hontī’’tiādi (paṭi. ma. 1.83).
202 被导师称赞,就是受到导师的赞扬。对于“智者”这个词,这里的属格也是当作工具格来用,意思是受到智者和其他同梵行者的尊敬。“能够”,就是有能力。巴利
202.Satthu ceva saṃvaṇṇitoti satthārā ca pasaṃsito. Viññūnanti idampi karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ, paṇḍitehi sabrahmacārīhi ca sambhāvitoti attho. Pahotīti sakkoti.
203 即使已经超越了根,超越了蕴,如果有个叫“坚实”的东西存在于根或蕴中,这句话的意思是说,它也同样超越了那个。所谓“如此成就”,就是具有这样的成就,意思是“像这样”。“超越之后”,就是越过之后。“知者知”,是说对应当知道的就是如实知道。“见者见”,是说对应当看见的就是如实看见。或者,就像有些人颠倒执取,明明知道却等于不知道,明明看见却等于没看见,世尊不是这样。世尊知道就是确实知道,看见就是确实看见。他因为能指示、引导观见,所以是“如眼者”;因为能让人了知,所以是“如智者”;因为本性不颠倒,或者因为依教法运转、从内心思考后用语言说出法义,所以是“如法者”;因为最殊胜,所以是“如梵者”。或者也可以这样理解:像眼睛一样存在,所以叫“如眼者”,这些地方的义理应当这样理解。他因为使法运转,所以是“说法者”;因为使法生起,所以是“令转者”;因为能引出义理并有能力示见,所以是“义的引导者”;因为为了证得不死而给予修行方法,所以是“不死之施与者”。“不轻视地”,意思是:即使反复请求,也算是在尊重;即使站在自己弟子智慧的程度,像从须弥山取沙一样,把法说得难以理解,这样说法也还是在尊重。不这样做,不让我们反复请求,不把法说得容易理解,然后才说法——这就是这句话的意思。巴利
203.Atikkammeva mūlaṃ atikkamma khandhanti sāro nāma mūle vā khandhe vā bhaveyya, tampi atikkamitvāti attho. Evaṃsampadanti evaṃsampattikaṃ, īdisanti attho. Atisitvāti atikkamitvā. Jānaṃ jānātīti jānitabbameva jānāti. Passaṃ passatīti passitabbameva passati. Yathā vā ekacco viparītaṃ gaṇhanto jānantopi na jānāti, passantopi na passati, na evaṃ bhagavā. Bhagavā pana jānanto jānātiyeva, passanto passatiyeva. Svāyaṃ dassanapariṇāyakaṭṭhena cakkhubhūto. Viditakaraṇaṭṭhena ñāṇabhūto. Aviparītasabhāvaṭṭhena pariyattidhammappavattanato vā hadayena cintetvā vācāya nicchāritadhammamayoti dhammabhūto. Seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmabhūto. Atha vā cakkhu viya bhūtoti cakkhubhūtoti evametesu padesu attho veditabbo. Svāyaṃ dhammassa vattanato vattā. Pavattāpanato pavattā. Atthaṃ nīharitvā dassanasamatthatāya atthassa ninnetā. Amatādhigamāya paṭipattiṃ dadātīti amatassa dātā. Agaruṃ katvāti punappunaṃ āyācāpentopi hi garuṃ karoti nāma, attano sāvakapāramīñāṇe ṭhatvā sinerūpādato vālukaṃ uddharamāno viya dubbiññeyyaṃ katvā kathentopi garuṃ karotiyeva nāma. Evaṃ akatvā amhe punappunaṃ ayācāpetvā suviññeyyampi no katvā kathehīti vuttaṃ hoti.
204 “Yaṃ kho no, āvuso(贤友,凡我们……)”这句话里,本来按道理应该说成“yaṃ kho vo(凡你们……)”,但那些比丘为了把自己也算进去,就说了“yaṃ kho no(凡我们……)”。或者说,因为所开示的总说本来就是为他们开示的;而世尊对那位长老和对那些比丘来说,都是他们的世尊。所以,联系“世尊”这个词,就这样说:我们的世尊为你们简要开示的总说……巴利
204.Yaṃkho no āvusoti ettha kiñcāpi ‘‘yaṃ kho vo’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā, te pana bhikkhū attanā saddhiṃ saṅgaṇhanto ‘‘yaṃ kho no’’ti āha. Yasmā vā uddesova tesaṃ uddiṭṭhova. Bhagavā pana therassāpi tesampi bhagavāva. Tasmā bhagavāti padaṃ sandhāyapi evamāha, yaṃ kho amhākaṃ bhagavā tumhākaṃ saṃkhittena uddesaṃ uddisitvāti attho.
贤友,在“眼且……”等这段话里,意思是这样的:贤友,以眼净作为所依,以四因所生之色作为所缘,眼识就生起了。“三者聚合触”是说,这三者聚合时,触就生起了。以那个触为缘,通过俱生等方式,以触为条件,受就生起了。那个受所感受的所缘,正是想所识知的;想所识知的,正是寻所寻思的所缘;寻所寻思的,正是虚妄分别所分别的所缘。“以此为因”,就是以这些眼、色等为原因。“虚妄分别之想便会在那人身上生起”,意思是:由于没有遍知,那些虚妄分别的部分就会压倒那人,在他心中生起。在这里,触、受、想是与眼识俱生的;寻则应在眼识之后的无间心等有寻的心中去找;虚妄分别之想是与速行心俱生的。如果是这样,那为什么这里要包含过去和未来的所取呢?因为它们也是这样生起的。正如现在依眼门而起的虚妄分别,是缘于眼、色、触、受、想、寻而生起的;同样地,为了说明在过去和未来那些眼所识之色中,它也是这样生起的,所以才这样说。巴利
Cakkhuñcāvusotiādīsu ayamattho, āvuso, nissayabhāvena cakkhupasādañca ārammaṇabhāvena catusamuṭṭhānikarūpe ca paṭicca cakkhuviññāṇaṃ nāma uppajjati. Tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati phassoti tesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ saṅgatiyā phasso nāma uppajjati. Taṃ phassaṃ paṭicca sahajātādivasena phassapaccayā vedanā uppajjati. Tāya vedanāya yaṃ ārammaṇaṃ vedeti, tadeva saññā sañjānāti, yaṃ saññā sañjānāti, tadeva ārammaṇaṃ vitakko vitakketi. Yaṃ vitakko vitakketi, tadevārammaṇaṃ papañco papañceti. Tatonidānanti etehi cakkhurūpādīhi kāraṇehi. Purisaṃ papañcasaññāsaṅkhā samudācarantīti taṃ apariññātakāraṇaṃ purisaṃ papañcakoṭṭhāsā abhibhavanti, tassa pavattantīti attho. Tattha phassavedanāsaññā cakkhuviññāṇena sahajātā honti. Vitakko cakkhuviññāṇānantarādīsu savitakkacittesu daṭṭhabbo. Papañcasaṅkhā javanena sahajātā honti. Yadi evaṃ kasmā atītānāgataggahaṇaṃ katanti? Tathā uppajjanato. Yatheva hi etarahi cakkhudvāriko papañco cakkhuñca rūpe ca phassavedanāsaññāvitakke ca paṭicca uppanno, evamevaṃ atītānāgatesupi cakkhuviññeyyesu rūpesu tassuppattiṃ dassento evamāha.
在“贤友,且耳……”等经文中,也是同样的道理。但在第六门,所谓“意”就是指有分心;“法”是指以三地诸法为所缘;“意识”则是指转向心或速行心。如果取转向心,那么触、受、想、寻都与转向心同时生起,戏论则与速行心同时生起。如果取速行心,那么连同转向心在内,有分心就称为“意”,这时触等一切也都只与速行心同时生起。然而在意门中,由于过去、未来、现在等一切法都可以成为所缘,所以说“于过去、未来、现在”是完全恰当的。巴利
Sotañcāvusotiādīsupi eseva nayo. Chaṭṭhadvāre pana mananti bhavaṅgacittaṃ. Dhammeti tebhūmakadhammārammaṇaṃ. Manoviññāṇanti āvajjanaṃ vā javanaṃ vā. Āvajjane gahite phassavedanāsaññāvitakkā āvajjanasahajātā honti. Papañco javanasahajāto. Javane gahite sahāvajjanakaṃ bhavaṅga mano nāma hoti, tato phassādayo sabbepi javanena sahajātāva. Manodvāre pana yasmā atītādibhedaṃ sabbampi ārammaṇaṃ hoti, tasmā atītānāgatapaccuppannesūti idaṃ yuttameva.
现在为了显示流转,他开始宣说“So vatāvuso”这一段教导。“将施设触的施设”意思是:将会这样施设“触”这个概念——“有一个叫触的法生起”,也就是要指出触的施设。其余各处也是同样的道理。像这样,以十二处的方式完整显示了流转之后,现在为了从遮止十二处的角度显示还灭,他开始宣说“So vatāvuso cakkhusmiṃ asati”这一段教导。其中的含义,也应依照前面所说的方式来了知。巴利
Idāni vaṭṭaṃ dassento so vatāvusoti desanaṃ ārabhi. Phassapaññattiṃ paññapessatīti phasso nāma eko dhammo uppajjatīti evaṃ phassapaññattiṃ paññapessati, dassessatīti attho. Esa nayo sabbattha. Evaṃ imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotīti dvādasāyatanavasena sakalaṃ vaṭṭaṃ dassetvā idāni dvādasāyatanapaṭikkhepavasena vivaṭṭaṃ dassento so vatāvuso cakkhusmiṃasatīti desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo.
这样解答了问题之后,现在不要因为“问题是由弟子所说”就自认无疑惑;这位世尊正坐着,以遍知智为衡量标准,你们若想,就亲自去亲近他,从而成为无疑惑者——为了劝遣他们,便说了“若希望……”等话。巴利
Evaṃ pañhaṃ vissajjetvā idāni sāvakena pañho kathitoti mā nikkaṅkhā ahuvattha, ayaṃ bhagavā sabbaññutañāṇatulaṃ gahetvā nisinno, icchamānā tameva upasaṅkamitvā nikkaṅkhā hothāti uyyojento ākaṅkhamānā ca panātiādimāha.
205 “以这些行相”是指以这些原因,也就是戏论生起的个别原因,以及轮回和还灭的原因。“以这些词句”是指以这些字母的组合。“以文句”是指以一个个字母。“智者”是指具备智慧的人;或者,以四种原因而成为智者:通达界、通达处、通达缘起、通达因与非因。“大慧”是指具备大智慧,能够掌握大义、大法、大词句、大辩才。正如玛哈咖佳亚那尊者那样,意思是:就像玛哈咖佳亚那尊者所解答的那样,我是针对那个而说的。意思是:我要像玛哈咖佳亚那尊者所解答的那样,完全同样地解答。巴利
205.Imehi ākārehīti imehi kāraṇehi papañcuppattiyā pāṭiyekkakāraṇehi ceva vaṭṭavivaṭṭakāraṇehi ca. Imehi padehīti imehi akkharasampiṇḍanehi. Byañjanehīti pāṭiyekkaakkharehi. Paṇḍitoti paṇḍiccena samannāgato. Catūhi vā kāraṇehi paṇḍito dhātukusalo āyatanakusalo paccayākārakusalo kāraṇākāraṇakusaloti. Mahāpaññoti mahante atthe mahante dhamme mahantā niruttiyo mahantāni paṭibhānāni pariggahaṇasamatthāya mahāpaññāya samannāgato. Yathā taṃ mahākaccānenāti yathā mahākaccānena byākataṃ, taṃ sandhāya tanti vuttaṃ. Yathā mahākaccānena byākataṃ, ahampi taṃ evamevaṃ byākareyyenti attho.
蜜丸,是指大块的糖饼,或者绑好的糖团。不杂,是指不需要再掺和。在酥油、糖蜜、蜂蜜、砂糖等当中,不能说这个味道淡、那个味道浓,因为它的滋味已经调和好了。心者,是指具有思维品性的人。贤善品性者,是指具有智者本性的人。长老心中思惟:“这到底叫什么名字呢?这个法门实在太美妙了,我要依具足十力的世尊的遍知智,给它安立一个名字。”这样想罢,他便开口说了出来。它既然像蜜丸一样甘甜,所以就说:你把它作为蜜丸法门来受持吧。其余各处,文义都很浅显易懂。巴利
Madhupiṇḍikanti mahantaṃ guḷapūvaṃ baddhasattuguḷakaṃ vā. Asecanakanti asecitabbakaṃ. Sappiphāṇitamadhusakkarādīsu idaṃ nāmettha mandaṃ idaṃ bahukanti na vattabbaṃ samayojitarasaṃ. Cetasoti cintakajātiko. Dabbajātikoti paṇḍitasabhāvo. Ko nāmo ayanti idaṃ thero atibhaddako ayaṃ dhammapariyāyo, dasabalassa sabbaññutaññāṇenevassa nāmaṃ gaṇhāpessāmīti cintetvā āha. Tasmāti yasmā madhupiṇḍiko viya madhuro, tasmā madhupiṇḍikapariyāyotveva naṃ dhārehīti vadati. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
9. 《双寻经》的注释巴利
9. Dvedhāvitakkasuttavaṇṇanā
206 206. “我听闻”等语,是《双寻经》。其中,“分成两种,分成两种”意思是分成两个部分。“欲寻”是指和感官欲望连在一起的寻思。“嗔恚寻”是指和嗔恚连在一起的寻思。“害寻”是指和加害连在一起的寻思。“一部分”的意思是:无论是内在的还是外在的,粗重的还是微细的,所有这些寻思全都属于不善这一边,所以我把欲寻、嗔恚寻、害寻这三者归为一个部分。已经脱离感官欲望、和出离连在一起的寻思,叫作“出离寻”,这种寻从开始一直到初禅都适用。和无嗔连在一起的寻思,叫作“无嗔寻”,这种寻从慈心的前行阶段开始,一直到初禅都适用。和无害连在一起的寻思,叫作“无害寻”,这种寻从悲心的前行阶段开始,一直到初禅都适用。“第二部分”的意思是:所有这些寻思全都属于善这一边,所以作为第二个部分。通过这番话,说明了菩萨抑制寻思的时机。巴利
206.Me sutanti dvedhāvitakkasuttaṃ. Tattha dvidhā katvā dvidhā katvāti dve dve bhāge katvā. Kāmavitakkoti kāmapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko. Byāpādavitakkoti byāpādapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko. Vihiṃsāvitakkoti vihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyutto vitakko. Ekaṃ bhāganti ajjhattaṃ vā bahiddhā vā oḷāriko vā sukhumo vā sabbo pāyaṃ vitakko akusalapakkhikoyevāti tayopi kāmabyāpādavihiṃsāvitakke ekaṃ koṭṭhāsamakāsiṃ. Kāmehi nissaṭo nekkhammapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko nekkhammavitakko nāma, so yāva paṭhamajjhānā vaṭṭati. Abyāpādapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko abyāpādavitakko, so mettāpubbabhāgato paṭṭhāya yāva paṭhamajjhānā vaṭṭati. Avihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyutto vitakko avihiṃsāvitakko, so karuṇāpubbabhāgato paṭṭhāya yāva paṭhamajjhānā vaṭṭati. Dutiyaṃ bhāganti sabbopāyaṃ kusalapakkhikoyevāti dutiyaṃ koṭṭhāsamakāsiṃ. Iminā bodhisattassa vitakkaniggahaṇakālo kathito.
菩萨在六年精勤修行期间,出离寻等善的寻思一批一批地生起,就像大河里的水流一样。可是因为失去正念,欲寻等不善的寻思突然冒出来,截断了善心的流程,自己反而变成不善速行心路而持续存在。于是菩萨想:“我这些欲寻等不善寻思截断了善心的流程,还持续存在。那我现在就把这些寻思分成两部分来安住。”他把欲寻等归为不善一边,作为一部分;把出离寻等归为善一边,作为另一部分。接着他又想:“对于从不善那边来的寻思,我要像持咒压住黑蛇再抓住它那样,像用脚踩住敌人脖子那样去制伏它,绝不让它增长。对于从善那边来的寻思,我要像雨季里让云层迅速聚集,像在良田里种下上好的娑罗树苗那样,让它快速成长。”他照这样去做,制伏了不善寻思,增长了善寻思。应当知道,这里说的就是菩萨抑制寻思的时机。巴利
Bodhisattassa hi chabbassāni padhānaṃ padahantassa nekkhammavitakkādayo puñjapuñjā mahānadiyaṃ oghā viya pavattiṃsu. Satisammosena pana sahasā kāmavitakkādayo uppajjitvā kusalavāraṃ pacchinditvā sayaṃ akusalajavanavārā hutvā tiṭṭhanti. Tato bodhisatto cintesi – ‘‘mayhaṃ ime kāmavitakkādayo kusalavāraṃ pacchinditvā tiṭṭhanti, handāhaṃ ime vitakke dve bhāge katvā viharāmī’’ti kāmavitakkādayo akusalapakkhikāti ekaṃ bhāgaṃ karoti nekkhammavitakkādayo kusalapakkhikāti ekaṃ. Atha puna cintesi – ‘‘akusalapakkhato āgataṃ vitakkaṃ mantena kaṇhasappaṃ uppīḷetvā gaṇhanto viya amittaṃ gīvāya akkamanto viya ca niggahessāmi, nāssa vaḍḍhituṃ dassāmi. Kusalapakkhato āgataṃ vitakkaṃ meghasamaye meghaṃ viya sukhette sālakalyāṇipotakaṃ viya ca sīghaṃ vaḍḍhessāmī’’ti. So tathā katvā akusalavitakke niggaṇhi, kusalavitakke vaḍḍhesi. Evaṃ iminā bodhisattassa vitakkaniggahaṇanakālo kathitoti veditabbo.
207 207. 现在,为了说明他的那些寻是怎样生起的,以及他又是怎样把它们压伏下去的,世尊说了“诸比丘,当我……”这一段话。其中,“不放逸”是指安住在正念不丢失的状态中。“热忱”是指具有热忱的精进力。“心已策励”是指心已被策励。所谓“欲寻生起”:菩萨在六年精勤修行期间,从来没有因为想到王位的快乐、宫殿、舞伎、后宫或任何一种享受,而生起过欲寻。然而,当他修苦行、因断绝食物而极度消瘦时,他这样想:“光靠断绝食物是不可能证得殊胜的,不如我吃一些粗食吧。”于是他就进入优楼频螺村乞食。人们说:“这位大人物以前别人拿来食物给他,他都不接受,现在他的心愿一定已经圆满了,所以才自己来了。”于是供养了种种精美的食物。菩萨的身体不久就恢复了正常。因为衰老败坏的身体,即使得到合适的食物,也无法恢复正常;但菩萨还年轻,所以他吃了合适的食物后,身体不久就恢复正常了,诸根清净,肤色明净,身体具足圆满的三十二大人相,庄严得像群星升起的天空。他看了看自己的身体,心想:“这么疲惫的身体竟然也能恢复成这样正常的样子。”他凭着自己智慧广大,连这么微细的寻也拿来观察,于是把它当成了欲寻。巴利
207. Idāni yathāssa te vitakkā uppajjiṃsu, yathā ca ne niggahesi, taṃ dassento tassa mayhaṃ, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha appamattassāti satiyā avippavāse ṭhitassa. Ātāpinoti ātāpavīriyavantassa. Pahitattassāti pesitacittassa. Uppajjati kāmavitakkoti bodhisattassa chabbassāni padhānaṃ padahato rajjasukhaṃ vā ārabbha, pāsāde vā nāṭakāni vā orodhe vā kiñcideva vā sampattiṃ ārabbha kāmavitakko nāma na uppannapubbo. Dukkarakārikāya panassa āhārūpacchedena adhimattakasimānaṃ pattassa etadahosi – ‘‘na sakkā āhārūpacchedena visesaṃ nibbattetuṃ, yaṃnūnāhaṃ oḷārikaṃ āhāraṃ āhāreyya’’nti. So uruvelaṃ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Manussā – ‘‘mahāpuriso pubbe āharitvā dinnampi na gaṇhi, addhāssa idāni manoratho matthakaṃ patto, tasmā sayameva āgato’’ti paṇītapaṇītaṃ āhāraṃ upahariṃsu. Bodhisattassa attabhāvo nacirasseva pākatiko ahosi. Jarājiṇṇattabhāvo hi sappāyabhojanaṃ labhitvāpi pākatiko na hoti. Bodhisatto pana daharo. Tenassa sappāyabhojanaṃ bhuñjato attabhāvo na cirasseva pākatiko jāto, vippasannāni indriyāni, parisuddho chavivaṇṇo, samuggatatārāgaṇaṃ viya nabhaṃ paripuṇṇadvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇappaṭimaṇḍitasarīraṃ ahosi. So taṃ oloketvā ‘‘tāva kilanto nāma attabhāvo evaṃ paṭipākatiko jāto’’ti cintetvā attano paññāmahantatāya evaṃ parittakampi vitakkaṃ gahetvā kāmavitakkoti akāsi.
他坐在茅草屋前,看见牦牛、鹿、野牛、红鹿之类的兽群,看见孔雀、林鸡等发出悦耳叫声的鸟群,看见被青莲、白睡莲、红莲等覆盖的池塘,看见种种鲜花覆盖枝头的成片树林,还看见尼连禅河,河水清澈如宝石聚。他心里想:“这些兽类、鸟群、池塘、树林和尼连禅河,真是美啊。”他抓住这样一个微小的念头,就把它变成了欲寻,因此说“欲寻生起”。巴利
Paṇṇasālāya purato nisinno camarapasadagavayarohitamigādike magagaṇe manuññasaddaravane moravanakukkuṭādike pakkhigaṇe nīluppalakumudakamalādisañchannāni pallalāni nānākusumasañchannaviṭapā vanarājiyo maṇikkhandhanimmalajalapavāhañca nadiṃ nerañjaraṃ passati. Tassa evaṃ hoti ‘‘sobhanā vatime migajātā pakkhigaṇā pallalāni vanarājiyo nadī nerañjarā’’ti. So tampi evaṃ parittakaṃ vitakkaṃ gahetvā kāmavitakkamakāsi, tenāha ‘‘uppajjati kāmavitakko’’ti.
对自己有损害,也就是对自己有痛苦。其他地方也都是同样的道理。那么,大士会有一种能带来自他双方痛苦的寻吗?不会有。但对于还处在未遍知状态的人来说,这种寻会一直导致自他双方的伤害,因此它得到这三个名称,所以才这样说。障碍智慧:它让尚未生起的世间智慧和出世间智慧无法生起;对于已经通过八等至和五神通生起的世间智慧,它也能将其斩断、抛弃,所以叫障碍智慧。属于损害分:就是属于苦的那一部分。涅槃叫作无为法,它不能令现证无为法涅槃,所以叫不导向涅槃。消失:就是到达灭尽、无有的状态。如水上水泡般息灭。“我舍断”就是“我将其舍断”;“除去”就是“我除去”。“我令其灭尽”就是令其彻底除去、毫无剩余、截断其道。巴利
Attabyābādhāyapīti attadukkhāyapi. Esevanayo sabbattha. Kiṃ pana mahāsattassa ubhayadukkhāya saṃvattanakavitakko nāma atthīti? Natthi. Apariññāyaṃ ṭhitassa pana vitakko yāva ubhayabyābādhāya saṃvattatīti etāni tīṇi nāmāni labhati, tasmā evamāha. Paññānirodhikoti anuppannāya lokiyalokuttarāya paññāya uppajjituṃ na deti, lokiyapaññaṃ pana aṭṭhasamāpattipañcābhiññāvasena uppannampi samucchinditvā khipatīti paññānirodhiko. Vighātapakkhikoti dukkhakoṭṭhāsiko. Asaṅkhataṃ nibbānaṃ nāma, taṃ paccakkhaṃ kātuṃ na detīti anibbānasaṃvattaniko. Abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti khayaṃ natthibhāvaṃ gacchati. Udakapupphuḷako viya nirujjhati. Pajahamevāti pajahimeva. Vinodamevāti nīharimeva. Byantameva naṃ akāsinti vigatantaṃ nissesaṃ parivaṭumaṃ paricchinnameva naṃ akāsiṃ.
208 208.“嗔寻”:菩萨心里并不会生起那种与伤害他人相应的寻,而是由于过多的雨、极热、极寒等因缘,心才产生变异的状态,针对这一点才说“嗔寻”。“害寻”:大士心里并不会生起那种与令他人受苦相应的寻,而是心呈现掉举的样子、散乱的样子,取这一点而说为害寻。因为他坐在茅舍门口,看见狮子、老虎等猛兽伤害野猪等小动物,于是菩萨生起悲悯:在这本该无所畏惧的林中,这些畜生道众生之间竟然也有敌人,强者吞食弱者,被强者吞食的就这样流转下去。又看见猫等吞食鸡、鼠等;入村乞食时,看见人们被官差逼恼,遭受杀戮、捆缚等,自己从事耕种、经商等工作却无法维生,也生起悲悯,针对这一点才说“害寻生起”。“如是如是”:以种种方式。这话的意思是:在欲寻等当中,无论他思惟哪一种寻,生起哪一种寻,他的心并不会因此就成为欲寻等的状态。“我舍断出离寻”:就是舍离出离寻。“多作”:就是屡屡造作。“其心倾注于欲寻”:他的心正是为了欲寻而倾注。意思是,如同与欲寻相应那样地倾向。其余诸句也依此类推。巴利
208.Byāpādavitakkoti na bodhisattassa parūpaghātappaṭisaṃyutto nāma vitakko citte uppajjati, athassa ativassaaccuṇhaatisītādīni pana paṭicca cittavipariṇāmabhāvo hoti, taṃ sandhāya ‘‘byāpādavitakko’’ti āha. Vihiṃsāvitakkoti na mahāsattassa paresaṃ dukkhuppādanappaṭisaṃyutto vitakko uppajjati, citte pana uddhatākāro anekaggatākāro hoti, taṃ gahetvā vihiṃsāvitakkamakāsi. Paṇṇasālādvāre nisinno hi sīhabyagghādike vāḷamige sūkarādayo khuddamige vihiṃsante passati. Atha bodhisatto imasmimpi nāma akutobhaye araññe imesaṃ tiracchānagatānaṃ paccatthikā uppajjanti, balavanto dubbale khādanti, balavantakhāditā vattantīti kāruññaṃ uppādeti. Aññepi biḷārādayo kukkuṭamūsikādīni khādante passati, gāmaṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭho manusse rājakammikehi upaddute vadhabandhādīni anubhavante attano kasivaṇijjādīni kammāni katvā jīvituṃ na labhantīti kāruññaṃ uppādeti, taṃ sandhāya ‘‘uppajjati vihiṃsāvitakko’’ti āha. Tathā tathāti tena tena ākārena. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kāmavitakkādīsu yaṃ yaṃ vitakketi, yaṃ yaṃ vitakkaṃ pavatteti, tena tene cassākārena kāmavitakkādibhāvo cetaso na hi hotīti. Pahāsi nekkhammavitakkanti nekkhammavitakkaṃ pajahati. Bahulamakāsīti bahulaṃ karoti. Tassa taṃ kāmavitakkāya cittanti tassa taṃ cittaṃ kāmavitakkatthāya. Yathā kāmavitakkasampayuttaṃ hoti, evamevaṃ namatīti attho. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.
现在,为了说明这个道理,举一个譬喻,说了“譬如”等话。其中,“谷穗稠密处”就是谷物茂密的地方。“直击”就是正面打它的背。“横击”就是从侧面打它的肋骨。“围住”就是挡住它,让它站着走不了。“拦住”就是不让它从这里那里到处走。“由此因缘”就是由于这个原因,意思是:那些牛没有被好好看管,跑去吃了别人的庄稼,就是这个缘故。愚笨的牧牛人这样不好好看着牛,牛主人心想:“这个人吃掉了我们的工钱和饭食,他连老老实实看牛都做不到,还让人家跟我们家结下仇怨。”结果他从牛主人那里会遭到杀害等,从庄稼主人那里也会遭到。而聪明人看到这四种危险,就好好看管牛,这段话就是针对这个说的。“过患”就是灾祸。“下劣”就是低劣,或者说是混进诸蕴里的污垢。“杂染”就是被污染的状态。“出离”就是对于出离。“胜利”就是清净的部分。“白净分”是同一个意思的另一种说法,意思是说,见到善法在出离当中的清净部分。巴利
Idāni atthadīpikaṃ upamaṃ dassento seyyathāpī tiādimāha. Tattha kiṭṭhasambādheti sassasambādhe. Ākoṭeyyāti ujukaṃ piṭṭhiyaṃ pahareyya. Paṭikoṭeyyāti tiriyaṃ phāsukāsu pahareyya. Sannirundheyyāti āvaritvā tiṭṭheyya. Sannivāreyyāti ito cito ca gantuṃ na dadeyya . Tatonidānanti tena kāraṇena, evaṃ arakkhitānaṃ gunnaṃ paresaṃ sassakhādanakāraṇenāti attho. Bālo hi gopāloko evaṃ gāvo arakkhamāno ‘‘ayaṃ amhākaṃ bhattavetanaṃ khādati, ujuṃ gāvo rakkhitumpi na sakkoti, kulehi saddhiṃ veraṃ gaṇhāpetī’’ti gosāmikānampi santikā vadhādīni pāpuṇāti, kiṭṭhasāmikānampi. Paṇḍito pana imāni cattāri bhayāni sampassanto gāvo sādhukaṃ rakkhati, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Ādīnavanti upaddavaṃ. Okāranti lāmakaṃ, khandhesu vā otāraṃ. Saṃkilesanti kiliṭṭhabhāvaṃ. Nekkhammeti nekkhammamhi. Ānisaṃsanti visuddhipakkhaṃ. Vodānapakkhanti idaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ, kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ nekkhammamhi visuddhipakkhaṃ addasanti attho.
209 “出离”是指从诸欲中脱离出来的一切善法;如果把它们归摄为一法,那就只是涅槃。
这里有一个譬喻的对应关系:谷物长得密的地方,好比色等所缘;那头歪曲的牛,好比歪曲的心;聪明的牧牛人,好比菩萨;四种怖畏,好比能导致伤害自己、伤害他人及伤害两者的寻。聪明的牧牛人看到四种怖畏后,在谷物茂密的地方不放逸地守护牛群;同样,菩萨在六年精勤修行时,看到伤害自己等怖畏后,在色等所缘中不让欲寻等生起,这样守护自己的心。
“增长智慧”等:能帮助尚未生起的世间智慧和出世间智慧生起,也能让已经生起的智慧增长,所以叫“增长智慧”。不会导致苦的那一部分,所以叫“不损害分”。能导向涅槃界的现证,所以叫“导向涅槃”。
“诸比丘,如果我夜里也随念它”:意思是即使我整夜都让那种寻生起。“由此因缘”:就是以那个为根本因。“或使我的心浮扬”:意思是令我的心被扰动、导致掉举。“远离”:就是远离。“从定”:从近行定和安止定两者中远离。“诸比丘,我即于内心”:诸比丘,为了不让我的心远离定,我就把心安住在内,也就是安立在内在的所缘上。“令安稳”:就是让心在那里安稳下来。“令一趣”:就是令心专一。“令入定”:就是正确地安置、好好地安放上去。“不要让我的心被扰动”:意思是不要让我的心被搅动,不要让它导致掉举。巴利
209.Nekkhammanti ca kāmehi nissaṭaṃ sabbakusalaṃ, ekadhamme saṅgayhamāne nibbānameva. Tatridaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – kiṭṭhasambādhaṃ viya hi rūpādiārammaṇaṃ, kūṭagāvo viya kūṭacittaṃ, paṇḍitagopālako viya bodhisatto, catubbidhabhayaṃ viya attaparūbhayabyābādhāya saṃvattanavitakko, paṇḍitagopālakassa catubbidhaṃ bhayaṃ disvā kiṭṭhasambādhe appamādena gorakkhaṇaṃ viya bodhisattassa chabbassāni padhānaṃ padahato attabyābādhādibhayaṃ disvā rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu yathā kāmavitakkādayo na uppajjanti, evaṃ cittarakkhaṇaṃ. Paññāvuddhikotiādīsu anuppannāya lokiyalokuttarapaññāya uppādāya, uppannāya ca vuddhiyā saṃvattatīti paññāvuddhiko. Na dukkhakoṭṭhāsāya saṃvattatīti avighātapakkhiko. Nibbānadhātusacchikiriyāya saṃvattatīti nibbānasaṃvattaniko. Rattiṃ cepi naṃ, bhikkhave, anuvitakkeyyanti sakalarattiṃ cepi taṃ vitakkaṃ pavatteyyaṃ. Tatonidānanti taṃmūlakaṃ. Ohaññeyyāti ugghātīyeyya, uddhaccāya saṃvatteyyāti attho. Ārāti dūre. Samādhimhāti upacārasamādhitopi appanāsamādhitopi. So kho ahaṃ, bhikkhave, ajjhattameva cittanti so ahaṃ, bhikkhave, mā me cittaṃ samādhimhā dūre hotūti ajjhattameva cittaṃ saṇṭhapemi, gocarajjhatte ṭhapemīti attho. Sannisādemīti tattheva ca naṃ sannisīdāpemi. Ekodiṃ karomīti ekaggaṃ karomi. Samādahāmīti sammā ādahāmi, suṭṭhu āropemīti attho. Mā me cittaṃ ūhaññīti mā mayhaṃ cittaṃ ugghātīyittha, mā uddhaccāya saṃvattatūti attho.
210 这里,“无嗔寻生起……中略……无害寻生起”说的是:那种和上面讲到的还不成熟的观一起生起的寻,因为它的作用是跟欲对立,所以叫出离寻;也正是这同一种寻,因为它的作用是跟嗔恚对立,所以叫无嗔寻,因为它的作用是跟害对立,所以叫无害寻。巴利
210.Uppajjati abyāpādavitakko…pe… avihiṃsāvitakkoti ettha yo so imāya heṭṭhā vuttataruṇavipassanāya saddhiṃ uppannavitakko kāmapaccanīkaṭṭhena nekkhammavitakkoti vutto. Soyeva byāpādapaccanīkaṭṭhena abyāpādavitakkoti ca vihiṃsāpaccanīkaṭṭhena avihiṃsāvitakkoti ca vutto.
到这里,已经讲了菩萨依靠等至来建立观修的阶段。因为对于定和观都还很嫩的人来说,建立观修之后坐得太久,身体就会疲劳,体内像火一样烧起来,腋下出汗,头顶像有热气往上冒,心受到打击、被扰乱、挣扎不安。于是他就再次进入等至,把它调顺、调柔软、让身心得到休息,然后再重新建立观修。他再坐得太久时,又会同样发生这些情况。他就再次进入等至,再同样调顺。因为对于观修来说,等至确实有很大的帮助。巴利
Ettāvatā bodhisattassa samāpattiṃ nissāya vipassanāpaṭṭhapanakālo kathito. Yassa hi samādhipi taruṇo, vipassanāpi. Tassa vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā aticiraṃ nisinnassa kāyo kilamati, anto aggi viya uṭṭhahati, kacchehi sedā muccanti, matthakato usumavaṭṭi viya uṭṭhahati, cittaṃ haññati vihaññati vipphandati. So puna samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā taṃ paridametvā mudukaṃ katvā samassāsetvā puna vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapeti. Tassa puna aticiraṃ nisinnassa tatheva hoti. So puna samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā tatheva karoti. Vipassanāya hi bahūpakārā samāpatti.
就像战士的木板堡垒,能给他带来很多帮助。他依靠这个堡垒进入战场,在那里跟象兵、骑兵、步兵一起作战。等到武器用完了,或者想吃饭了等等,他就退回来,进入木板堡垒,重新拿起武器,休息、吃饭、喝水,重新披挂好铠甲,做完这些事,再进入战场。在战场上打完仗,又因为大小便等逼迫,或者有什么必须处理的事,就再回到木板堡垒。在里面恢复力气之后,再进入战场。同样,对于观来说,等至就像战士的木板堡垒,能带来很多帮助。巴利
Yathā yodhassa phalakakoṭṭhako nāma bahūpakāro hoti, so taṃ nissāya saṅgāmaṃ pavisati, tattha hatthīhipi assehipi yodhehipi saddhiṃ kammaṃ katvā āvudhesu vā khīṇesu bhuñjitukāmatādibhāve vā sati nivattitvā phalakakoṭṭhakaṃ pavisitvā āvudhānipi gaṇhāti, vissamatipi, bhuñjatipi, pānīyampi pivati, sannāhampi paṭisannayhati, taṃ taṃ katvā puna saṅgāmaṃ pavisati, tattha kammaṃ katvā puna uccārādipīḷito vā kenacideva vā karaṇīyena phalakakoṭṭhakaṃ pavisati. Tattha santhambhitvā puna saṅgāmaṃ pavisati, evaṃ yodhassa phalakakoṭṭhako viya vipassanāya bahūpakārā samāpatti.
不过,对于能渡过战场的战士来说,观比木板盾更有帮助。因为,虽然他是依靠等至来建立观的,但当观变得强而有力时,它也能守护等至,并让等至变得强而有力。巴利
Samāpattiyā pana saṅgāmanittharaṇakayodhassa phalakakoṭṭhakatopi vipassanā bahūpakāratarā. Kiñcāpi hi samāpattiṃ nissāya vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapeti, vipassanā pana thāmajātā samāpattimpi rakkhati. Thāmajātaṃ karoti.
就像在陆地上,人们把船和船上的货物都装到车上运走;到了水里,又把车、车上的货物连同套着的牛一起装上船。船横穿水流,平安地到达好码头。同样,虽然修行者依靠等至来建立观,但当观的力量增强后,它也会保护等至,让等至变得更有力量。等至就像到了陆地后的车,观就像到了水上的船。应当知道,到这里为止,讲的就是菩萨依靠等至来建立观的阶段。巴利
Yathā hi thale nāvampi nāvāya bhaṇḍampi sakaṭabhāraṃ karonti. Udakaṃ patvā pana sakaṭampi sakaṭabhaṇḍampi yuttagoṇepi nāvābhāraṃ karonti. Nāvā tiriyaṃ sotaṃ chinditvā sotthinā supaṭṭanaṃ gacchati, evamevaṃ kiñcāpi samāpattiṃ nissāya vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapeti, vipassanā pana thāmajātā samāpattimpi rakkhati, thāmajātaṃ karoti. Thalaṃ patvā sakaṭaṃ viya hi samāpatti. Udakaṃ patvā nāvā viya vipassanā. Iti bodhisattassa ettāvatā samāpattiṃ nissāya vipassanāpaṭṭhapanakālo kathitoti veditabbo.
“无论哪个……”这些内容,应该完全按照黑暗分中已说的方式来理解。这里为了显示其中的含义,用“犹如……”等比喻来说明。其中,“村边聚集的”指被带到村边的牛。“只应作意”意思是:对这些牛,只需要生起念就够了,不必从这里跑到那里去驱赶等。“这些法”指这些止观之法,只需要生起念就够了。这一段讲的是菩萨止观力量增长的时期。据说,那时他为了安止等至而坐,八种等至只靠一次转向就全部现前;当他为修观而坐时,七种随观也在一次之中同时达到顶峰。巴利
Yaññadevātiādi kaṇhapakkhe vuttānusāreneva veditabbaṃ, idhāpi atthadīpikaṃ upamaṃ dassetuṃ seyyathāpītiādimāha. Tattha gāmantasambhatesūti gāmantaṃ āhaṭesu. Satikaraṇīyameva hotīti etā gāvoti satiuppādanamattameva kātabbaṃ hoti. Ito cito ca gantvā ākoṭanādikiccaṃ natthi. Ete dhammāti ete samathavipassanā dhammāti satuppādanamattameva kātabbaṃ hoti. Iminā bodhisattassa samathavipassanānaṃ thāmajātakālo kathito. Tadā kirassa samāpattiṃ appanatthāya nisinnassa aṭṭha samāpattiyo ekāvajjanena āpāthaṃ āgacchanti, vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā nisinno satta anupassanā ekappahāreneva āruḷho hoti.
215 “犹如”在这里要说明什么?这是另一段连接。世尊为了显示对众生的饶益方式以及自己作为导师的成就,才开始这段说法。其中,“阿兰若”指山林旷野。“林”指树林深处。从意义上说,这两者其实是一回事,后者只是前者的同义词。“不乐于安稳”指不想要从四种轭中获得安稳无怖之处,只想要怖畏。“吉祥”指带来吉祥。“悦意”指令心满意足。也可读作“喜行”。“应封闭”指用树枝等遮住。“应敞开”指把出口弄得明显敞开。“非道”指被水、林、山等阻断、并非正路的路径。“应放置诱饵雄鹿”指如同在其中活动一般,将一只作为诱饵的雄鹿固定在一处。“诱饵雌兽”指用长绳系着的雌鹿。巴利
215.Seyyathāpīti idha kiṃ dasseti? Ayaṃ pāṭiyekko anusandhi, sattānañhi hitūpacāraṃ attano satthubhāvasampadañca dassento bhagavā imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha araññeti aṭaviyaṃ. Pavaneti vanasaṇḍe. Atthato hi idaṃ dvayaṃ ekameva, paṭhamassa pana dutiyaṃ vevacanaṃ. Ayogakkhemakāmoti catūhi yogehi khemaṃ nibbhayaṭṭhānaṃ anicchanto bhayameva icchanto . Sovatthikoti suvatthibhāvāvaho. Pītigamanīyoti tuṭṭhiṃ gamanīyo. ‘‘Pītagamanīyo’’ti vā pāṭho. Pidaheyyāti sākhādīhi thakeyya. Vivareyyāti visadamukhaṃ katvā vivaṭaṃ kareyya. Kummagganti udakavanapabbatādīhi sanniruddhaṃ amaggaṃ. Odaheyya okacaranti tesaṃ oke caramānaṃ viya ekaṃ dīpakamigaṃ ekasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapeyya. Okacārikanti dīgharajjuyā bandhitaṃyeva migiṃ.
猎人先走进野兽居住的树林,观察清楚:“它们住在这里,从这条路出去,在这里活动,在这里喝水,从这条路进来。”然后他把正路堵住,把岔路打开,再放好诱饵雄兽和诱饵雌兽,自己拿着长矛躲在隐蔽的地方等着。到了傍晚,野兽们在树林里无所畏惧地走动、喝水,和小兽一起玩耍,回到住处附近,看见诱饵雄兽和诱饵雌兽,心想:“我们的同伴大概来了。”于是毫无戒心地走进去。它们看见正路被封住了,就想:“这不是路,那条才应该是路。”便走上岔路。猎人暂时不动手,等它们都进去了,才悄悄袭击最后面那只。那只一受惊,所有野兽都惊慌起来,心想:“危险来了!”向前一看,只见道路被水、树林或山崖挡住,两边又都是像手指链一样交错密布的丛林,钻不进去,于是就想从原先进来的路逃出去。猎人知道它们要往回走,就从第一只开始,一路宰杀,有时能杀死三四十只野兽。世尊正是针对这种情况说:“比丘们,这样,那个大兽群过后不久就会遭遇不幸和灾难。”巴利
Migaluddako hi araññaṃ migānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā ‘‘idha vasanti, iminā maggena nikkhamanti, ettha caranti, ettha pivanti, iminā maggena pavisantī’’ti sallakkhetvā maggaṃ pidhāya kummaggaṃ vivaritvā okacarañca okacārikañca ṭhapetvā sayaṃ paṭicchannaṭṭhāne sattiṃ gahetvā tiṭṭhati. Atha sāyanhasamaye migā akutobhaye araññe caritvā pānīyaṃ pivitvā migapotakehi saddhiṃ kīḷamānā vasanaṭṭhānasantikaṃ āgantvā okacarañca okacārikañca disvā ‘‘sahāyakā no āgatā bhavissantī’’ti nirāsaṅkā pavisanti, te maggaṃ pihitaṃ disvā ‘‘nāyaṃ maggo, ayaṃ maggo bhavissatī’’ti kummaggaṃ paṭipajjanti. Migaluddako na tāva kiñci karoti, paviṭṭhesu pana sabbapacchimaṃ saṇikaṃ paharati. So uttasati, tato sabbe uttasitvā ‘‘bhayaṃ uppanna’’nti purato olokentā udakena vā vanena vā pabbatena vā sanniruddhaṃ maggaṃ disvā ubhohi passehi aṅgulisaṅkhalikaṃ viya gahanavanaṃ pavisituṃ asakkontā paviṭṭhamaggeneva nikkhamituṃ ārabhanti. Luddako tesaṃ nivattanabhāvaṃ ñatvā ādito paṭṭhāya tiṃsampi cattālīsampi mige ghāteti. Idaṃ sandhāya evañhi so, bhikkhave, mahāmigasaṅgho aparena samayena anayabyasanaṃ āpajjeyyāti vuttaṃ.
“这是喜贪的别名,这是无明的别名。”在这里,因为这类众生由于无明而愚昧无知,被喜贪紧紧捆住,被引向色等所缘,结果就被轮回之苦的利刃所杀。所以世尊把诱饵雄兽说成喜贪,把诱饵雌兽说成无明。巴利
‘‘Nandīrāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, avijjāyetaṃ adhivacana’’nti ettha yasmā ime sattā avijjāya aññāṇā hutvā nandīrāgena ābandhitvā rūpārammaṇādīni upanītā vaṭṭadukkhasattiyā ghātaṃ labhanti. Tasmā bhagavā okacaraṃ nandīrāgoti, okacārikaṃ avijjāti katvā dassesi.
猎人有时会用折断的树枝擦拭它们的身体,把人身上的气味去掉,然后把诱饵雄鹿固定在一个地方,再放出系着绳子的诱饵雌鹿,自己藏起来,拿着长矛站在诱饵雄鹿旁边。诱饵雌鹿就朝鹿群活动的地方走去。鹿群看见它,都抬起头站着;它也抬起头站着。鹿群心想“这是我们的同类”,就开始觅食。它也装作吃草的样子,慢慢走近。林中的鹿群首领雄鹿闻到它的气味,就丢下自己的雌鹿,朝它那边走去。巴利
Migaluddako hi ekadāpi tesaṃ sākhābhaṅgena sarīraṃ puñchitvā manussagandhaṃ apanetvā okacaraṃ ekasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapetvā okacārikaṃ saha rajjuyā vissajjetvā attānaṃ paṭicchādetvā sattiṃ ādāya okacarassa santike tiṭṭhati, okacārikā migagaṇassa caraṇaṭṭhānābhimukhī gacchati . Taṃ disvā migā sīsāni ukkhipitvā tiṭṭhanti, sāpi sīsaṃ ukkhipitvā tiṭṭhati, te ‘‘amhākaṃ samajātikā aya’’nti gocaraṃ gaṇhanti. Sāpi tiṇāni khādantī viya saṇikaṃ upagacchati. Āraññiko yūthapatimigo tassā vātaṃ labhitvā sakabhariyaṃ vissajjetvā tadabhimukho hoti.
众生总是喜爱新鲜的事物。诱饵雌鹿不让林中的雄鹿靠得太近,而是面朝它一步步往后退,退到诱饵雄兽身边。绳子在哪儿绊住了,它就用蹄子在哪儿拨开。林中的雄鹿看见诱饵雄兽,被诱饵雌鹿迷住,对诱饵雄兽心生嫉妒,便弓起背、摇着头站在那里。就在那一刻,它连舌头舔到矛尖,都不知道“这是什么”。如果诱饵雄兽觉得从上方刺那头鹿方便,就压低身子;如果觉得从下方刺方便,就挺起胸膛。这时猎人用矛刺中林中的雄鹿,当场把它杀死,取了肉就走。同样,就像那头鹿被诱饵雌鹿迷住,对诱饵雄兽心生嫉妒,舔着矛尖却什么都不知道,这些众生被无明迷住,变得盲目,什么都不明白,对色等对象生起欢喜贪染,于是遭到轮回苦矛的杀害。所以世尊把诱饵雄兽说成是欢喜贪染,把诱饵雌鹿说成是无明,以此来开示。巴利
Sattānañhi navanavameva piyaṃ hoti. Okacārikā āraññikassa migassa accāsannabhāvaṃ adatvā tadabhimukhīva pacchato paṭikkamitvā okacarassa santikaṃ gacchati, yattha yatthassā rajju laggati, tattha tattha khurena paharitvā moceti, āraññiko migo okacaraṃ disvā okacārikāya sammatto hutvā okacare usūyaṃ katvā piṭṭhiṃ nāmetvā sīsaṃ kampento tiṭṭhati, tasmiṃ khaṇe sattiṃ jivhāya lehantopi ‘‘kiṃ eta’’nti na jānāti, okacaropi sacassa uparibhāgena taṃ migaṃ paharituṃ sukhaṃ hoti, piṭṭhiṃ nāmeti. Sacassa heṭṭhābhāgena paharituṃ sukhaṃ hoti, hadayaṃ unnāmeti. Atha luddako āraññikaṃ migaṃ sattiyā paharitvā tattheva ghātetvā maṃsaṃ ādāya gacchati. Evameva yathā so migo okacārikāya sammatto okacare usūyaṃ katvā sattiṃ jivhāya lehantopi kiñci na jānāti, tathā ime sattā avijjāya sammattā andhabhūtā kiñci ajānantā rūpādīsu nandīrāgaṃ upagamma vaṭṭadukkhasattiyā vadhaṃ labhantīti bhagavā okacaraṃ nandīrāgoti, okacārikaṃ avijjāti katvā dassesi.
比丘们,就是这样,我已经打开了安稳之道。也就是说,比丘们,我为了利益这些众生而修行,证得正自觉、成为佛陀之后,并没有默然安坐,而是从转法轮开始就一直在说法。我打开了安稳的圣八支道,堵住了邪道;对孔丹尼亚等有堪能的人,把那如诱饵雄兽一样的欢喜染着揭露出来、斩断、击倒,也把那如诱饵雌鹿一样的无明彻底摧毁、连根拔除。世尊以此开示了自己所行的利益之行。其余各处,意义都很清楚明白。巴利
Iti kho, bhikkhave, vivaṭo mayā khemo maggoti iti kho, bhikkhave, mayā imesaṃ sattānaṃ hitacaraṇena sammāsambodhiṃ patvā ahaṃ buddhosmīti tuṇhībhūtena anisīditvā dhammacakkappavattanato paṭṭhāya dhammaṃ desentena vivaṭo khemo ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, pihito kummaggo , aññātakoṇḍaññādīnaṃ bhabbapuggalānaṃ ūhato okacaro nandīrāgo dvedhā chetvā pātito, nāsitā okacārikā avijjā sabbena sabbaṃ samugghātitāti attano hitūpacāraṃ dassesi. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
10. 《寻行经》注释巴利
10. Vitakkasaṇṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā
216 “如是我闻”等,就是《寻行经》。其中,“致力于增上心的人”这句里:以十善业道为基础而生起的心,就是心;而作为观禅基础的八等至心,比那个心更殊胜,所以叫增上心。“致力于”的意思是:致力于那个增上心,也就是投入其中、精勤用功。巴利
216.Evaṃme sutanti vitakkasaṇṭhānasuttaṃ. Tattha adhicittamanuyuttenāti dasakusalakammapathavasena uppannaṃ cittaṃ cittameva, vipassanāpādakaaṭṭhasamāpatticittaṃ tato cittato adhikaṃ cittanti adhicittaṃ. Anuyuttenāti taṃ adhicittaṃ anuyuttena, tattha yuttappayuttenāti attho.
在这里,这位比丘午前外出乞食,饭后从乞食处回来,拿起坐具,心想:“我要到某棵树下、或密林里、或山脚边、或山洞中,去修沙门法。”他即使这样出发前往那里,到了之后用手或脚清除坐处的草叶,也仍然是专注于增上心。他坐下之后,洗手洗脚,盘腿而坐,取根本业处而安住,同样也仍然是专注于增上心。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ bhikkhu purebhattaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātappaṭikkanto nisīdanaṃ ādāya asukasmiṃ rukkhamūle vā vanasaṇḍe vā pabbatapāde vā pabbhāre vā samaṇadhammaṃ karissāmīti nikkhamantopi, tattha gantvā hatthehi vā pādehi vā nisajjaṭṭhānato tiṇapaṇṇāni apanentopi adhicittaṃ anuyuttoyeva. Nisīditvā pana hatthapāde dhovitvā pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā viharantopi adhicittaṃ anuyuttoyeva.
“相”指的是原因、条件。“适时地”就是在恰当的时候、合适的时机。难道业处不是哪怕片刻都不能丢开,而要持续不断地作意吗?那世尊为什么还说“适时地”呢?因为在经中已经分析了三十八种业处,比丘选取自己心里喜欢的业处坐下之后,只要还没有生起任何随烦恼,就不需要对这些相作意。可是当随烦恼生起时,就应该取用这些相,把心中生起的肿瘤拔除。为了说明这个道理,世尊才这样说。巴利
Nimittānīti kāraṇāni. Kālena kālanti samaye samaye. Na nu ca kammaṭṭhānaṃ nāma muhuttampi achaḍḍetvā nirantaraṃ manasikātabbaṃ, kasmā bhagavā ‘‘kālena kāla’’nti āhāti. Pāḷiyañhi aṭṭhatiṃsa kammaṭṭhānāni vibhattāni, tesu bhikkhunā attano cittarucitaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā nisinnena yāva kocideva upakkileso nuppajjati, tāva imesaṃ nimittānaṃ manasikārakiccaṃ natthi. Yadā pana uppajjati, tadā imāni gahetvā citte uppannaṃ abbudaṃ nīharitabbanti dassento evamāha.
与欲相应,是指与欲俱行、与贪相应。接着要了解这三种寻的领域和所缘。其中,与欲相应的寻,其领域是八种与贪俱行的心;与瞋相应的寻,其领域是两种与忧俱行的心;与痴相应的寻,其领域是全部十二种不善心。而与疑和掉举相应的心,则是这两者各自单独的领域。所有这些的所缘,都是众生和诸行,因为它们是在对可喜、不可喜、无所谓可喜不可喜的众生和诸行中生起的。还应当作意另一种相,即与善相关的相。意思是,相对于那些相,应当作意另一种依靠善的相。这里所说的另一种相:当与欲相应的寻在众生身上生起时,修不净观就是另一种相;当它在诸行上生起时,无常作意就是另一种相。当与瞋相应的寻在众生身上生起时,修慈心就是另一种相;当它在诸行上生起时,界作意就是另一种相。当与痴相应的寻在任何情况下生起时,依靠五种法就是另一种相。巴利
Chandūpasaṃhitāti chandasahagatā rāgasampayuttā. Imesaṃ pana tiṇṇaṃ vitakkānaṃ khettañca ārammaṇañca jānitabbaṃ. Tattha chandūpasañhitānaṃ aṭṭha lobhasahagatacittāni khettaṃ, dosūpasañhitānaṃ dve domanassasahagatāni, mohūpasañhitānaṃ dvādasapi akusalacittāni. Vicikicchāuddhaccasampayuttacittāni pana dve etesaṃ pāṭipuggalikaṃ khettaṃ. Sabbesampi sattā ceva saṅkhārā ca ārammaṇaṃ, iṭṭhāniṭṭhaasamapekkhitesu hi sattesu ca saṅkhāresu ca te uppajjanti . Aññampi nimittaṃ manasikātabbaṃ kusalūpasaṃhitanti tato nimittato aññaṃ kusalanissitaṃ nimittaṃ manasikātabbaṃ. Tattha aññaṃ nimittaṃ nāma chandūpasañhite vitakke sattesu uppanne asubhabhāvanā aññaṃ nimittaṃ nāma. Saṅkhāresu uppanne aniccamanasikāro aññaṃ nimittaṃ nāma. Dosūpasañhite sattesu uppanne mettābhāvanā aññaṃ nimittaṃ nāma. Saṅkhāresu uppanne dhātumanasikāro aññaṃ nimittaṃ nāma. Mohūpasañhite yattha katthaci uppanne pañcadhammūpanissayo aññaṃ nimittaṃ nāma.
比如,按照“这个人的手很美、脚很美”这样的方式,当对众生生起贪爱时,应当从不净的角度去观察。你到底贪爱什么?贪爱头发吗?贪爱体毛吗?……贪爱尿液吗?这个所谓的身躯,是由三百块骨头撑起来的,由九百条筋腱绑在一起,涂着九百块肉,外面裹着一层湿皮,被肤色遮盖住,从九个疮口和九万九千个毛孔里不断流出不净之物,里面装满了腐尸,臭秽不堪,令人厌恶,令人反感,不过是三十二种腐尸的堆积罢了。这里面没有任何坚实的东西,也没有任何值得追求的东西。这样从不净的角度去观察时,对众生生起的贪爱就会被断除。因此,对他来说,这种从不净角度观察的方法,就叫作“另一种相”。巴利
Imassa hatthā vā sobhanā pādā vātiādinā nayena hi sattesu lobhe uppanne asubhato upasaṃharitabbaṃ. Kimhi sārattosi? Kesesu sārattosi. Lomesu…pe… muttesu sārattosi. Ayaṃ attabhāvo nāma tīhi aṭṭhisatehi ussāpito, navahi nhārusatehi ābaddho, navahi maṃsapesisatehi anulitto, allacammena pariyonaddho, chavirāgena paṭicchanno, navahi vaṇamukhehi navanavutilomakūpasahassehi ca asuci paggharati, kuṇapapūrito, duggandho, jeguccho, paṭikūlo, dvattiṃsakuṇapasañcayo, natthettha sāraṃ vā varaṃ vāti evaṃ asubhato upasaṃharantassa sattesu uppanno lobho pahīyati, tenassa asubhato upasaṃharaṇaṃ aññaṃ nimittaṃ nāma hoti.
对钵、衣等诸行生起贪时,按照《念处注》所说的方法,以“没有主宰者、只是暂时存在”的方式作意,那个贪就会被断除。这样一来,他的无常作意就成了另一种相。可是,对众生生起嗔时,应当依照《调伏嗔恚经》《锯喻经》等教导来修习慈心;这样修习时,嗔就被断除,他的慈心修习就成了另一种相。而对树桩、荆棘、草、树叶等生起嗔时,则这样作意界:“你是在对谁生气?是对地界生气,还是对水界生气?这个所谓生气的人又是谁?是地界,还是水界?”像这样作意界时,嗔就被断除,他的界作意就成了另一种相。巴利
Pattacīvarādīsu saṅkhāresu lobhe uppanne dvīhākārehi saṅkhāramajjhattataṃ samuṭṭhāpetīti satipaṭṭhānavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayena assāmikatāvakālikabhāvavasena manasikaroto so pahīyati. Tenassa aniccato manasikāro aññaṃ nimittaṃ nāma hoti. Sattesu dose uppanne pana āghātavinayakakacopamovādādīnaṃ vasena mettā bhāvetabbā, taṃ bhāvayato doso pahīyati, tenassa mettābhāvanā aññaṃ nimittaṃ nāma hoti. Khāṇukaṇṭakatiṇapaṇṇādīsu pana dose uppanne tvaṃ kassa kuppasi, kiṃ pathavīdhātuyā, udāhu āpodhātuyā, ko vā panāyaṃ kuppati nāma, kiṃ pathavīdhātu udāhu āpodhātūtiādinā nayena dhātumanasikāraṃ karontassa doso pahīyati. Tenassa dhātumanasikāro aññaṃ nimittaṃ nāma hoti.
当痴在任何地方生起时——巴利
Mohe pana yattha katthaci uppanne –
“ 亲近师长而住、听受教法、对已听受的教法全面提问决疑;
在合适的时候听闻正法,分辨什么是可行的、什么是不可行的;
依靠这五种法,痴界就会被断除。”巴利
‘‘Garūsaṃvāso uddeso, uddiṭṭhaparipucchanaṃ; Kālena dhammassavanaṃ, ṭhānāṭṭhānavinicchayo; Pañca dhammūpanissāya, mohadhātu pahīyatī’’ti. –
应当依止这五种法。比丘亲近师长而住时,会这样提醒自己:“如果我没向老师请示就进村,或者该做服务的时候没做,老师就会罚我,比如让我挑一百壶水之类的苦差。”于是他就会变得小心谨慎,这样一来,他的痴就被断除了。在学诵经时,他也会提醒自己:“老师会在诵经的时候,如果我没好好学、没好好背诵,就会罚我。”于是他就会变得小心谨慎,他的痴也就这样被断除了。他去亲近那些值得尊敬的比丘,问:“尊者,这是怎么回事?这是什么意思?”在反复请教中消除疑惑,他的痴也就这样被断除了。按时去听法的地方,认真听法,在各种地方,法义就会变得清楚明白。他的痴也就这样被断除了。他善于判断“这是有道理的,这是没道理的”,能分辨什么情况该做、什么情况不该做,他的痴也就这样被断除了。因此,对他来说,依止这五种法,就成为另一种“相”。巴利
Ime pañca dhammā upanissitabbā. Garuṃ upanissāya viharanto hi bhikkhu – ‘‘ācariyo gāmappavesanaṃ anāpucchantassa pattakāle vattaṃ akarontassa ghaṭasataudakāharaṇādidaṇḍakammaṃ karotī’’ti yattappaṭiyatto hoti, athassa moho pahīyati. Uddesaṃ gaṇhantopi – ‘‘ācariyo uddesakāle uddesaṃ aggaṇhantassa asādhukaṃ sajjhāyantassa ca daṇḍakammaṃ karotī’’ti yattappaṭiyatto hoti, evampissa moho pahīyati. Garubhāvanīye bhikkhū upasaṃkamitvā ‘‘idaṃ bhante kathaṃ imassa ko attho’’ti paripucchanto kaṃkhaṃ vinodeti, evampissa moho pahīyati. Kālena dhammasavanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā sakkaccaṃ dhammaṃ suṇantassāpi tesu tesu ṭhānesu attho pākaṭo hoti. Evampissa moho pahīyati. Idamassa kāraṇaṃ, idaṃ na kāraṇanti ṭhānāṭṭhānavinicchaye cheko hoti, evampissa moho pahīyati. Tenassa pañcadhammūpanissayo aññaṃ nimittaṃ nāma hoti.
而且,即使有人在三十八种所缘中修习任何一种,这些寻也一样会被断除。不过,这些相是直接对立的,是作为对治而存在的。由这些相所断除的贪等,才是真正彻底断除了。就像用湿木头、泥土、树枝等扑打火,也能把火弄灭;但水才是火的直接对立物,用水灭掉的火,才算真正彻底熄灭。同样,由这些相断除的贪等,才是真正彻底断除了。因此应当知道,这些相是特别说到的。巴利
Apica aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu yaṃkiñci bhāventassāpi ime vitakkā pahīyanti eva. Imāni pana nimittāni ujuvipaccanīkāni paṭipakkhabhūtāni. Imehi pahīnā rāgādayo suppahīnā honti. Yathā hi aggiṃ allakaṭṭhehipi paṃsūhipi sākhādīhipi pothetvā nibbāpentiyeva, udakaṃ pana aggissa ujuvipaccanīkaṃ, tena nibbuto sunibbuto hoti, evamimehi nimittehi pahīnā rāgādayo suppahīnā honti. Tasmā etāni kathitānīti veditabbāni.
“与善相应”是指依靠善、成为善的缘。“只在自身内部”是指只在所缘的范围内。“木匠”就是木匠。“用更细的木楔”是指,当他想取出某个木楔时,用比它更细的坚木楔。“粗大的木楔”是指钉在软木板或硬木板上、不平整的木楔。“敲击”是指用木槌敲打。“取出”是指这样敲打后,把它从木板中取出来。“拔出”是指知道现在它已经出来很多了,就用手摇动,把它拔出来。在这里,木板好比心;木板上的不平木楔好比不善寻;细木楔好比另一种善相,也就是不净修习等;就像用细木楔取出粗木楔一样,同样是用不净修习等善相去除那些寻。巴利
Kusalūpasaṃhitanti kusalanissitaṃ kusalassa paccayabhūtaṃ. Ajjhattamevāti gocarajjhattaṃyeva. Palagaṇḍoti vaḍḍhakī. Sukhumāya āṇiyāti yaṃ āṇiṃ nīharitukāmo hoti, tato sukhumatarāya sāradāruāṇiyā. Oḷārikaṃ āṇinti candaphalake vā sāraphalake vā ākoṭitaṃ visamāṇiṃ. Abhinihaneyyāti muggarena ākoṭento haneyya. Abhinīhareyyāti evaṃ abhinihananto phalakato nīhareyya. Abhinivaseyyāti idāni bahu nikkhantāti ñatvā hatthena cāletvā nikkaḍḍheyya . Tattha phalakaṃ viya cittaṃ, phalake visamāṇī viya akusalavitakkā, sukhumāṇī viya aññaṃ asubhabhāvanādikusalanimittaṃ, sukhumāṇiyā oḷārikāṇinīharaṇaṃ viya asubhabhāvanādīhi kusalanimittehi tesaṃ vitakkānaṃ nīharaṇaṃ.
217 “蛇尸等”这段话,是为了显示极其可厌、令人反感的尸体。“被系在脖子上”是指被某个敌人拿来,绑在脖子上、挂在颈上。“会感到困扰”是指变得痛苦、苦恼。“会感到羞愧”是指感到羞耻。“会感到厌恶”是指生起厌恶之心。巴利
217.Ahikuṇapenātiādi atijegucchapaṭikūlakuṇapadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Kaṇṭhe āsattenāti kenacideva paccatthikena ānetvā kaṇṭhe baddhena paṭimukkena. Aṭṭiyeyyāti aṭṭo dukkhito bhaveyya. Harāyeyyāti lajjeyya. Jiguccheyyāti sañjātajiguccho bhaveyya.
“得以断除”:当一个人靠自己的智慧去审察,看清“这些不善法是有过失的、会带来苦报”,于是像厌恶蛇尸之类的东西那样厌恶它们时,这些不善法就会被他断除。但如果有人没法靠自己的智慧去审察,那就应该去亲近亲教师、戒师,或者某位值得尊敬的同梵行者、僧团中的上座比丘,或者敲钟把比丘僧众召集起来,把这件事告诉大家。因为人一多,其中必定会有有智慧的人,他会开示应当如何看待这些不善法的过患,或者用“身体将被撕裂”这类话去制止那些寻。巴利
Pahīyantīti evaṃ imināpi kāraṇena ete akusalā dhammā sāvajjā dukkhavipākāti attano paññābalena upaparikkhato ahikuṇapādīni viya jigucchantassa pahīyanti. Yo pana attano paññābalena upaparikkhituṃ na sakkoti, tena ācariyaṃ vā upajjhāyaṃ vā aññataraṃ vā garuṭṭhāniyaṃ sabrahmacāriṃ saṅghattheraṃ vā upasaṅkamitvā ghaṇḍiṃ paharitvā bhikkhusaṅghameva vā sannipātetvā ārocetabbaṃ, bahunañhi sannipāte bhavissateva eko paṇḍitamanusso, svāyaṃ evaṃ etesu ādīnavo daṭṭhabboti kathessati, kāyavicchindanīyakathādīhi vā pana te vitakke niggaṇhissatīti.
218 应当修“不作意”:不去忆念那个寻,也不去作意它,而要把心转向别的地方。就像一个人不想看到色法时会闭上眼睛,同样,已经取好根本业处坐下来的比丘,当心里生起寻时,应当把心转向别处。这样,那个寻就被断除了;寻断除之后,应当再取根本业处坐下来。巴利
218.Asatiamanasikāro āpajjitabboti neva so vitakko saritabbo na manasikātabbo, aññavihitakena bhavitabbaṃ. Yathā hi rūpaṃ apassitukāmo puriso akkhīni nimīleyya, evameva mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā nisinnena bhikkhunā cittamhi vitakke uppanne aññavihitakena bhavitabbaṃ. Evamassa so vitakko pahīyati, tasmiṃ pahīne puna kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā nisīditabbaṃ.
如果还是断不掉,而他有背过的法谈段落,那就应该大声诵习。即使这样,在心念他处的情况下,那个寻还是断不掉。袋子里有一个手掌大的小册子,上面写着赞佛、赞法的内容;把它取出来诵念时,心要转到别处。即使这样还是断不掉,就从袋子里取出上下两块钻木,作意“这是上钻木,这是下钻木”,让心转到别处。即使这样还是断不掉,就取出针盒,一一辨认这些用具:“这叫针锥,这叫剪刀,这叫指甲剪,这叫针”,让心转到别处。即使这样还是断不掉,就拿起针,缝补衣服破损的地方,让心转到别处。总之,只要还没断掉,就通过做各种善行来让心转到别处。断掉之后,再取根本业处坐下来修,但不要再开始新的工作。为什么呢?因为寻被截断时,就没有机会作意业处了。巴利
Sace na pahīyati, uggahito dhammakathāpabandho hoti, so mahāsaddena sajjhāyitabbo. Evampi ce aññavihitakassa sato so na pahīyati. Thavikāya muṭṭhipotthako hoti, yattha ca buddhavaṇṇāpi dhammavaṇṇāpi likhitā honti, taṃ nīharitvā vācentena aññavihitakena bhavitabbaṃ. Evampi ce na pahīyati, thavikato araṇisahitāni nīharitvā ‘‘ayaṃ uttarāraṇī ayaṃ adharāraṇī’’ti āvajjentena aññavihitakena bhavitabbaṃ. Evampi ce na pahīyati, sipāṭikaṃ nīharitvā ‘‘idaṃ ārakaṇṭakaṃ nāma, ayaṃ pipphalako nāma, idaṃ nakhacchedanaṃ nāma, ayaṃ sūci nāmā’’ti parikkhāraṃ samannānentena aññavihitakena bhavitabbaṃ. Evampi ce na pahīyati, sūciṃ gahetvā cīvare jiṇṇaṭṭhānaṃ sibbantena aññavihitakena bhavitabbaṃ. Evaṃ yāva na pahīyati, tāva taṃ taṃ kusalakammaṃ karontena aññavihitakena bhavitabbaṃ. Pahīne puna mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā nisīditabbaṃ, navakammaṃ pana na paṭṭhapetabbaṃ. Kasmā? Vitakke pacchinne kammaṭṭhānamanasikārassa okāso na hoti.
不过,古代的智者们即使在做新的建筑工程时,也能断除寻。这里有一个故事:据说,帝萨沙弥的亲教师住在帝萨大寺。帝萨沙弥说:“尊者,我感到不适。”于是长老对他说:“这座精舍里洗澡水很难弄到,你带我去心山吧。”他就照办了。到了那里,长老对他说:“这座精舍完全属于僧团,你给自己造一个单独住的地方吧。”他说:“萨度,尊者。”他从一开始就同时着手三件事:背诵《相应部》、清理石窟、修火界遍的准备工作。他把业处修到了安止定,背完了《相应部》,也把洞窟的工程完成了。全部做完之后,就告诉了亲教师。亲教师说:“沙弥,你辛苦了,今天你就自己住吧。”那天夜里,他住在洞窟里,遇到适宜的气候,增长观修,证得阿拉汉果,就在那里般涅槃了。人们收取他的舍利,建了一座塔。至今还被称为“帝萨长老塔”。这一品叫做“无念品”。巴利
Porāṇakapaṇḍitā pana navakammaṃ katvāpi vitakkaṃ pacchindiṃsu. Tatridaṃ vatthu – tissasāmaṇerassa kira upajjhāyo tissamahāvihāre vasati. Tissasāmaṇero ‘‘bhante ukkaṇṭhitomhī’’ti āha. Atha naṃ thero ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre nhānaudakaṃ dullabhaṃ, maṃ gahetvā cittalapabbataṃ gacchāhī’’ti āha. So tathā akāsi. Tattha naṃ thero āha ‘‘ayaṃ vihāro accantasaṅghiko, ekaṃ puggalikaṭṭhānaṃ karohī’’ti. So sādhu bhanteti ādito paṭṭhāya saṃyuttanikāyaṃ pabbhārasodhanaṃ tejodhātukasiṇaparikammanti tīṇīpi ekato ārabhitvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ appanaṃ pāpesi, saṃyuttanikāyaṃ pariyosāpesi, leṇakammaṃ niṭṭhāpesi, sabbaṃ katvā upajjhāyassa saññaṃ adāsi. Upajjhāyo ‘‘dukkhena te sāmaṇera kataṃ, ajja tāva tvaṃyeva vasāhī’’ti āha. So taṃ rattiṃ leṇe vasanto utusappāyaṃ labhitvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ patvā tattheva parinibbāyi. Tassa dhātuyo gahetvā cetiyaṃ akaṃsu. Ajjāpi tissattheracetiyanti paññāyati. Idaṃ pabbaṃ asatipabbaṃ nāma.
219 219. 他停在这个阶段,却压制不住那些寻,于是心想:“停在这里就能压制它。”为了说明“寻根破坏品”这一部分,他接着又说了“诸比丘,如果那……”等话。其中,“应当作意寻行的安立”一句:所谓“行”,就是造作,意思是缘、原因、根源。“安立”就是安住之处;寻行的安立,即“寻行的安立”,应当对它作意。这话是说:这个寻是以什么为因、以什么为缘、以什么为原因生起的?应当作意诸寻的根,以及根的根。“我是不是走得太快了?究竟是什么原因让我走得这么快?不如我慢慢走吧。走得这么快对我有什么用?我要慢慢走。”他这样思惟之后,就慢慢走。这个方法适用于一切情况。巴利
219. Imasmiṃ ṭhatvā vitakke niggaṇhituṃ asakkonto idha ṭhatvā niggaṇhissatīti vitakkamūlabhedaṃ pabbaṃ dassento puna tassa ce bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha vitakkasaṅkhārasaṇṭhānaṃ manasikātabbanti saṅkharotīti saṅkhāro, paccayo, kāraṇaṃ mūlanti attho. Santiṭṭhati etthāti saṇṭhānaṃ, vitakkasaṅkhārassa saṇṭhānaṃ vitakkasaṅkhārasaṇṭhānaṃ, taṃ manasikātabbanti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti, ayaṃ vitakko kiṃ hetu kiṃ paccayā kiṃ kāraṇā uppannoti vitakkānaṃ mūlañca mūlamūlañca manasikātabbanti. Kiṃ nu kho ahaṃ sīghaṃgacchāmīti kena nu kho kāraṇena ahaṃ sīghaṃ gacchāmi? Yaṃnūnāhaṃ saṇikaṃ gaccheyyanti kiṃ me iminā sīghagamanena, saṇikaṃ gacchissāmīti cintesi. So saṇikaṃ gaccheyyāti so evaṃ cintetvā saṇikaṃ gaccheyya. Esa nayo sabbattha.
在这里,那个男人快步走的状态,就像这位比丘被寻缠住的状态;那个男人慢慢走的状态,就像这位比丘截断寻的活动的时候;那个男人站立的状态,就像寻的活动被截断后,他把心导向根本业处的时候;那个男人坐着的状态,就像他增长观修、证得阿拉汉果的时候;那个男人躺下的状态,就像他以涅槃为所缘,进入果定而度过一天的时候。在这里,当一个人追问“这些寻以什么为因、以什么为缘”,一直追溯到寻的最根本处时,寻的活动就变得松弛;当它松弛到极点时,所有的寻就彻底止息。这个道理也可以用《咚咚本生》来说明。巴利
Tattha tassa purisassa sīghagamanakālo viya imassa bhikkhuno vitakkasamāruḷhakālo. Tassa saṇikagamanakālo viya imassa vitakkacārapacchedanakālo. Tassa ṭhitakālo viya imassa vitakkacāre pacchinne mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ cittotaraṇakālo. Tassa nisinnakālo viya imassa vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattappattakālo. Tassa nipannakālo viya imassa nibbānārammaṇāya phalasamāpattiyā divasaṃ vītivattanakālo. Tattha ime vitakkā kiṃ hetukā kiṃ paccayāti vitakkānaṃ mūlamūlaṃ gacchantassa vitakkacāro sithilo hoti. Tasmiṃ sithilībhūte matthakaṃ gacchante vitakkā sabbaso nirujjhanti. Ayamattho duddubhajātakenapi dīpetabbo –
听说有只兔子在木苹果树底下睡觉,一个熟透的木苹果从果蒂上脱落,掉在它耳朵旁边。它被那声音惊醒,心里认定“大地裂开了”,吓得赶紧跳起来,拼命逃跑。其他四足动物看见它跑,也跟着一起逃。那时候,菩萨是一头狮子。它想:“大地只有在劫末毁灭时才会裂开,平时绝不可能发生大地裂开这种事。我干脆从头到尾去查个清楚。”于是它从大象开始,一个一个地问,一直问到兔子:“朋友,你亲眼看见大地裂开了吗?”兔子说:“是的,大王。”狮子说:“来,朋友,指给我看。”兔子说:“我做不到,主人。”狮子说:“来吧,别怕。”就用柔软温和的方式把它衔起来,带到离那棵树不远的地方。兔子站定之后说:巴利
Sasakassa kira beluvarukkhamūle niddāyantassa beluvapakkaṃ vaṇṭato chijjitvā kaṇṇamūle patitaṃ. So tassa saddena ‘‘pathavī bhijjatī’’ti saññāya uṭṭhahitvā vegena palāyi. Taṃ disvā purato aññepi catuppadā palāyiṃsu. Tadā bodhisatto sīho hoti. So cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ pathavī nāma kappavināse bhijjati, antarā pathavībhedo nāma natthi, yaṃnūnāhaṃ mūlamūlaṃ gantvā anuvijjeyya’’nti. So hatthināgato paṭṭhāya yāva sasakaṃ pucchi ‘‘tayā, tāta, pathavī bhijjamānā diṭṭhā’’ti. Saso ‘‘āma devā’’ti āha. Sīho ‘‘ehi, bho, dassehī’’ti. Saso ‘‘na sakkomi sāmī’’ti. ‘‘Ehi, re, mā bhāyī’’ti saṇhamudukena gahetvā gato saso rukkhassa avidūre ṭhatvā –
“ 尊者,我住的那个地方,有‘咚咚’的响声。
我也不知道那是什么,这‘咚咚’声到底是什么呢?”巴利
‘‘Duddubhāyati bhaddante, yasmiṃ dese vasāmahaṃ; Ahampetaṃ na jānāmi, kimetaṃ duddubhāyatī’’ti. (jā. 1.4.85) –
菩萨说:“你就待在这里。”然后走到那棵树下,看见了兔子躺卧的地方,看见了掉落的木苹果,抬头往上看,看见了果蒂。看到这些之后,他明白了:“这只兔子是躺在这里,睡着的时候,木苹果掉在它耳边发出声音,它便以为‘大地裂开了’,于是吓得逃走了。”弄清了这个缘由,菩萨就去问那只兔子。兔子说:“是的,大王。”菩萨便说出下面这首偈颂——巴利
Gāthamāha. Bodhisatto ‘‘tvaṃ ettheva tiṭṭhā’’ti rukkhamūlaṃ gantvā sasakassa nipannaṭṭhānaṃ addasa, beluvapakkaṃ addasa, uddhaṃ oleketvā vaṇṭaṃ addasa, disvā ‘‘ayaṃ saso ettha nipanno, niddāyamāno imassa kaṇṇamūle patitassa saddena ‘pathavī bhijjatī’ti evaṃsaññī hutvā palāyī’’ti ñatvā taṃ kāraṇaṃ sasaṃ pucchi. Saso ‘‘āma, devā’’ti āha. Bodhisatto imaṃ gāthamāha –
“ 听到木苹果掉落的声音,兔子以为‘咚咚’作响,撒腿就跑。
听了兔子的话,鹿群都吓得四散奔逃。”巴利
‘‘Beluva patitaṃ sutvā, duddubhanti saso javi; Sasassa vacanaṃ sutvā, santattā migavāhinī’’ti. (jā. 1.4.86);
于是菩萨安慰鹿群说:“别害怕。”这样,当一个人一路追寻到诸寻的最深根源时,那些寻就会被断除。巴利
Tato bodhisatto ‘‘mā bhāyathā’’ti migagaṇe assāsesi. Evaṃ vitakkānaṃ mūlamūlaṃ gacchantassa vitakkā pahīyanti.
220 在“寻根破坏品”这一节里,对于那些没办法调伏寻的人,接着又开示了另一种理由,应当这样调伏,于是说道:“诸比丘,如果……”等等。巴利
220. Imasmiṃ vitakkamūlabhedapabbe ṭhatvā vitakke niggaṇhituṃ asakkontena pana evaṃ niggaṇhitabbāti aparampi kāraṇaṃ dassento puna tassa ce, bhikkhavetiādimāha.
用上齿抵住下齿,就是把上齿压在下齿上。以心制心,就是用善心来压制不善心。就像一位强壮有力的人,抓住一个虚弱之人的头、脖子或肩膀,把他压制、挤压、折磨,让他变得炽热、疲惫、几乎昏死过去。同样地,比丘要跟诸寻对抗,心想“你们是谁?我又是谁?”,从而战胜它们,并且像这样——“就算身上的皮、筋、骨都只剩下,血肉都干枯”——发起大精进,去调伏诸寻。为了说明这个道理,他举了这个解释含义的譬喻。巴利
Dantebhidantamādhāyāti heṭṭhādante uparidantaṃ ṭhapetvā. Cetasā cittanti kusalacittena akusalacittaṃ abhiniggaṇhitabbaṃ. Balavā purisoti yathā thāmasampanno mahābalo puriso dubbalaṃ purisaṃ sīse vā gale vā khandhe vā gahetvā abhiniggaṇheyya abhinippīḷeyya abhisantāpeyya santattaṃ kilantaṃ mucchāparetaṃ viya kareyya, evameva bhikkhunā vitakkehi saddhiṃ paṭimallena hutvā ‘‘ke ca tumhe ko cāha’’nti abhibhavitvā – ‘‘kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu sarīre upasussatu maṃsalohita’’nti (a. ni. 2.5) evaṃ mahāvīriyaṃ paggayha vitakkā niggaṇhitabbāti dassento ima atthadīpikaṃ upamaṃ āhari.
221 诸比丘,这一段名叫“摄受分别”,意思很浅显。
就像一位老师教导一位从外国来的王子五种武艺,然后打发他走,说:“去吧,回到你自己的国家取得王位。如果路上有盗贼起来,你就用弓来应付,继续前进。如果弓丢了或者坏了,就用矛、用剑。”这样把五种武器各自该怎么用都教给他之后,才让他出发。王子照做,回到自己的国家,取得王位,享受王权的荣华。
同样地,世尊为了派遣致力于增上心的比丘去证得阿拉汉果,就教了这五节,意思是:“如果他在中途生起不善寻,就安住在‘取他相’这一节,调伏它们,增长观,就能证得阿拉汉果。如果做不到,就安住在‘过患’这一节;如果还做不到,就安住在‘不作意’这一节;如果还做不到,就安住在‘破寻根’这一节;如果还做不到,就安住在‘调伏’这一节,调伏诸寻,增长观,证得阿拉汉果。”世尊就开示了这五节。巴利
221.Yato kho, bhikkhaveti idaṃ pariyādānabhājaniyaṃ nāma, taṃ uttānatthameva. Yathā pana satthācariyo tiroraṭṭhā āgataṃ rājaputtaṃ pañcāvudhasippaṃ uggaṇhāpetvā ‘‘gaccha, attano raṭṭhe rajjaṃ gaṇha. Sace te antarāmagge corā uṭṭhahanti, dhanunā kammaṃ katvā gaccha. Sace te dhanu nassati vā bhijjati vā sattiyā asinā’’ti evaṃ pañcahipi āvudhehi kattabbaṃ dassetvā uyyojeti. So tathā katvā sakaraṭṭhaṃ gantvā rajjaṃ gahetvā rajjasiriṃ anubhoti. Evamevaṃ bhagavā adhicittamanuyuttaṃ bhikkhuṃ arahattagahaṇatthāya uyyojento – ‘‘sacassa antarā akusalavitakkā uppajjanti, aññanimittapabbe ṭhatvā te niggaṇhitvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇissati. Tattha asakkonto ādīnavapabbe ṭhatvā, tatrāpi asakkonto asatipabbe ṭhatvā, tatrāpi asakkonto vitakkamūlabhedapabbe ṭhatvā, tatrāpi asakkonto abhiniggaṇhanapabbe ṭhatvā vitakke niggaṇhitvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇissatī’’ti imāni pañca pabbāni desesi.
在寻的转起路径上得自在,指的是在寻的活动路径上训练有素、熟练通达,这称为得自在。说“他想寻什么寻就能寻什么”,是为了显示他得自在的状态。因为以前,他想寻的那个寻,却寻不起来;不想寻的那个寻,反而寻了。现在因为已经得自在,他想寻什么寻,就只寻那个;不想寻的,就不寻。因此说“他想寻什么寻就寻什么,不想寻什么寻就不寻什么”。关于“斩断渴爱”等内容,在《一切漏经》中已经说过了。巴利
Vasī vitakkapariyāyapathesūti vitakkacārapathesu ciṇṇavasī paguṇavasīti vuccati. Yaṃ vitakkaṃ ākaṅkhissatīti idaṃ assa vasībhāvākāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Ayañhi pubbe yaṃ vitakkaṃ vitakketukāmo hoti, taṃ na vitakketi. Yaṃ na vitakketukāmo hoti, taṃ vitakketi. Idāni pana vasībhūtattā yaṃ vitakkaṃ vitakketukāmo hoti, taṃyeva vitakketi. Yaṃ na vitakketukāmo, na taṃ vitakketi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṃ vitakkaṃ ākaṅkhissati, taṃ vitakkaṃ vitakkessati. Yaṃ vitakkaṃ nākaṅkhissati, na taṃ vitakkaṃ vitakkhessatī’’ti. Acchecchi taṇhantiādi sabbāsavasutte vuttamevāti.
《中部根本五十经义注》巴利
Mūlapaṇṇāsa-aṭṭhakathā